m::. - ^^ ^^0^ .^^ & .-^o^ ^/ .«.*' "»^ -J < •^ .^^ ^^R.v Method of Learning the Spanish Language: after the Sy>^te]u of A. F. Ahn, Doctor of Philosophy, and Professor at tlie Col- lege of Neuss. First American Edition, revised and enlarged. 12mo. 149 pages. KEY TO THE EXERCISES. Separate volume. Butler's Spanish Teacher and Colloquial Phrase-Book. An Easy and Agreeable Method of Acquiring- a Speaking Knowl- edge of the Spanish Language. 18mo. :i93 pages. Be Vere's Grammar of the Spanish Language. With a His- tory of the Language and Practical Exercises. 1-imo. 2T3 pp. Morales's Progressive Spanish Reader. With an Analytical Study of the Spanish Language. Bv Agustin Jose Mop.alf.- A. M., H. M.. Professor of the Spanish Language and Literature in the New York Free Academy. l"2mo. ^^ SEE END OF THIS VOLITME. ^Pi /^r? A NEW PEACTICAL Al^D EASY METHOD OF LEAENING GERMAN LANGUAGE. F.^AH N, DOCTOR OF PHIIOSOPHT AND PEOFESSOR AT THE COLLEGE OF NEU33. riRST COTJESE. SECOND A3IERICAN TKOM THE EIGHTH LOXDON EDITION. NEW YOEK: D. APPLETON AND COMPANY 549 & 551 BROADWAY. 1872. -f? PREFACE. Learn a foreign language as you learn your motket tongue : this is in a few words the method which I have adopted in this little work. It is the way that nature her- self follows, it is the same which the mother points out in speaking to her child, repeating to it a hundred times the same words, combining them imperceptibly, and succeeding in thi? way to make it speak the same language she bpeaks. To learn in this manner is no longer a study, it is an amuse- ment. Supposing the pupil to have learned his own language by principles, I thought it proper to add a few rules, which will serve to shorten the course and render the progress more secure. The Autiior. APR 18 f TABLE OF THE GERMAN DECLENSIONS. ARRANGED By Dr. MASTIN WEISS, FKOM THE UNIVEKSITT OP BERLm, LATE FRENCH AND GEEitA>: MASTER, AT THE ROYAL, COLLEGE DimGANNON. Almost every German Grammar used in England states a different number of Declensions. Dr. Ncehden whose Grammar is in every respect unquestionably the best, has attempted to reduce the number of Declensions to four, and I think most successfully. But German Grammarians have not adopted his system. "Wendeborn who tries to imitate the Latin gives five Declensions, whilst Dr. Render in his anxiety to smooth the way to the learner, has made appear an absurd doctrine of one Declension. In Germany itself Grammarians follow either Adelung or Klopstock. The system of the former being the best and offering the least confusion to the student. I have tried in the following table to arrange the Declensions of all German Nouns upon Adelunq's plan. © s ct :i 1 mi M, © © ^1 ; 1 « 1 Of this Declension are all tlu' Nouns. 1. In el, Masculine and Neuter. 2. In er. Masculine and Neuter. 8. In en. Masculine and Neuter. 4. The Diminutives in d}cn and kin, which are all of the Neuter Gender. 5. Neuters beginning with the syl- lable be and gc, and ending with c, as : 2)a§ ©cntdlbe, the Picture. $Da§ ©cbirgc, the Mountain. 6. ©as ^rbc) the Inheritance. ^a§ (Snbc, the End. and 2)er Sia\c, the Cheese. ^5 CO '2 S ai ^ ^^ p H 1 ; J gSJ H ^ Q ^ o s t i. it > "s It '1 ■je u s e 02 ' 2 «- ^ § 1 g^ .a ^ n^-A , i^4 .- «|i5| 1 lilt Is .°--i£ 111 g 5 1 2 = = e.!- =-*s ^.- s S i--" ^.=in- |!c |ii::-|||| s 1 |||||f*||:i S. ^ 11 _^^ a, o- roytni5. Province, ^V-rfon, Person, SJiufif, Music. Ziii'tner- \ - Chamlre- \ ^ l\ ^''\ 1 1 ^Vmbcn , 51ad)tl)err Unterjad §al§!tag §al§bm^ G ^aar © 7 Untevl}D[ 8 58ein!(t'lt 9 Beftcn 10 Slaf^ent 2)ai 1 1 g)emben 12 ^;)oien . i:h Unterr5< 1 9k4)tja( D^Qd)t^a (g^uvje Sri firm ^aar ^^ S^emijf -- mm\i) 2? Unterd^ gto- 1 "'■ ^^^ Hotel vier Jahreszeiten w 0ci'vcii=aBoftf)c Lingc pour Messieurs Gentlemen's linen 9kd)lf)emben Untevjadcn ,t)nl'3binben '^aax ©ocfen Unfcvl)Dfen 33eiiil!dt)er ffieftcn . 3:(ifd)entru'f)ei- 5)omen=3Bafdjc. ,'pfmbon . . S)o\m . . . Unterrfide glott garnirt 'DiQdjtjaden . ^](ad)t[)aukn . '2d)iivjen . . Avifinnontel . "^anx ©ttiimpfe (5[)emifetten . 5)!Qnid)etten . UntevQcmel . §al§lud)cr . So^c^entiidier meiber glatte „ gnrnirte 33Ioujcn . . ©it)ctfc . C^onbtiidjer . ©crbietlen ?(u§be[fern . Chemises . . chemises de nuit cumisoles . . faux-cols . . . cravattes . . paires de cliaussettes cale9ons pautalons ... moudioiis de poclie Linge pour Dames chemises . cale^ous . jupons urns . „ gai'uis bonnets de unit tabliers . paires de has chemisettes . raanchettes . manches . fichus . . . mouchoirs de poch( robes unies . ,, garnies blouses . . essuie-mains serviettes , racommodage Sliirts . . . night-shirts uuder-vesls . . collars . . . cravats . . . pairs of socles . drawers . . . trowsers .... waistcoats . . . pocket-handkerchiefs Ladies linen. chemises .... drawers .... petticoats plain . „ trimmed night-jackets . . night-caps ... ^pron^ .... combing-cloths pairs of stockings collars .... cuffs sleeves .... neck-handkerchiefs pocket-handkerchiefs dresses plain . . „ trimmed . blouses .... towels table-napkin mending . ^*. ' k" - Speoz7?tefis of Ger7JiarL Current JJajicL. a- ^^^^^/^i^^^C^y^-^Z/Z^-^i &*^W^:::^^;?i^^ ^ 7 /y The Small :Aljjhahel. rn 11 o .^>^ 'q^ i A> s, ' st a c. d ■ 6 ;../ -y y i-^-^ ^J--^ y-" O'Ceyy. '€^r^'^''^/2Yy,.^t^/^"ya^y[^yr^^^y€^^ /^/ c/'t^ -c^^^^^ /i^ J^ y/^/ ^^ y//^- ^.d^^- 4..-^ c^< THE PRONUNCIATION. I. THE ALPHABET. The German Alphabet is composed of the following twenty-six letters : % a, a. m, n, n. ^, b, b. £), 0, 0. (5, c, c. %\ h p. s:), b, d. Q, q, q. (S, e, e. 9?, r, r. 1^, f, f. @. [. §, s. ®. 8. g- X, t, t. §, ]§, h. U, u, u. -3. t, i. 3), t), V. 3. i. j. S, IP, w. ^\ !, k. ^*, ^V X. i^ h 1. dr t)^ y. 2}Z, m, m. 3/ 3/ z- The vowels are : a, ci, e, i, 0, 0, u, il The diphthongs or compound vowels are: c IT, et, an, ciii, eu ; all other letters are consonants. n. SniPLE VOWELS. Every vowel, followed by two consonants, is pronounced short: followed by only one consonant, it is long. ^, a, is pronounced like a in the English wore] father. 5ntcr, banfen, Si'ciG^r 5Bater, taben, ©alle. ^e, a, IS pronounced like a in the English word care. ta(te, ^drm, flatter, £afc, (Scibel, Scinber. ^ i ®, Cp is pronounced like e in the Englisli word letter (Efe(, ^ benfen, %xtz{, •r^x (5t"c(, ^trenncn ^DJBnner, '' veben, Gnbe, -.D^ebc, ,3, i, is pronounced like f is pronounced like x when these conso nants belong to the root or radical syllable. SBac^^?, Sud)^3, " tnadjfen, £)^^r \td)^, ^ud)[e. 1* 10 But the cf) preserves its gutteral pronunciation, when it stands before the § or f by contraction or in a com- posed word. nadjfeljcn, tnadjfen, bc§ ^itcl)^ instead of be§ ^iidje^ ®, f^f at the beginning of a syllable is pronounced like the English g in the word good ; but between two vow^els, in the middle of a word, and at the end of a syl- lable, it has a somid like the dj, only much softened. gel)en, c\xd% @abt, S33ac5en, (gteg, arttg, ^egcn, ^rng, ric^ttg. After n at the end of a word it is pronounced like l very soft 7v, @ang, 9?ing, (Sprung. *§f I), is ahvays aspirated at the beginning of a syl- lable. l^ter, I) art, §e(f}t, |)auC> §tmmel, grei^eit. The aspiration becomes however almost imperceptible before an e in the end-syllables. D^eilje, 9?u^e, feljen. After a vowel or a t, the tj is not pronounced, but only indicates that the syllable is long. §a{)n, (gtro^, STIjier, ^ U^r, friii mt^. 3, if only stands at the beginning of a syllabic, and is pronomiced like the English y in the word yet. 3a!)r, Qod)r ^ ^iigettb. ^ replaces the double f, and is pronounced short (Btod, ^ritd'e, ^^cfer. Sll, , fc^ is pronounced like the English sh. ©djattcn, (Bdjnk, ^eitfdje, fd](afen, (Sd}i(b, 2:tfc^. ^ and fp are pronounced like st and sp in English ; but in some parts of Germany they pronounce ft at the beginning of a word like sht, and fp like shp. ©tul}0 ftet)lcn, fptelen, (Stent, fpredjen, ftedjen. 2», t) has the sound of/l iBater, «oger, S3lel), ■IS, \X> is pronounced like the English v. Selt, 3Ste[e, SSanb. 3/ J is sounded like ^5. 3at)l, 3orn, §0(3, 3eit, S^^finsig, ^Jers, • 1^ replaces the double g and is pronounced very hard. ^lit> 9hi^en, fei^cn. VI. SYLLAEIC ACCENT. The Germans never pronounce several successive syl- lables one after the other with the same force ; the prin- cipal syllables are pronounced with a louder, and the others with a softer tone. The end-syllables in German words are pronounced very softly. The accent is always laid upon the radical syllable, that is, upon the one which includes the principal idea ; thus in the word @ered)ttg!eit (justice) which is derived from redjt (just), the second syllable is pronounced more strongly than the rest. In compound words, the first syllable always has the accent, because it presents the principal idea and modi- fies the following one : ^lumengarten, ©artenblume. PART I. 1. Singular, fcf) Bttt, I am ; / bu h[\i, thou art ; I cr ift, lie is ; 1 ftc iii, she is ; I Plural, irtr finb, we are ; tl)r fetb; you are ; jte flttb, they are. ®\\\j good ; gtop, rreat, large, big ; Jlein, little, small ; xd6)f rich ; ornt, poor ; jung, ycung ; alt, old ; mube, tired ; !ranf, ill, sick. 3(i) bin gro^, S^u bift lidn, (5r ift alt. @ie tft gut. Sir finb jung. S^r feib reiif). (Sie finb arm. ^tn idj gro5? ^iftbumltbe? Sfterfran!? ^ftfiejung? einb inir reirf}? (£eib i^r arm? (Sinb fie att? 2. I am little. Thou art young. We are tired. They are rich. Art thou sick ? You are poor. Is she old ? Are you sick ? Are they good ? He is tall (gro^). Am I poor? 8. Sliest, not. Stavf, strong ; treil, faithful ; faul, idle, lazy ; fictfitg, diligent ; BciC, wicked, naughty ; traurig; sad ; glucflidj, happy ; t)djilicf), polite. Sd\\i 'tiVi U\t? -3d) bin nic^t bofe. (gr ift traurig. mt finb ni^t ftarf. ©inb fie treu? ^ift bn nic^t glucflid)? 3^r feib nii^t fteijig. (Sie ift nic^t faul. 3ft er nic^t miiber %&k finb nid)t arm. arnm ^aft bu ntetn 93Zeffer? Q6) ^abe bctn SJ^cffer nidjt. 18. Charles, hast thou my pen? Louisa, hast thou my book? Henry has thy pen, and Lewis has thy book. Thou art right. My son is wTong. We have a book and a pen. Have jou also a horse and a watch ? This 17 knife is for Henry. Is tliis watch for thy mother ? Hag your friend a knife ? Charles and Lewis have a horse» Has your father still a sister ? Is this flower for my daughter ? 19. @cfcr)en, seen ; itcrlcrcn, lost ; gc[unben, found ; gcfauft, bought ; tjerfaiift, sold ; genommcn, taken. Ohs. The past participle is detached from the auxiliary and placed .ftt the end of the sentence. Qd) tjain metn ^mi) Derlorctt. §aft bit ntcin DJZeffcr c\c- funben? Qii) I)abe bein 93^effer nidjt gefmiben. So ift meine geber? §abt tl)r meine geber? SBir {)aben beine gcber nidjt. 3}^etn 35ater Ijat bte[e§ ^ferb gefauft* Sir ^abcn imfer §au§ berfauft. So l)aft bu meine UI)r gefnnben? Sarum {)aben (Ste meine U^r genommen? ^cf) I)abe 3I)re dJlntkv unb 3I)re (gdjirefter gefel)en, Sarum l^at S^v S3ater biefe^3 ^am nid)t gefanft ? §at bein ^ruber meine gtber genommen? (5r Ijat beine geber nicfjt genommen, 20. "Where hast thou found this book? Have you lost your pen ? Has your father bought this horse ? Why have you sold your watch ? Why have you not taken my pen? My brother has found thy knife. We have seen thy mother. I have not yet seen this woman. Charles and Lewis have lost their mother ; they are very sad. 2L Nominative. Accusative. 5^cr SSatcr, ben 93atcr, the father ; / bicfer Satcv, / bicfcn 23ater, this father. !Dcr £cnig, the king ; bcr •Qiit, the hat, bonnet ; bcr en_j^tig gefe^en. §aft bn biefen ^ogel geMjTIoberjenen ? 24. We have lost our dog. This man has lost a son and a daughter. Where have you found my pencU ? Have you already seen my brother and mother? I have bought a bonnet for my sister. Our neighbor has found thy knife and cane. Where hast thou bought this table ? Thy brother has taken my chair. Have you written a letter? AVe have found this stick and that one. Num. \d\\, fchie, km, } ^^j^ -. . t()v, i(;ve, il)v, ) ^g,, Accus. feincn, kinc, ietn, S ' ' if)rcn, \[)xz, itjr, ( ©clef ertj ^rg.ad ; jcfannt jknown ; ^£LDnfcl^_Jbhe uncle ; V\t Xante, the 'aunt; bct ^^inc^ctbiU. the tnimble ; bic ^cl)ecre, the scissors. 3}Zei7%reunb ift tranrig ; fctn 33atcr nnb fcine Djtutter finb Ixmt Waxwt %0A\tz ift ^ufricben : il)r (Sol)n nnb tl)re Todjtcr finb fe!)r ficifin. *pcturid) \y:d f einen ^tocf, fehti- 19 lll)r imb fetit DJceffer Derloren. lljre geber unb it)r ^itd) t)er(orcn. J'.ttcr, the mother ; bicfc OJcutter, this mother ; Gen hex li)ftittcr, of the mother ; blefer ^Diutter, of this mother. 5)ic 2)Zagb; the maid-servant ; bte £6utgin, the queen ; bte 5Jlact}bavin, the female neighbor ; angcfommcn, arrived ; abgcrcijl, departed. !5)ie 3}^iitter ber ^dntgin ift angefommen. ©er ^ater ber 9^ad)barin tft abgeretft. Qd) I)abe ben ©arten ber 3:ante gcfc^en. ^aben @ie ben ^leifttft ber ©djiuefter gefnnben? S^iefe gran ift bte ©djtnefter ber 9tadjbarin. !D{efer dJlainx ift ber ^ruber ber 93cagb. !Da^3 ^iub btcfer gran ift immer !ran!. 28. The bonnet of the mother is beautiful. The sister of ' the queen is not beautifuL Is the father of the servant arrived ? Are you the brother of the (female) neighbor 1 I am the sister of this woman. Hast thou taken the chair of the sister? Have you seen the horse of the aunt ? We have known the father of this servant. 29. Nom. ber 93atcr, the father ; / btci'cr ^akv, this fathe - - - ■ . 1^ jefcl jGcn;3iit.,^^|!^I|^,2£jlli.^ther ; ^^^bje jcg. gjatcrg^^ oTthis father , Nom. bai'lRlnbTthe child ; btcfcF^Tnb7tnis~child ; Gen. hc§ £inbc0, of the child , bicfeg Itmbcg, of this chila 20 5)cr (id}ul;mad)ci', the shoemaker ; bcr Sdjneiber, the tailor ; ber ©art ,jier, the gardener ; bcr ilau[mann/ the merchant ; ber 5(rjt, the physi- cian ; }^a§ 3inimcr, the room ; t:aS ^cU, the peojifer — >=t=.,.^ Obs. All neuter nouns and most masculine nouns take § or e§ in the Genitive Singular. Sjie d]}ac],h be§ (SdjitcibcrS ift tvant 2^er_0oSn_be^lacfjs bar§ tft nod) [eljr jmu]. ©ie ^liime be^ ©cirtner^ ift fei]r Icljdn. ^£e£_©aito_bei_gM.alJflj£fc^5^ SDer ^'6m(^ ift ber S3atcr be§ S3ol!e§. Sjie grau be§ ^rsteS ift immcr gufrieben. 24Jl5M^^3-=@^iL.^^I_SflMi_gefe5eit^ S>ii |aben ba^ "ilJferbbeF^ufmannS gefauft. ©^^_bu_ben_^Ici* ftift be§ ^ruber|_£enommen^ SSo ift bie B)IagbTeF@^iiI)^ 'lna5eBT~^ir^|ure"'bei^tmt:ter§ ift immer offcu. S^ie 2:odjtcr btcfcS 2J^anne§ ift abgereift. SBir l^aben bie 93luttcr bicfe^ llinbe^ gefaitnt. ^er ©arten biefcS §aufe§ ift !(etn. 30. This man is tlie brother of the gardener. This woman is the sister of the shoemaker. This child is the son of the tailor. The door of the house is not open. I have seen tho son and daughter of the physician. \Ye have seen the horse of the merchant. The servant of the neighbor is the sister of this gardener. Yihj is the door of this room open ? We have known the son of this merchant. The dog of the neighbor is faithful. Tho mother of this child is arrived. 31. Nam. cin 33atcr, Gen. cme0 33atcr§; cin 5itnb; cincB ^inbcg. cine SLltuttcr, cin or 2)tutter, J)4r_^e^enf^irm£_tliejambrella ; haS Sebcrmclfer, the penknife ; gefhrn, yesterc^r^ °* " Obs. The pronouns incin, bctn, fein, {f)r, iin[cr, cucr, are declined like cm, cine, cin. ^inL,@teAg^^_^jg eineg Slr^^teg? -gcQin ber (So^^t ^dne§^^^^^^^7^^^ (SiFba^ ^ouImemeOFai^bar^ gefaufF? !^^J^ruber beine^ ^vcM^ tft peftevtt an gefom^ mm. ^0 ift ber^^genfdiirm ^ineg Dnfel^? §aft bit ba§ 3^1^!^^^^* ittetner ©djineftcr gefetjen ? 2Bir l^aben bcii ^ricf beiiier DJMter gelefen. Mtxn DnM I)at ba§ §aii3 OI)re§ S3ater3 Gcfauft. j^d) Imbe benMotfjl^^ve^ ^riibeij JiStLorea* ^e£@arteiLU^S£^glli ^Jfng^]^ ^ ^%l^ Unfere 23uagb ift bie Zodjitx eure§ ©drtncrFT^^L'o ift bcr '^^egeu^ 21 fdjirm unfcrer iD^utter? ^arl Ijat ben gmcjerrjiit [cinet ©djiDcfter genoimneu, 2ox\\\c ijat ha^ gebcnncj'fer ifjver ZanU gcnomnicn. 82. I have found tlie hat of a child. Are yon the servant of my uncle? I am the servant of your tailor. The penknife of thy brother is very good. The pen of thy sister is not good. The house of our aunt is large. * Henry has lost the letter of his father. Louisa has found the pen of her brother. Is the garden of our uncle as fine as this one? We have found the hat of your neighbor's son (the hat of the son of your neigh- bor.) Lewis has read the letter of his friend. Louisa has bought a flower for a child of her sister. 33. 1 Nom. ber 93tubcr, the brotlier ; / Dat. fcem S^ruber, to the brother ; Nom. ba§ 53iid}, the book ; bie (ict)tr>cj}er, the sister , Dat. bcm ^ucl}e, to the book ; tcr (Edjweftcr, to the sister. ®c{)ort, belongs ; gclicl}cn, lent ; gcgcbcn, given ; gefd^icft, sent ; tcT; fpvod)en, promised ; gcjeigt, shown ; bcr i^rcxmb, the friend ; tie t^rcmii bin, the female friend. Obs. 1. If the Genitive terminates in c§, the Dative takes c, ^m\)C§, SBudje. 2. The Dative generally precedes the Accnsative. 3. In in- terrogative and negative sentences the English auxiliary verb to do is not translated in German. 5jiefe§ §au§ gcljort bem Dn!cl tneineS ^'tai^barS. ^cncr ©arten geljort bcr Xante mmtQ greimbc^. :24-teL^iliL gater eineu -^BricL Bt^ifetcbcn. (Sie !)at bcr gremibtu iljrcr ©djipe[teFcutri3Iume gegeben. ^arl Ijat bcr (Sdjraeftcr fciii gcbcrmeffcr gelicljcn. §aft bu bem Slrjte mein ^ud) Gcfdjicft ? 3d) I)abe bte]em ^tube etnen ^oge( tjcrfprodjen. ^etnrid) Ijat bicfcr grau unfcrn 9kgen[djtrm geltefjcn. Souife I)at biefctit DJIanne unfern ©aiteu gc^eigt, Qd) tjabc ineinc gcber bcin g-reimbe meineS ^rubers gccjcben. 1 34 '^ This hat belongs to the gardener. This house belongs to the mother of my friend. I have written to my uncle and aunt. My sister has lent her thimble to the friend (fern.) of your brother. My uncle has sent a watch to the son of your neighbor (fem.) Have you given a 22 cliair to this cliild? Have you lent an umbrella to this woman? Does this garden belong to the king? (belongs this garden, &c.) No, it belongs to the sister of the king. We have sold our horse to the friend of our un- cle. Does this knife belong; to this or to that servant ? Nom. cin 33ud), a book ; cine ^cbcr, a pen ; Dat. eincm 5Bud)e, to a book ; eincr Scber, to a pen. ■5^_^cr^ctter,Jhe cousin ; fcte ©afe, the female cousin ; Slmanc^Amelia,^ fccr^artnct/ the gardener ; l)ie ©drtnertn, the gardener's wife. ^.^tefer_®arleiLii£|ortji^ ©iefeg DJteffcr cjepHlmeF~SStgbr^^t^^at meinem 3Sater_einen ^rief gefd)rteben. §einrtc^ I)at metner ^^uHeFTme^Iumrgegeben. "^f^^obc^^i'^nt Onfel mein ^ferb gelte^en. @te l)aben un^ fcrer ^ante i^r §au§ cerfaiift, ^arl \)QiX femem greunbe etn ^ud) gefd}{(ft. ^malte ^at il)rer greunbin einen gtngerl}ut gelieljen. '^iefer 9}2ann ^at eurer ^^ac^barin einen 33ogeI ge^ fdjtcft? §aft bu mctncm 33atev btefe llf)r gegeben? §abt il)r un[erer ^a[e einen ^(eiftift gelteljen? m. I have lent my pen to a friend of my brother's. Hast thou given thy cat to a friend (fern.) of my sister's ? We have given the letter to a servant of the physician's Have you sent this flower to our gardener? This gar- den belongs to my cousin (masc. and fem.) This um- brella does not belong (belongs not) to your brother. Does this pen belong (belongs this pen) to thy brother or to thy sister? Has Henry written to his father or to his mother? Has Louisa written to her uncle or aunt? 3T. SSott, of, from, by. Of the mother, bcr 3}iiitter, or »cn bcr 9?tutter; of the child, be0 JlinbeS, or tjon bcm j^lnbe; of the _ father, be g ^atcr gj^ojL;_^on_bcm^COaier4_____^ Jof2^^^r3^^_bieieFg^teii£^^ ""ofmysisterTlnHncF^c^irejler, or t)0irmcmer<£c5toc|HrI 3d/ ft'tcc^e, I speak, or I am speaking ; it»ir fprec^ctt, -we speak, we aro ipeaking ; \X)itb gcltebt, is loved. Obs. Of 18 expressed by the Genitive, when o/ relates to a substan- 1 bv " ~ ' iiive. and by t^cn followed by the Dative, when of relates to a verb 23 Qd) fjobc ba^3 ^uc^ hc^ 3Ir3te§ ge[el}en. §aben Sle bte[e^3 §3udj Don bcin ^r^te erljattcn ? SBir Iiabeu ,benj^avtcn im* 2g^to3^i!t?^^i^) ^ci^c ^^(^["^ G^]^* ^on metnera £)ufe(^" cxljaltm, §emncf) (}at etnen ^rief mn feinem S3atcr imb (t)on) feiner S^tuttcr crljaltcn. Qdj fpredje con bent ^onitie mib ber ^ontgin* SBir fprcdjcn uon 3f)rem ^rnber mib -31)X'er edjiucftcr, uon biefent 9J^anne nnb btefcr gran, (2pre d]en vgte Don mctnem better obcr metner -53afc? .^cinria^ luirb Don fetncm ^ater nnb feiner DJIntter oelicbt. 88. I have received this horse from my friend. I have bought this cat of thy sister. Louisa has got an um- brella from her uncle and a watch from her aunt. I speak of this dog and of this cat, of this bird and of this flower. We are speaking of your cousin (masc. and fem.) Amelia is loved by her uncle and aunt. Our gardener's wife has received a letter from her son and daughter. Henry is the son of this shoemaker and Louisa is the daughter of this tailor. 39. ^^ (ii1)on, beautiful ; fd}oncr, more beautiful ; bcr [djonflc, the most beautiful ; I gut, good ; bcffiT, better ; bcr bcjle, the best ; I l)od), high : t)ot)cr, higher , bcr ()cd)ftc, the highest. 5)-ag ^l)ter, the animal ; ber^c^e^he lion ; ber 3jC(cr, the tiger ; ^as a.VctaU, the metal ; ha§ SlIEcrTthe silver ; baS ©olb) the gold. Obs. The Superlative is formed by adding jle or cjlc, and softening tlie radical vowel. S:)ie^a^e tft ntdjt fo ftar!, aU ber §nnb. g^er gotne ift [tarfer, alg ber gtger, S^cr Soidc ift ^a^^ ftarffte 2:f)ter. Tlcin 92ad)bar ift reic^er, a(§ ©ie;^ er ift ber reidjfte ^anu 'telSfaH: ^43a§'"^or5~tfrT^erer, aU ba§ ©ilber. ©a^ (Eifen ift nii^tidjer, aU ba§ ©itbcr. S^a§ (gifen ift ba§ nit^* Iid)fte Wctail Sonife ift fd)oner, al§ 5Imatie ; aber §einridj ift ba§ fd}onfte ^inb. _Snbtt)ic^ ift jiincter; atg M -L-gr Hi ber _™ftiJgo|n_imfer^^ farHj ^ter, a UM±jvMZZ~ _^r' ottiftr^olm J^mg^^n^ "ScT^nnb ljrtaiTrene^3:t)ier. ^iefesBn^tfTbfffer, alg iene^\ ,^n_bif^^^_berjegeg^^ t^an? bTefe?lHnfiiianneIt|T^a§ I}od]fte ber ©tabt. 2i . 40. This bird is very little; it is the smallest bird. Louisa IS very beautiful; she is more beautiful than her sister. (The) silver is not so useful as (the) iron. The tiger is not so strong as the lion. The tailor is the happiest man in the town. Henry is more diligent than Lewis, but Charles is the most diligent. Thy umbrella is very beautiful; the umbrella of my cousin is the most beau- tifuL You are not so poor as my cousin; he is the poorest man in the town. My chair is too high; this one is higher; but the chair of my mother is the highest. I have given my brother the best pencil and the best pen. 41. 1 Norn, tccx, who ? / Dat. Went, to whom ? Ace. Wen, whom? / SBa§, what ; chna0, something ; md}t§, nothing ; Scmanb, anj'body, ' 6omebod_y ; S^tiemanb, nobody ; ijux, here ; ha, there. / Ser tft ba? (§^ tft ber ©d)neiber ; e^ ift ^einriif) : id) Inn c^. SBer tft jenerSJMnn? (5§ tft ber ^djufjmac^er ; e6 ift ber (SoI)n be§ ^rgteg. Ser l)at biefen ^rtef gefci)rtebeu? geI)oHbi^]Tu5F?'~%trppHmemer ©c^iDefter. ^m ha^ _te_@ie_be|L£ut.a!££^!I^ ^^^ ^^^ ^^^^^^ ®^^ ^^^f^ ^Imtie Trfaften? ^^^JoB^^^te^^efeJen? Sag {)aben _^ie ux ^ Joren^? /vS j^TmSB^e Homu ^a&etr@ieetiMg gefun^ Ten? ,^oJft35£_gruber? ^_grjft m^Tgie^r^ft^gemanF ^2^ ^i/ijj[^^temcm j boT ' ^at Qcmani tnetne ^^er genoni?^ men? "Wteman5"5^t tl)re geber genommen. 42. Who is there? It is my tailor; it is Charles. Who is that woman? It is the wife of the shoemaker; it is the servant of the neighbor. To whom have you lent your knife ? To' the son of the gardener. To whom has your brother sold his dog? To the sister of my friend. From whom hast thou received this bird? From the father of this girl. What have you bought? I have bought an umbrella for my cousin (fem.) What have you taken? I have taken nothing. Of whom do you speak? ([prccijen (Sic). I am speaking of nobody. Has anybody read my letter? Nobody has read 3"our letter. 43. i\o«i._^clc^ \-odd)C, Vodd)c'§, wlio or whicli ; Dat. ^J^^^diim^\vdd)CXf \Md)cm, to whom or to which; Ace. Joc^n^ \vdd)C, \v>dd)c§, whom or which. / !Der 3.iicJ)Icr, the joiner; gcmacl)t, made; auSgcgangen, gone out; 5c. ( Wcmt, cried, wept; in, in ; mit, with ; bet, with (at the house of). Obs. The prepositions in, mit, bet govern the Dative. . Setite^ifdilejLliat bte[en SiJJjicma^? SBeWje mac^h iat btejeiTOTief gcfc^nmnT' ^eld)c§ ^inh ^at geiDemt? _SeI^e^.£MUl£6j^rL^!La3^^ ? SSeldje lU)r ^ft bit I3cr loren? SBelcfjc§ §au§ I)at 3I)r S5ater mian\t? S3oii inel djem S5oI!e fprecljeu @te ? ^Otitjpelcl^em gmmbe BiiLbit au^ ^ncaangeu? JJin2cHi£m_^arteOMiL^ iBcWje '(^cber^ajTbuboP^elc^er graiT^o^TirMrr^tcfit-r- cjegeben? SBelc^em 3}Bb(^en ^ft bit bemen gtitgerljut gclic^ {)cn? .^eLtPcIdjem ^aitfmaniL£ci£££L@i'Lbtefcit glciftift ge^ ^_^ir[t? Wlit wcldjtv gcber ^aben @tc bte[eu ^ricf gcfdjiic* bcu? D}ljt ircm [iiib @ie angefoimrtciLl, 44. Wliero is your sister? She is in lier garden. Where is your brother? He is with (at the house of) his friend. Is your father gone out? He is gone out with the phy- sician. Which hat have you bought? Which book have you read? Which pen have you taken? Which boy is the most diligent? Which watch is the best? Eroni which gardener hast thou received this flower? At the house of (hex) which woman hast thou bought this bird? In which house have you lost your thimble? With whom is your brother departed? To which man have you lent your umbrella ? Which stick have you lost? Yfhich joiner has made this table? 45. S)cr Slyfe l, the apple ; hit Sime^ the pear ; gegcfycn, eaten. Ohs. In those sentences, which begin with a relative pronoun, tho jcrb is placed at the end. Jgtrj abenj men -^vub er^ y etd) cr [eljr grog tft. ^^^r l]aU eiuT^^'^epcrrBelcIjC 7^^r~lTeiir ilt.TIZeitr^o^n fjat ciu ^ucf), inctdje^ fef)r niil^Itd) ift. ^cr @arten,_jgeidieit be in pntd gcfauit Ijat^ ift fcfjr fdjon. 'X)k gcber, tnetcfje luctii iBcttcr gcpmbeiip"t, i'^^T^^F^ptT^^cI) I)abe ba§ §au6 ge^ [cijcn, lnclcljc^3 Qi)v ^atcr' gcfauft ijat. ^aben ^te ben gnua 26 cjetijut Qefimbcn, iDcIdjeu nietne ^dyicqkv 'oerloreu Ijat? §afl ju bcii "^j^f d^tmUjlfJ^^tn bit gefimbcn !]a[t? ^^^ ^]^^^ ^jijcMjcm @ie -3fen_%tef ^egeben i;iakii. " |)icr ift bte ^foirr Uietdjcr Uiir itnfcnt ^imb tterfauft Ijabm. S^kx ift ber Elr^t, jou IP el d) cm lijir [o o]tj ^ud}txL_ "^ ' 46. '' 0^5. Instead of Wdi^jtx &c. may be iised ber, bte hd^^ for instance: l<;r ©attcn, ben or todd)m Wix gefauft 'i)abm, I have a dog i\'iiicii is very little. Yf e have a, cat wliicli is very fine. My father has bought a house vfhicli is very beautiful. Have you seen the umbrella v^hich my mother has bought? Hast thou found the pear which thy brother has lost? We have seen the horse which your uncle has sold. Where is the thimble which you have found? I have taken the pencil which my cousin has bought. Henry has eaten the apple which his brother has received. Have you seen the woman of whom we speak? Have you read the letter Vvdiich I ha,ve written? Have you found the boy to whom this Denknife belongs? 47. ScriciiiQc Wd&jcx, lie who ; bicjcntge ir>cld)c, slie ^v]lo , basjeuige U>c(dj)c0, "'■■■~~'*~=— — = — °°° "''^ tliat which. Obs. Instead of berjcTtige etc. may also be used bet/ hk hci§y loi instance : bcr, tcd&jCX* ^^^rjenic^c^ ^^'^^!L/^^^H^!E_ifciiiI!J^ liefer giitGcr^ fleiner, aU bieienige beuie^S ^rubers, !©tefc§ ^avS ift jdjo^ ner, aU baSjemge unfereS 9kdjbar§, ^^Jjobejiteinen ^ut Deiior^en xtnb beit Hteine§ ^etter^>. SStr^pFeiflieine geber "■"gefunborinbTre bcineS greun^ ^einrid) fjat ittein ^nit^ mer gefe^eit imb ha^$ mdnt§> Dn!e(§. ^^fi bu meincri @to(l jmomnmi ober beitmeinc^S ^rubers ? "'^'^aJTft uid)t beine '"^TuHeJ ba§ ift TtTntemer ^OUittxr^^aUn (Bk ntctn 2}2cffer ober ba§ be^3 ©artnerS? g]jred]en @te t)on^temeTn (Soline _ober tionJuniL^g ^tr^tcgj ®a§ ^ferb, iDeldje^S iDir gcfauft ()al)en, ift jiiuger, al§ basjenige SD^tQ S3ater0« 48. He who is rich, is not always contented. My dog is more faithful than that of my uncle. Our servant ia 27 stronger tlian tliat of our neiglibor. My room is large? than that of my friend. This umbrella is finer than that which we have bought. Have you taken my pen or that of my sister? This is not your pencil; it is that of my brother. I speak of my book and of that of your friend. Louisa has lost her thimble and that of her mother. Thou hast eaten my apple and that of my cousin. My watch is better than that of my cousin (fern.) I have received your letter and that of your brother. 49. I <§emrid), Henry ; ^outfe, Louisa ; J <§emrid)§, Henry's ; £ouifcu§, I omsa's ; I bem «§emrtd}, to Henry ; bcr I'ouife, to Louisa ; ' ton tgtetnrtd), of or from Henry ; i)on ^ouil'en, of or from Louisa, !3BiU)eIm, William ; " * SBtcn, Vienna ; Scl)anrt, John ; 1 Sicin, Cologne ; (Smilie, Emily ; I §tad)en, Aix-la-Chapelle ; l)ci$t, is called ; ' gcf)t, goes ; rcof)iit, lives. (S'r f/d^t ^axl, Lis name is Charles. The hat of Henry, bcr •^dit -^dnxidjS'^ to Brusselo, mid) S3ru[[cl; 'a\ Brussels, gu or in ^viifjel. S}teiu ^ruber Ijeij^t §etnr[ci) mib luelne <2dpt\kx Ijcigt Souife. g)erJ3ater SiU jelmg ift an g efommcn , 2jie SJ'aitter ^oiiifcn^ i[t aigerciftT SiiblDtcjg Onfel t[ t__[e|l_Ji^c^ (£nii^ J[icn^ put .ifiLMLlgJlgll-^"""^^^ ^!L^':!^^^l j^un'qjJCtL^ein^ '^^^^^^ ^Hftalte Ijat ^em Qd^amT l^^egeSer geUefenT ^arl^otber (^milie eine Finnic gegc- ben. ©cljort bic[cr ©arten bem Sub-rig ober ber Earcliiie ? ^.^^ioJI^Sil^cfm? (Er j^mit llarl i mb So\c\)l) c mps-c^axiQnL_ ^ SgoI^nrTTPOnTcf uTSSjlncrober mJ3anil mjt 3I)r ^eltcrjldc& SBicu obcTno^ ^flm J'^fl^an g cjHler, al^^ g^on? -SfF^'ljr grcitub t 3on ^oln ober D onjkdjeuL-^^ Obs. "The proper Sanies of persons are declined with or without an article. If declined with the article, they remain unchanged. Without the article, the feminine names ending in e add r\§ in the Genitive and tl in the Dative. 50. ^ly cousin's nam^e is John. The daughter of our gardener's wife is called Jane (-3of)t"^rtna). Art thou Charles's or Ferdinand's brother? Where are Henry and Lewis? They are in my father's room; they are gone out with William. Have you lent j^our pen to Henry? Who has given this fiower to Louisa? We 2S have received a letter from Levvis; lie is at Dussel* dorf. The sister of Charles is very short. The bonnet of Josephine is too large. My uncle lives in Vienna and my cousin in Paris. My friend goes to Cologne. William is arrived from Amsterdam. Have you seen John and Lewis? My garden is larger than that of Emily. Louisa is gone out with her mother. Henry \£ departed with his friend Ferdinand. PART II. 51. Norn, bie Xijcrie, the tables ; Gen. bcr ^ifd}e, of the tables ; Dat. ben Xi\d)tn, to the tables ; Ace. bie Xifcfje, the tables. Obs. Substantives of one syllable take c in the plural. Those nouns the radical yowel of which is a, C, it, an, generally change it into d, C, ii, du. The Dative plural of all substantives terminates in n. SDie greimbe metneS ^ater§ finb angel'cmmen. !3)ie ©oljiie itn[ere§ 3tad}bar§ finb fd)r f(eiBig» ^te (Stiiljle, inelc^c Von gefanft Ijabert, finb fe^r fc()on. ^abcn (Sie bie 'Bttibte Sten unb Berlin gefel^eit? I^arl ^at bie §iite ^iU ^e(m§ unb gerbtnanb§ gefnnben. SJcein ^ater Ijat bie -^riefe 3;5rc$ DnkU nic^t cr{)alten. ©a§ Stfen unb ba§ ©ilbcr finb 9}|etaIIe. !Die $ferbe finb nityidjer, aU bie |)nnbe. IDie DJZctgbe eure§ 9^adjbar§ finb fel)r fletBtg. 3Dte ^iler^te in biefer ^taht finb fel)r retd). Sent !)aben ©te bie ©tdcfe nieineS ^rubers gegeben? !l)ie 3r!)tcre, trelc^e tt)ir in 3I)i*cm ©arten gefel)en ^aben, finb fc^r ftarf. §aben ©ie ben grcnnbcn §einrirf]6 gcfdjrieben? (^chd biefen §nnb ben (£obncn meineS iSruber§. SBir fpredjen Don hen ^ricfen :!c5'2Iiite^3. 52. Thy brother has bought the dogs of my neighbor. The iriends of Charles are ill. Have you seen the horses of our uncle? Yv^ho has written the letters of 29 my brother? Where are the hats that jou have bought? 1 have received this bird from tha sons of the phy- sician. I have given your umbreUa to the maid-ser- vants. (The) metals are very usefuL (The) dogs are very faithM. Your brother is gone out with the sons of our neighbor (fern.). Cologne and Aix-la-Chapelle u.re towns. I speak of Henry's and William's friends, 53. ' 5)cr 3aT)U, the tooth ; bcr ?fting, the ring ; bcr %ni^f the foot ; tic 9cu|^, the nut ; bk "^anh, the hand ; bcr S3aum, the tree ; bcr Scl)iif), the shoe; Voarnt, warm ; tcirt, clean ; bcr Striuupf, the stocking ; irci§, white. Obs. The determinative T^ords, as : bicker, jcncr, mcin, bent, Unldjcr &c. take in the plural the same terminations as the article. 2}^cine S'^lyat fiub jeljr incig. Qdj Ijabe bte giigc fc(}r roarm. 3^A•c §anbe finb nldjt rctn. 'J^at bcv'©cfjul)mndjcr mcinc '8djiil)c (Jcbradjf? SBcr ()at metue ©triimpfe gcncm^ men? (B'mh ha^ S\)vc (Striimpfe? ©a§ fiitb iurf)t bic mtU MX (gdjineftcr. So i)aben ^k biefe 9citf]"e gcfauft? ijatcn urni, the worm ; bag Jllcib, the dress ; bcr 2Salb, the forest ; bag SclilOp, the castle ; bcr Si'tann, the man, the husband. Gbs. All tliese monosyllabieal nouns are exceptions from the general rule, and form their plural bv adding er, and softening the radical Towel. Substantives ending in tfjam follow the same rule, as : Srrtljum, Srrtljunier (mistake). :l)[e[e ^aujtv fmb Ijo^er, als jeue^ ^cm ^dnbcr finb fcfjoner, aU bie[e. !©eme iBlidjer finb nul^iicijer, al^ bte SouifeiiS. ^ie[e ^Otutter Ijat iljrc Hinber ijerioren. S^tr £ordg Ijat feine (gcljtbjfer Derfauft. ^ou iDcm Ijabeu (gie biefe ©lafer er^attcn? Ser I)at biefe llleiber gemacijt? S^ie[er 5Jlarat ift fcljon fc^r aft; er Ijat alle feine 3^^^^^ ^<^i^' Ioren» SBo finb S^^^ grcunbe? SlUe nicine grennbe finb anSgegangem ©iefe Golfer finb fetjr gtlidlid); fie I}al-cn cinen ^onig, meldjer fef;r gnt ift. '^ie ftonigc finb nidjt inimer gtiidiici), ^einrid; unb Siiljelm ^aben ade iljrc ^ii- d)er ijerlorcn, 5Ide enre ^riefe finb angefomnien. SBir Iiaben ode biefe 9?itffe in beni Saibe nnfcreS Onfel§ gefnn^ ben. S^cr S3ater ift niit aden fcinen ^inbern abgcrcift ®icfe !^orfer finb feljr fdjon. S^on lueldjen !l)orfern fpredjen (gie ? SBeldje ) the spoons, forks and knives. Where have you bought these needles? Your brothers and sisters are not come. Lewis and Ferdinand are cou- sins. Our mothers have seen the gardens of the king. My sons have bought the mirrors of my neighbor. (The) horses are bigger than (the) tigers. Are my stockings clean? Are your shoes ne^y? 59.' i§in§, (cin) one; iner, four; i\V)d, two; fiinf, five; hxdf three; fcfij^/ six ftcben, seyen; ncurijc()5l, ninclcen; ad)i, eight ; jliwn.^ig, twenty ; iicun, nine; Mc 5luf(]abc, the tash, exercise icljn, ten; ba5 3a()r, the year; elf, eleven ; bic 3Bod)c, the week ; iWcIf, twelve ; bcr S.'tOiUlt; the month (pi. c) brciicl)n, thirteen; bcr ^.ag,, the day; liieqcfjn, fourteen ; bie (Htunbc, the 'hour , funfje^n, fifteen ; bcr 5lnai)e, the boy ; fcdjSgerjrt; sixteen; [cit, since (Dat.); ficbenjef^n, seventeen; c§ Qiht, c§ i\i, there is; ad}tjel)n, eighteen ; cS gibt, e5 jtnb, there arc ; gcmadjt, made, done. ' Obs. Substantives ending in e take n in the plural. -gu itnfcrm ^aitfe finb utcr^cljit ^tnimer. Qn bicfem ^hri' mcr finb ^\vd Zi\d}z itnb 3ii3o(f ©tiil)(e. Uufer dladjhax ^ai fiinf k'inbcr: bret (Boljnc imb gtDet 3::o(^ter. Sir Ijabcn t)ter ^a'geit imb bret §unbe. Qn eurem @artcn finb fitnf3el)n ^Bctitme. S3a§ 3^^^)^ ^f^^t ^^^'^^ Tlonak; ber SJZonat ^at uicr Sodjen; bie SBodje I)at fieben S^age. 3d} •fj^^s t)on inctncu? ^ater fcdjS 2Ie|3fe( unb adji ^irncn txljaltm. Tlcin £)n!e( Ijtit meiner (SdjiDefter ein gebermeffer xmb sinanstg gcbern gc- gcbcn, §aft bit fdjon al(c beine Slufgaben gemadjt? ^ofiann f)at nod} nidjt feine Slufgabe gemadjt dJlt'm iBruber tft fd)on brei 3^^}^^ in Berlin, opaben @ie nod) nid)t gcgeffen? 3d) Ijabe [djon feit brei Dcr 3:ifdj{er madjt Zi]d}t itnb (2tii()lc. -53ct biefcm i!aiifmann finbet man ^itdjer, gebcrn, S^iiite imb ^leiftifte. ©cben (Sie mir (Suppe imb ©emiife. §ier ift Scin imb Suffer, imb ba ift ^affee imb WM,, ipaben @te and) ^i^^^^"^ ^'^^ ^}f^i''cn 9}2effcr mib @abe(n, 2;affen imb ©Idfcr gefaiift. S^er ©artner I)at ber Souife fir- fdjen imb :53(umen gcgcbciL §aben Sie fdjon ^affee gctrmd'cn'/ 3n jenem §aufe finbet man (Spiegel, ^xegenfdjirine, ^dnber, gingerljitte imb Dtabefn, QJtetne greimbin ^at t)cn iljrem £)nfe( ^irncn nnb Dcitffe erijalten. Sir I)aben ^'otren, 3:igcr, ^atjen imb §nnbe gefcljen. S^x biefer etabt gibt c§ Sdjnci* ber imb (Sdjnljuiadjer, mc(dje fcl)r reid) finb. 62. SBcHcn (Sic? will you (have) ; gefanigft, if you please. Will you have some wine or some beer, some milk or some water ? Give me, if you please, some soup, vege- tables, meat and bread. Where does one find (finds one) ink and pens ? Are you a father ? Have you children ? Has your father bought any trees or flowers ? My bro= ther has books and friends. Here is coifee and sugar My neighbor has birds, dogs and horses. W^e are speak- ing of towns and villages, of houses and gardens. Iron and silver are metals. Vienna and Berlin are towns. What have you made ? We have done exercises (^^Inf^ gabcn gemadjt), we have written letters. ^Ye have eaten apples and plums, and we have drunk some wine and beer S4 GB. 33cuig, liltlc, fc'Yv' ; ju, too ; trie ? liow ? l^icl, miieli ; bag Chft, bie orud)!, the fruit; "oick, many ; bag ®clb, the money ; gcnuci, enough ; ber ^fcffcr, the pepper ; inc{)r, more; ia^ S<^^/ the salt; liuniiger, less, fewer ; bcr (Senf, the mustard. I^cinrtd) ^at t)tcl @clb ; cr ^at met)r ©elb, alS id), ©cbci ?^ie mir cin ixienig g(eif(^. Qd) I)abe genug ^rob. !4^u [)au ju Diet (Sal3 unb ^'feffer. Sir I)aben iDeniger Db|%a(3 -3bv. \?oin]e Ijiit tneniger gebern, al$ §enriette. ^ar( I)at me()i' 5(uft3aben gemadjt, aU gubmig. |)aft bit fo t)ie( @e(b, al^3 mcin ^ruber? 'A^zv ^Irme Ijat iDcnig greimbe. (£•§ gibt luenig DTcemdjcn, \vtid)^ gufrieben [inb, ©cben ^ie bcr gen^ riette nid)t git mi ^cnf. DJceiit ^ritber :^at gu ciel SBeiit gctriinfcn. S^iefe Tlnttcv ^at t)iele ^inber. >Ciefer DJcaitit ijat Dtele tinmen. SBie i^iele ^unbe ^at 3^)^'^^^^^'? ^^ gibt biefc§ Qa^x inenig ^irfdjen, abcr tiiele "ipflaumen. Whin grcunb l)at btefe Sod)e tne^r ^riefe er^alten, aU id). §at b'ciit 3Sater fo t)tc(e -^itc^er, a(§ meiit Cnfel? ©ebcit (feie mir gefcilligft eiit ruenig ^Tinte. Swollen ^ie m^ meljr ? ^i^) Ijabe gciiitg. 64. There is mucli fruit this year. Our gardener has many trees and flowers. Will you haA^e a little meat or some vegetables? Have you mustard enough? I have salt and pepper enough. Our neighbor has much money ; he is very rich. Give a little -wine to this woman. This man has few friends, but he has many dogs and cats. There are many birds in this forest. How many phy- sicians are there in your town? Have you as many apples and pears as we ? We have not so many as you, but we have more plums and nuts than you. Charles has fewer friends than Henry. This tree has fewer leaves than that one. There are too many chairs in this rocm, 65. ^a§ ^tud, the piece ; \^a§ 2)u|cnb, the dozen ; bte «5lafd}e, the bottle ; bcr P\.oxb, the basket ; bte 3:afie, the cup ; bie £'ciniranb, the linen ; ba§ ^furtb, the pound ; ha§ 3^ajd;entuct), the pochet hand bie (S((e, the yard, ell ; kerchief ; has $aai.- the pair; bcr J^anbirfju"^, the glove ; ba§ >^^emb/ tlie sliirt ; bcr ^afe, the cheese , bie <§al5binbe, the cravat ; fccr 'Bd)inkn, the ham. Obs. The vrords ^fuiib, ^aax and S>ii|cnb are invariable when they are preceded by a number. — The English word of which follows tha names of weights and measures is not expressed in German. ■SJ^einc d)lntttv ^at ber f)cnriette brci *paar ^aiibfcfjul^c, fec[)§ "ipaar ©tritmpfe; gtpet ©u^cnb §embcn mib eincn kovh feirfcfjeii gcfc^idt. Qn bie[em goffer jinb ^cfjn (Sllen ^^etn- iDanb, Dier S^afc^entiidjer imb fec^S ^aBlnnbem dTctln ^v\u ber ^at ginei ^aar (gcfjulje unb eiit ^aar (Sttefel gcfaiift. SBir ^aben bem greitnbe unferu Dn!el§ Slrangtg 'ipfunb 3itcier imb gefjtt glafcfjeu SBein gefdjidt. ©eben ®te mir ein ^tM ^dfe, eine 5'^a[^e ^ter imb etn tnetttg @enf. 5d) ^)^^c cin @ta5 SJetn getrim!en xtnb cin (Stitc! ©djinfeu gegej'fen. 2Btr I)abcn bei itnfcrcr greunbm eine Slaffe ^affee getntnfen. ©ebeu fimb ^irfi^en imb ein $fmtb ^flanmen gefcmft. Sir Ijabcn ein S^u^^enb @tiil)Ie bci bcm 5^ifcf)(er imferS £)n!e(^ gcfauft. 3d) Ijcbe iwn bcm ©cirtner cinen ^orb iBhmtcn erljatten. GG. The shoemaker has made a pair of shoes for Louisa and two pair of boots for William. AVe have drunk two glasses of wine and three glasses of beer. Give me a bottle of water and a little meat and bread. Will you have a piece of ham or cheese ? Mj aunt has bought a dozen of cravats, two dozen of shirts and ten pair of gloves and stockings. How many shirts have you ? I have three dozen. This linen is very fine; how many yards have you bought ? I have bought twenty yards. That is not enough for ten shirts. My uncle has given to Henry a penknife, twenty pens, two cravats and a pair of gloves. Ferdinand has bought a pound of plums, six pounds of coffee and two yards of -ribbon. Will you have a cup of coffee or a glass of wine? Give me, if you \")lease, a glass of water. 67. Sing, gutcr, gutc, gute»; Flur. gntc. - Sd;lctf)t, bad ; l-iortrefllirf), excellent . fait, cold ; itcbcnsunirbig, amiable , bxibjd), pretty ; ^ bag -ijavier, the paper ; tcbt/ dead ; ba^5 ©cjc^ciyt, the affair, businso S6 Ohs. If the Adjective is not preceded by an article or any othei determinative word, it takes the terminations of bicfeV/ bufe, bteftS. §icr tft gutcr @cfjin!en, gutc (Suppe iinb fjutcS ^rob g)abcn ©ie gittc§ papier imb gitte ' i)mtc ? SBir ^aOcii [cfjiecfjten SBetn nnb gitteS ^ier getnmfcn. Unfer ©cirtncr I)at t)ortreff(t(J}e§ Dbft. llufere DJIagb l)at guten (Senf, aber d}(erf)teix '^feffer gefauft. (5buarb I)at gutc greunbe imb itiit^tidje iBiicfjcr. 9}tcm Dnfct I)at fdjone ©drlen imb grojle 43ciu[er. Guer 92a(f)bar ^at trcue ,^^unbe. ^o^^^nn, gcbcn (§ie mil* ctn (^Ia§ Gaffer ! SBolIen (2ie !alte§ ober iimrme^S SBafj'er ? 3)^etne ©cfjiDefter ^at em ^aar Ijiibfdje »5anbf(i)itl)e gefauft. (Suer ^ruber f|3iic^t immer Don gittem ^etrt imb gitter (^uppe, abcr nii^t t3on itiiyidjen ^iii^ern, tioit 5Iufgabcn imb @efd)dften. ^^art§ unb Sonbon finb jd}one @tdbte. ^cimnd) Ijat ein ^aar neite ©dm^e erf)alten. 68. Have you any good mustard ? We have good bread and good meat. Your gardener has very fine flowers. These children have fine dresses. We have faithful friends, amiable brothers and useful books. Give me some better cheese and better beer. At (bet) this mer- chant's one finds pretty gloves, fine penknives, and good pens. Iron and silver are very useful metals. You always have excellent Tvine. My brother is not gone out, he has too many affairs. Henry has bought good paper and good ink. We speak of good cofiee, of excellent fruit and new dresses. 69. 6'in gutcr, cine gutc, cin gutcs. @olben, of gold, golden ; gefunb, healthy, wholesome ; jtlbern, of silver ; fcin, no, none. Ohs. If the adjective is preceded by the indefinite article, by fed) Dr by a possessive pronoun, as : mein, bein, unfer, &c., it takes in the JN'ominative Sing, the terminations er, e, c^, and in all other cases en, except the Accusative fern? and neuter, which is the same as the Nominative. Unfer ©lirtncr tft eiu guter SJ^ann. (Sure ©cirtneriu \^i cine gute gran. Gmilte tft ein gnte§ ^inb. Sir f)aben eincn .;]nten S3ater nnb cine gnte 5D^ntter. §ctnrtd) I}at ein fdjoncy ^^sfcrb nnb einen fdji)nen §nnb. Sonife \)^i gro^e ^i\\)mf aber cine Heine rg)anb nnb cincn Keinen gn§. gerbinanb tft mit mcincm jitngcrn iBrnbcr au'3i]cgangen. ^p^^'^^'i^^^f ift init uietuei' dltcren (Scljiucftcr abgcreift. ©cbcn @ie Mc[c3 ^rob cinem annen iTinbe. SDicfe^ gebermeffer geI)ort^ etnem jungen 9}Zar[ne, ber bet unferm 9tasi)bar woljnt. Subii^ig ift hex (2oI)n etne^ reicfjen £aufmann§. |)aben (2ie guten SSctit ober gute§ ^ier? SStr Ijabcn feincn gittcn Sent unb !cut giiteS ^tci\ SBer ^at rnctne filberne U!}r nnb ntemcn golbe* licit &Hng genominett ? Sir Ijaben im[ertt beften greitnb t)er* lorcn. Giire fleincit ^inber fmb fcljr gefmib. S§ giebt Teinc giiten £irf(f)en bie[c5 S'a^r. 9)tcin £)n!el I}at feine fc^i)nftcti |)ferbe tierfaiift. ^ift bitmit bciiten tteueu ©tiefeln gitfriebcn? |)aft bit fdjctt uon un[ent gittcn ^^paitmctt gcgeffen? 70. Charles is a good boy. Henrietta is ii pretty girl That is a happy mother. That is an excellent wine. Where is my little Henry, my good Louisa ? We have a very rich uncle. William has an old father. Iron is a useful metaL The dog is a faithful animal. I have received a new umbrella and a gold watch. My neighbor has done much business this year. Give this bottle of wine to a poor man or to a poor woman. I have no friend in this town. Have you no good pens for this child? Our best friends are dead. This joiner makes no good chairs. 71. X\x gutc, hk quk, ta§ gute. ©cjlern, yesterday ; tcx ^djiikx, the pnpil, schoolboy f)cute, to-day ; bt'c ^d}ule, the school ; id) ikhc, I love, I like ; 'i^aS Sckn, the life. Obs. When the adjective is preceded by the definite article, oi any other determinative word, wliich baa the same termination, as biefcr, jencr, &c., it takes in the Nominative Sing, the final e, and in all other cases en, except the Accusative Sing. fern., and neuter. S^er gate ^ctnrid) ift fraitf. S^te fteine ^opI)te ift fefjr (ieben§initrbig.^ S)a§ arme ^inb Ijat feine dJlnikv berforcii ©a§ ift ber ijocfjfte ^aitm in iinferm ©arten. Sifette ift hit flei^igfte t)on unfern 3}lagben. liefer retdje (Sngldnber inoljnt bei meincnt DttfcL So Ijaben (^te btefe golbcnc )}}ahcl gefunbcn? Sem gcbjort btcfe§ groge §an^ nn'b jcner fdionc ©arten? gran^ ift mit bent !(einen Sari au^gegan^ gen. Sir Ijaben geftern bet ber gnten Sntilte fcirfdjen gc* geffen. Ser inoljnt in biefcnt fdjonen ^cf)(offe? Ste IjeisJ • 38 biefe I)u6[ii}C ^luinc? 2^0o Ijaku ^ic btcfcit fcfjiec^ten ^etii imb bie[e^ fc[)(eajte ^icr gefauft? -3d} ^^^-^c bie f(ei6tgen ©cfjiiler imb bie treiteu greunbe. S^cr SoiDe unb ber Si^tger finb hk ftcidften 2:i)tere. ®a§ finb bie glitdlidjftett ZaQZ meineS §eben§. ©eben ©ie biefcm armen [S^anne ein ircnig Sein. Seiljcn (^ie biefcm Heinen 3}labcl]cn -SlFcn^^egenfcfjirm. 72. E\evy one, Sebcrmaun. The diligent pupil is loved by every one. The idle child is loved by nobody. The good king is loved by his people. This poor woman has no bread for her children. This rich merchant has given much money to the poor. I like the pretty flowers and the pretty children. I do not like the fine dresses. This fruit is not wholesome. My brother has found this gold ring to-day. Lewis is gone out with his little brother. The father of this young man is a shoemaker. The daugh- ter of this old woman is ill. Have you drunk of this excellent wine ? Will you (have) some of these fine plums ? Which hat have you taken ? I have taken the white hat. Which watch have you sold ? I have sold the silver watch. S)cr crfie, tlie first ; unartig, nauglity ; ber jtDcite, the second ; bcjd^nbcn, modest ; ber britte, the third ; ber S!f)ei(, the part ; ber vierte, the fourth ; ber S3anb, the vohime ; ber le|te^ the last ; nur, only ; bte Jllafje, the class. S)er tDiestclfte ? what day of the month ? Obs. Of before the name of a month is not expressed in German. ■Dtcfcr junge 3jZami ift fel)r ffeigig: er ift ber erfte in ber Ilafl'e. kaxi tft ber ^tneite; ber befdjcibene §etnrid) ber brttte; ^o^^i^^t ift ber Dierte; ber !(eine SKilfjcIm ift ber fiinfte; "ip-aul ift ber fei$^3te ; Sranj tft ber adjte ; ©itftati ift ber neunte ; ber unartigc (Ebitarb tft ber elfte iinb ber faule Sitbmig tft ber leljtc. ^wti tft ber fititfte Zfjdl t^oit ^eljit. gitnf ift ber Dierte 3:(}ett t)ott stDanjtg. (Sin 3:ag ift ber fie* beitte 3:i)ei( einer Sodje. ^en inteDielften be§ 93?onat§ ^aben \mv Ijeitte? Sir t)aben ^eute ben brei3ef}uten ober ben t)ter^ ^ebnten. .^ft e§ ntdjt ber ^tpanjtgfte ? SJteiit il^ater tft ben britten Tlai abgereift Tlcln On'fcl ift ben icljnkn Tc3cntbcr angcl'ommcn. pahm (gie ben erften nub iwdim ^anb? 3^ fjabe mtr hen erften. 74. Louisa is the first in the class ; Maria is the second ; the good Josephine is the third ; Plenrietta is the fifth ; the modest Sophia is the ninth ; Matilda (D}latl}t(be) is the fifteenth ; the naughty Caroline is the last. Three is the sixth part of eighteen. A week is the fourth part of a month ; and a month is the twelfth part of a year. What day of the month is it (have we)? It is to-day the eleventh or the twelfth. We departed on the second of May and arrived on the sixteenth. Which volume have you taken? Have you taken the third and the fourth? I have only taken the third. 75 Singular. Plural. S^cv r.icmige, bie mcinigc, ba5 mcmtgc, mine ; btc mcinigcn ; bcr bcmige, thiue ; ber un[rigc, ours ; bcr fchugc, Lis ; ber ciirige, Sl)Ttge, yours ; bcv {fjrige, hers ; bcr ifjrigc, theirs ; (ctd}t, easy, light. Obs. Instead of: bet mcinige, bcr bctnige, &c. may be said, incincr mcinc, incmcS or mcing, with the terminations of btcfcr, bicfc, btefcS.— Tlie declension of bcr mcinige, bcrjcntge, &c. is the same as that of the adjective, preceded by the definite article. :Dcm 23ater ift grower, al§ bcr ntetntcje. 93cctne 3}2ntter ift fieiner, a(5 bie beinitje. Unfer ^ucfj ift nii^Ucfjer, a(§ ba3 3f}rii3e. Widw (Sol}n ift ntcfjt fo a(t, a(g ber betntge. (5ncr ^5ferb ift iiinger, a(^3 h([^ nnfrige. Unfere ^ndjcr finb niit^U^ cljcr, a(3 bie enrigen. Warn S3ater Ijat feine lU)r berloren ; ^cinrid) I)at and) bie fetntge t^erloren. Wamt (Sdjtnefter 1^ai bie iijrige t)er!anft. 93Zctn ^ater I)at betnen -^rief unb htw mcinigcn gelefen. 93teine Si^ante ^t iljren ©arten nub hzw unfrigen nerfanft. §nt betn ^ruber meinen ©tocf ober hzw fcinigen gcnommen? ^ai Sontfe ntetncn gingerl)ut ober bet ifjrtgen gefnnben? S^eine Slnfgaben finb (etdjter, a(^3 hk mci uigen. S^iefe ^ctnme finb fjoljer, a(y bie unfrigen. Q\\ unfcs> rcr 'gtabt finb mcljr 5(cr3te, o.It^ in bcr eurigen. 76. I^Iy thiml3ie is as f.ne as yours. Your umbrella is not so large as mine. Islj son is more diligent than thine 40 My friend has sold his house and mine. My sister hag eaten her apple and thine. Has Louisa taken my pen or hers ; my pencil or hers ? Henry has read my books and yours. Your sisters are younger than ours. We speak of our friend and of yours. Is my room smaller than thine ? I have promised a book to your son and to mine, to your daughter and to mine. I speak of my tasks and of thine. This castle belongs to my uncle and to yours. 77. Singular. Plural. Nom. cr, he ; fie, slie ; c3 it ; fie, they ; Ace. \i)\\, him ; fte, her ; c§, it ; fie, them ; ®c()a&t, had ; gcfannt, known ; ja, yes ; gclefcn, read ; ge&racl}t, brought ; nein, no. §aben @te meinen (Stod? ^a^ id) Ijabe ilju. §aben Sie tiietue UI)r? 9tcin, ic^ ^be fie nidjt. §aben in i()rem 3^^^^^^* gefunben. S)iefe S3oge( finb felir [rfjon. SSon incm I)aft bu fie er^altcn? S^etne (gdjiDefter ift'fe^r fletBtg; meine 93Zuttcr IxtU fie fef)r. §aben (Sie met* nen £){)eim gefannt ? ^6) \)aht iljn nidjt ge!annt. !4Dte§ tft ein nitl3(id)e§ ^\\6:)] Ijaben @te e§ fc^on gclefen? iBo tft mein gingerljnt? -3^^ M^^ ^f)^ Q\)xtx (g'c^mefter gegeben; fie I)at tl)n tierloren. ^at ^^ntanb meine ®abc( genommen ? ^arl Ijat fie genommen. Sem I)at ber ©artner al(e biefe tinmen gefdjtcft? (Sr I]at fie 3^)1'^^' 3}tutter gefdjtcft. ^at petnrid) beinen -53(eiftift ge!)abt? Dlein, er l)at iljn f)eute \M]i ge^abt. 78. Has the shoemaker brought my boot? Yes, he has brought it. Hast thou already done thy task? I have not yet done it. Have you seen my new room ? No, [ have not yet seen it. Where hast thou bought these pretty rings ? I have bought them in Paris. Who has had my penknife ? I have not had it, your brother has had it. I have received a letter from my aunt, have you read it? Have you already seen the king ? I have not yet seen him. You have a good pen ; lend it to 41 my sister. There is your brotlier ; do you see him ^ Do you not see him ? Where are your gloves? Lend them to your aunt. Where is 3^our umbrella? Give it to this child. My aunt is dead ; did you know her ? Which books have you there ? Have you read there '^. Where is thy dog ? jMy father lias sold it 79. Scf) Vxw gctncfcn, I liave been ; bu btft geWcfcn, thou hast been ; cr (ft gewcfen, he has been ; \X)[x finb getttcfcn, we have been ; \l)X fcib gewefen, you have been ; fie finb gcVocfcn, they have been. S^.iXX, Mr. ; jufammcn, together ; bcr •§crr, gentleman ; lii^igC/ long? ^ loi^g time ; ^fraulcin, Miss ; bcr IX'orgcn, the morning ; baS ^Tdulcin, the young lad}- ; 'i:a^ 93tcrtcl, the quarter ; ?Juibame, Madam,''Mrs."; ' ciu Ijalbcr, c, c§, half a. bic 2)amc, the lady ; JDaS crilc D?cal, the first time ; ^^o.^ Ic^tc ?ucal, the last time ; ctn 5,ltal, once ; jvoct 9}ta(, twice. Obs. The word «^crr takes in all cases of the Singular n, and in all cases of the Plural cu. It is also used with the article in the sense- of Mr. In speaking politely, the words ^err, %xaVL and TVraulctn ar« used as a title, as in French, for instance: 3f)r <§cn: S3atcr, yoin father ; 3()tc ^rau 23LUtter, your mother ; 3I)rc ^raulcin (Hcl}li\*ftcrn, your sisters. 3£>cr ift Tjicr c^clvcfcu? §crr Widli ift Ijicr gcrocfcu; cr Ijat biefcig ^udj gcbracljt. ^ift bit Bet bem @ci)itl)macf)er %C' incfen? 3(^ tun fjcitte bei bciuem (Scfjulimadjcr geiDefeu; cr I)at 3^i*^ @ttcfc( fcfjoit Qcmacljt. 2Bo feib tl)r blefen [Otorgcu gcUKfen? ^\i finb kt un[crm grcunbe £ar( geir-cfctt, incdiicr feljr !ran! ift. i^icfcr §crr ift bret ^a\)xz in Sicn cjcmcfcu, nnb feine ^riibcr finb fel)r lange in ^'onftanttno^cl gemcfcn. ©n Bift nicijt f(cij3tt3 gen^cfcit, bu Ijaft betne ^itfgaBcn noclj iitcfjt gemadjt. Q^) bin cjeftcrn bet iOlcibame 9iober gelrefen; fie ift cine fcljr ItebcnSUntrbige grau. . ^\i grctnlein 9L ofl in biefer (Stabt gcipcfen ? (S'ie ift fi^on brei D^2al Ijier gc^ luefcn. §)aben (£ie 'i^tix ^errn (ScfjoH oe!am:t ? ^dj fj^ibf i()n in -Berlin gefannt ; linr finb oft jnfammen anvgcgongcn, S3ie (ange finb (5ie in SJtabrib geirefcn'? -3d) ^^^ i^itr ein brdbcu ^oXyc "i:^^ geinefen, abcr id) bin brei S$iertc( -Safjr \\\ [dffabon geinefen. ^^^htix €ie bie ^Jerren ?io((ct fdjon ge^ geftevn bci cincin mcincv grennbe gefclien 42 80. Have tliey (lias one) brought my slioes ? Yes, they have brought them. Has the tailor been here ? 'No, he has not yet been here. Hast thou been at the joiner's? No, I have not yet been there. We have many flowers ; v^^e have been in the garden of (the) Mr. Nollet. Have you also been at Mr. Moll's ? My brother has never been more contented than to-day ; he has received from his uncle a beautiful gold watch, and half a dozen pocket- handkerchiefs. How long have you been in Paris ? We have been there six months. These gentlemen have done much business ; they have been very happy. Are Messrs. N. already departed for Cologne? They have departed this morning with their uncle ; I have seen them at Mrs. Sicard's. 81. Sd) Wax, I was ; bu Waxft, til oil Yv-ast ; cr 'coax, he was ; wix Voaxm, we were , ii)r \rtarct, you were ; ik Xoaxm, they were. (il}cmaiic(e ^^fcrbe itnb §unbe. S^u inarft fcl)r fietgig, al'3 bu nod) bctne QU tern IjQtteft. 5^iefe gir-ct f nnf(cute limren e!)CUTa(§ fel)r rcidj; fie fatten einen groBen §anbeL Qdj l)atte giuet 53riiber; ber etne mar in ©ien, bcr anbcre in Berlin, ^paft bn rneine gtnet ^rllber gcfannt? Sd) W>^^ benjentncn gefannt, Xd^U d}cv in iSerlin lx>ar; ber nnbere mar jiinger, a[§ id). So ift eiicr S3ctter, ber fo niele 23oi3c[ I)atte? (Sr ift feit einem Qal}vt in ^riiffeL DJtein Sebcrmcffcr mar loerloren ; Qi}v ^rnber Ijat cS gefnnben. ^attct il}r cure ^ricfe fdjon ge- [djriebcn, aU wiv au^gegangen [inb? Sir Ijaticn fie nod) nidjt gcfdjriebcn; mir Ijatten feine guten gebern unb !etn gnte^ papier. 84. 2^cr 33crflanb, the intellect ; bie ®xite, the kindness. Mr. Maury was formerly much happier, he had many friends, maich money, many horses and dogs. Henry is dead ; he was a good boy, he had so much intellect and kindness, he was loved by everybody. We were often in his garden ; his sisters were very amiable and they had many flowers and books. His parents were not rich, but they had a great trade. I was ill yester- 44 daj: I had eaten too much fruit. Hadst thou not yet done thy exercises when I came (I am come)? No, I had not yet done them. My brother had ah^eady done his^ when thou camest (art come.) 85. 5}tir, to me, me ; if)m, tc liim, liim ; t^tr, to thee, thee ; ii}r, to her, her. ju, to. iTaufcn, to buy ; fd)rcil3cn, to write ; lun-faufcn, to sell ; Icfcn, to read ; gcbcn, to give ; ~ fct)en, to see ; icil)en, to lend ; (bte) Suft, a mind ; tlyan, to do ; fcie 3dt, the time ; inad)cu, to make, to do ; baS 23crgnugen; the pleasure. 3d) I ami, I can ; tu fannft, tliou canst ; er fanrt, he can ; toiv fonncn, vn-c can ; ii}x loimct, you can ; fie fonncn, they can. Obs. The infinitive is placed at the end of the sentence. fannft bu intr btefe§ ^ud) leiljen ? S^] ^^nn bir bicfc^ ^udi ntdjt Ieil}cn; e§ gcl)brt meinent better ^etnridj. S^cr !ann bieicn ^rief Ie[en? ^d) ton il)n tefen; cr ift feljr (]ut gefdjrieben. 25ir fonnen bte[en Djtorgen nid)t fdjreiben. 23arum Bnnet iljrnidjt fdjreibcn? ^ir Ijabcn fcine "A^intc. f onnen @ie mcinem ^rnbcr S^)xz Illy: let^cn? Qd) !nnn i[)in meine UI)r nid^t (clljcn, id) l)0.ht fie bcm gerrn ©. Dcr^ toft. §abcn ^k metner (Bd]\vt]kv cine gcber gecjclicn? 3d) IjCiBe iljr fcine gcber gcgebcn. §aben Sie 2nft, bicfen §unb 3U faufcn? 3d) Ijcibe fcine 2nft, if)n ^u fanfcn; cr ift nid)t trcu. § at ii)r ^rubcr I) cnte nid)t§ 3U tl)nn? Qv lyat brci ^ricfe 3n fd)rciben. Sir Ijabcn nod) jmci ^nfgabcn 3n madjcn. -3d) ^)t^be gcftcrn ba§ feergniigcn gcl)abt, Qi}v gran* lein (gd)n3cftcr 3U fctjcn. §abcn (Sie ^eit, bicfen ^ricf 3n Icfcn? -3d) J)cibe je^-t nidjt ^cit, i^n 3U (cfcn. fonncn (Sic mir cinen Dtcgcnfdjirm gebcn? -S'd) ton QI)ncn fcincn gctcn, id) I)abe nur cinen. -3(}r gcrr ^^rnbcr Ijat bie ©ittc, mir hen feinigcn 3n (cil)cn. 8inb %ie geftcrn bci nteiner 3:ante geroe? fen? 9tein, id) irar acftcrn nidjt bci iljr; idj ^-atte 3n inclc ©cfc^afte. SG. Can you do that? Yes, I can (it); but my brothcr cannot. Will you lend me joiiv penknife ? I cannot lend thee my penknife ; my sister has taken it. Have you given a pen to my cousin? Yes, 1 have given hini 45 one. Hast tliou sold tliy dog to my sister? I have not sold her my dog. Canst thou not do thy exercise ? I cannot do it to-day. We can read this book. These gentleman cannot ^yrite their letters ; they have no paper. Hast thou a mind to buy a pair of boots ? Has your brother a mind to sell his ring? Have you had the kindness to give a glass of water to this poor man ? My friend has had the pleasure to see his parents. I have not had time to read all these letters. My father has had the kindness to buy me a gold watch. Hast thou seen it? I have not yet seen it. Have you been with Ferdinand to-day? I have been with him this morning. 87. X\n§, to ns, us ; cud), Sfjncn, to 3-011, jou ; {r)ncn, to tlicm, them @cf)ert, to go ; ()aBcn, to have ; fommcn, to come ; fctn, to be ; ir)cnn, if; trinfcn, to drink ; unwcl}!, indisposed ; cffcn, to eat; jc|t, now, at present. 3d) \xnf[, I will ; bu Will]!, thou Tvilt ; cr iinll, he will ; \vix VOcttcn, we \7ill ; ii}X Wiolkt, you will ; ftc ii^oKcn, they will. Sitlft bu mit mir gcl)en? -Sd} 'fiinu nidjt mtt btr ocljcit, id) Ijak fetuc ^cit S^] Wiii btr ciii fcfjoncS -^uc^ (ci^cn, menu bu fleigtg btft. <^ann bctn ^rubcr fjcute nic^t !ommcu? (Sr Ijat !eiue Suft ju !ommcu, cr ift uuinolji. Sir tDoKen jcljt unfere Slufgabeu madjen. SoIIeu ^k ciu @(a§ SSJein trinfeu? gd) I)abe fdjou ein ®(a§ iBier gctruufcn. -3d} inid etn (gtilcf ^ki\d) ober f a[e effeu. SBotfeu Sie ciu iDcntg (^enf unb ©a(3? ^'omieu ©ie vM bic[cu (Stocf letljcu? S^) ^'^uu -3l)ueu bte[en (Stoa ntdjt (edjen, utctu ^ruber Wiil itjxi Ijaben. IDta !auu nidjt ungliidlidjer fetn, al^3 bte[er juuge 2J2anu; er ()at fciue (5(teru unb fetue ^riiber unb (Sdjtijcftcru t>alo'cm, Ser tDitl btefeu ^pfcl Ijaben? Q-dj inill t^n Ijaben. 2Bau iDtllft bu jet-t ttjun ? Qd) witi ein :paar iBriefe fdjrciben. Qd) win end) einen ^orb ^tr|djen geben, iDcnn ifjr flctBtg fein icoKet. SSoden (Ste bie ©iite Ijaben, niir etne Dlabel gn gebeu? Qd) Ijahz je^t !eine, tdj !ann Ql)im\ feine gcbcn. §aben (Sie ^ett, tntt un§ 3U geljen? Qdj ^abe I'eine ^dt, init Sljuen 5U geljen. §aben ©te ben§erren9L fd)on einen -53efnd} gcmac^t? Qd) §abe iljuen biefen 2}|orgen einen -©efndj genta^t. 88. What hast thou to do ? I have nothing to do. Wilt thou read this book ? Yes, I n'ill read it. How is thy 46 brotlier? He is indisposed, lie cannot come. Where can one buy tliese fine penknives? One can buy them at tlie merchant's who lives at our neighbor's. Yfill you give me a little ink ? Can j^our sister lend me her pen- knife ? What do tliese gentlemen want (what will, &c.) '? These ladies will buy an nmbrella. One cannot be more mihappy than I (am) ; one cannot have more misfortune than I. Give us something to drink. What will you (have)? Will you have wine or beer? I have lent you my stick. Where are your brothers ? I have sold them my dog. This man is very rich ; all tliese houses belong to him. 89. 3}tiCi), me, Biyself ; bid), thee, thyself. im0, us, ourselves ; cuc^, you, yourselves ; firfj, one's self, him- her- itself, themselves. Scbcn, to prcaise ; gclo&t, praised ; lieben, to love, like; gcltebt, loved; hcind)Q\\, to visit; bciud)t, visited; jd)lav3cn, to beat; gcid)lagcn, beaten; fid) jd)[agcn, to fight; bcr £'ci)rer, the master; ir)ajd)cn, to wash ; gewai'd)en, washed. Sjer 2el}rer I)at hid) gclo&t, tmii bu fleigig gelt)e[en btft. t)ein ^ruber ift ein bi)[er £nabe; er ^at mtrf) geftern (\c^ fdjlagen. gaft bit bid) jdjon geii^afcljeu ? Sd) ^^be iiitaj nod) md)t gelDafdjen; aber geinrid) f)at fid) fc^oit fett einer ©timbe gert)a[djen. Sarnm iDtilft bu meineu §unb fdjiagen? Qv ^at utetit ^rob genommen. llri[ere dltan finb luifere befteit grcunbe; mir tooUm fie imnter lieben. 2avt, bu bift fel^r unarttg; man !ann bid) ntdjt Ueben» SBte t)tete ©Hifer SBetn !}aft bu getrunfen? Sd) |cibe nur eine Ijalbe glafdje getrunfen. So bift bn btefen SJcorgen gelDefen ? Sd) bin mit meinem ^attx bci §crrn 91. getDcfen. 3ft $err 9L nod) immer nniDoIjl? (Er ift feit gcftern ein iDentg beffer; aber er !ann nod) nid)t effen, nod) trinfen. SDer Slrjt mar I)ente ^mcimal 6ei il)m. -3d) ^iH tl)n ntorgen and) be)"nd)en, ober i^m etnen fleinen^rief fd)reiben. 5Iber tnarmn I)aben ^ie nn§ nod) nid)t befuc^t? S^^ W-^^ ^o^y ^^^^^ S^^^ O^^jt^bt, of)ncn, to live, to dwell ; bie ©tra^e, the street ; brinc]cn, to bring ; |ucf}ctt, to seek, look for. t(}cucr, dear ; Sa§ fudjcn (Sie? S^^) \^*'^)^ mdm gcber. Mdn ^ruber fudjt feinen ^(etjtift. Sir fucfjen itnfern §imb. 3Dte[e ^in^ bcr fudjcn i^re ^itcfjer. So faiifen @te ^Ijr papier? Sir faufeu mtfer papier bet bent ^ttc^^anbler. Qd) finbe meincn Btod nidjt Ser fjat ttteinett ©tod Genomtnen? Qd) glaube, bag Q\}X ^ruber i^n genommen f)at. Qd) (tebe biefen ^naben iiidjt, er tft immer unarttg. !©u Itebft beinen Se^rer* @ott licbt bie guten ^2enf(f)en. @ute ^inber Iteben t(}re (Eltern. 3 ft e§ U)a|r, bag S^r Dn!el feiu §au0 t)er!auft? Ste teener t)cr!auf?n @te bie (^lle t)ott biefem 'Zndjt? Qd) t^erfaufe bie Gde biefe§ Xnd)z§> ^u t)ier Zljakv. ©a§ ift fel)r tljeuer. gin^ beft bu ntdjt, §einrtdj, ha>^ ha§> fcljr ttjeuer ift? Q-a, id) ftubc e§ fef)r tl)euer. Sir Derfaufen aber Diel Dott biefem 2:ud;e. ^cbermantt ftnbet e§ fdjon. (^djtcfen (Bit mtr brct itnb ctiic haihc (Slle. Stffeu (Sic, Wo id) \voI)\k1 Sa^ @ie nvoiincn in ber $cter^ftra§e. Wlnvx DJtaa^ hm c^o Qljncn Ijcitte nod) bringen. 49 3:'abc[u, to Liamc ; ^iik§, all, every thing , arbetteu, to work ; SlKcS teas, all that. What are you doing? I am reading the book, which your brother has lent me. Ycu read too much. Why do you not write ? I have ah-eady written three letters. My cousins never write. You always blame your cou- sins; one must blame nobody. What art thou doing? I am doing my exercise. AVhat is thy sister doing? She is working. What do you drink? I drink wine and my brother drinks beer. We drink no wine. I eat cherries. My brothers eat plums. You are always eating, but you do not work. Can you tell me, where Mr. N. lives? He lives in (the) William-street. Livest thou with thy uncle? No, I do not live with him. Dost thou go to Paris ? No, I do not go to Paris. I do not like this young man; he always blames his friends. He will never lend me his penknife. I lend him all that I have. We lend everything to our friends. You always beat my brother; you are very naughty. These boys beat everybody. Do you sell paper? I sell paper, pens, and ink. What do you say? I say, that you have taken my knife. 95. 3d) toBte, I praised, I did praise, was praising ; hi tcbtcft, thou praisest, &c. ; er lobte, he praised ; \mx lobtcn, we praised ; tl)r Icbtet, you praised ; f[c lobteit, they praised. . ©er 2el)rer lobte unb (tebte un§. Wt guten 'Sc^iiler inaren im[ere greimbe ; fte befu(^tcn xm§ jebcn S^ag ; mtr erjaljlten un§ fdjbne @e[d)tc^teu unb ladjten nnb tansten, bi§ e§ Slbenb roai\ S)u fdjid'teft itn§ oft pbfcbje ^ncf)er, iDclcrie im§ ttet S^ergniigen mac!)ten. ^ir Ijattcn fe^r oft ^dt 3U (efen. Sena tinv unfere Slufgaben gemacfjt :^atten, eriaubte ber Sefjrer unS tnimcr gu fptelen ober ein nlt^lidje^ ^mi) gu lefen. 96. 2Baf)Ien, to choose ; ha§ <£^tel, tlie play, the game ; ioetnen, to cry, to Aveep ; \x»af)renb, while, during. Obs. The ISrominative is always placed after its verb, in a sentence, which serves to complete the preceding one ; toenn cr fommt, ge{)e id) mtt ii}m. When we were young, we lived in this house. Your sister bought some ribbons and chose the finest for you. Formerly I loved play, but at present I love books. This people always loved their king. Thy cou- sin was still looking for his hat, when we (are) de- parted. The merchant, whom thou soughtest yester- day, has been here. Thy brother sold his penknife this morning. While we were crying, you were laughing and dancing. My father allowed me always to read good books and to play with my friends. We often worked together, when you were liviug with your uncle. I danced better than you, but you did your exercise better than I. Thou wast often idle, and thou hadst not always a mind to read and to write. I told thee pretty stories, but thou lovedst play too much, thou didst play the whole day. The master blamed thee often, and the good scholars did not love thee 97. 3d) tnetbe Wbcn, I shall or I will praise ; hi tr>trft [06 en, thou wilt praise ; CT iritb Icben, he will praise ; toix tDerben loBen, we shall praise ; il}X trcrbet loBcn, you will praise ; fie irerben loBert, they will praise. Ohs. SBerbcn, taken in an absolute sense, signifies to hecome ; but ,vhen constructed with another verb, it answers to the English auxil- iary verb shall Di' wvl. 51 ^dj iDcrbe bie[en Slbcnb haQ ^^crQuitgen Ijabcit, lue'mcn Dn!el gu fe()en, S'd) itterbe bir btefeu Ijiibfc^en $Hmg geben, iremt bit fleiglg fein totrft ^etnridj wixh mtr f)eute etn 'f aax fc^one §anbfcfju!)e faitfen. ©eine ©djmefter inirb 3itfrteben fein, ii^enn fie iljre SlufgaBe gemadjt l)at, SGcnn \v\v in 91 fein irerben, merben Wiv ml 23ergniigen I)aben. Sann wcv* ben ©ie mid) befuc^en? S^ glanbe, inir iDerben @ie morgen befudjen. 9}^eine ^riiber iuerben and) I)ente ober morgen !om* men. (5§ mirb meinem 25ater fef)r Die! 3Sergniigcn mad)en, fie noc^ etnmat pi fel)en. SKann itterben @ie 3'I)^em grennbe l^'art fdjreiben? Qd) fdjreibe il)m in ad)t bi§ Dier3cl)n S^agen. SBoKen @ie bie ®itte I)aben, mir ba§ ^nd) gn fdjiSen, tr)eld)e^ ©ie mir t)erfprod}en ()aben? Q'd] iDerbe e§ ^Ijnen l)ente fd)t(fen, grdnlein. dJltin ^ebienter iuirb e§ S^j^en bringen, ^^d) ^atte e§ einem grennbe gcliel)en, ber e^3 bi§ Je^^t gel)abt {)at, 98 SJtubc, tired, fatigued ; ha§ 2Better, the weatlier; :^[etl)er, hither. Shall you go with us ? I do not believe, that my fa- ther will allow me (allows it to me). Has the shoe- maker brought my boots? No, he will bring them to you this evening. What shall we do now? We will drink a glass of wine. Will you have the kindness to lend me your horse? I shall lend it you with much pleasure. We shall play to-day in the garden of our uncle; he will allow (it) us. I shall tell you a beautiful story, if you are good and diligent. Wilt thou work to-day ? I believe that I shall not work to-daj^ Come hither, my children ; you will be very tired. If your cousins are departed, they will have fine weather. Thy exercise is badly done; the master will blame thee. All (the) scholars will go to N. to-day. Charles, thou miust wash thyself, if thou wilt go with Henry. Yes, Mamma, I shall wash myself at present. 99. 3c5) ^utbe tcBett, I should or would praise , bu wiirbejl to&en, thou wouldst praise ; er iriirbe loben, he would praise; ivir triirbcn loben, we should praise ; if)r wurbet loben, you would praise ; fie imirben Icben, they would praise. 9Beuii id) Ijattc, if I had ; irenn id) ixsare, if I were; gern, williucjlj; 3b, if. 52 Obs. After the conjunctions iuciin and tfo, if, the Subjunctive Mooil IS used in German, when, tlie verb is in the Imperfe3t or in the Pluper- fect tense. ^dj iDitrbe i](u(f(tcf)cr [ein, iDcnu id) ^iidjcr itub greimbe Ijilttc. -3d} unirbe mz\)X ^ergniigcn Ijaben, xozim meine S3et* tent Ijicr indrcn. SDu roiirbei't ntdjt fo reid) fetn, tnenn bit iiidjt fo Dic(e ®cfd)dfte gcmadjt Ijdtteft Scnn ^Jeinrtd) ©e(b I)dtte, iDitrbe er btefe DJcefj'er faufcn. ^^) iDiirbe betnen ^x\u hzx bcfudjcn, iDcmt idj ^^^t I)dtte. S^u ii^itrbeft btefen §iinb nidjt fo fel)r Ueben, lucmt er nidjt fo treu indre. iBtr iDiirbeii bid) nid)t tabein, tx^enn bit fleiBtger gelijefen it)dreft. S^ein Ditfel fagte mir, bu tpiirbcft movgen tttdjt fommen, 25>e(d)eit t)oi: biefeit ©tocfeit luiirbeft bit ira^ten? S[Bem initrbet if}r cure ^lumen geben? SBa§ ii^ltrbeft bu fageu, ineuu id) mci* \m\ ^uub t)erfaufte? Q6) initrbe btr eriauben gu fpie(eu, incuu bu bciue ^ufgabcu gemad)t Ic^'^i^t S^iefe ^iuber iDiir^ bcu fe^r ineiucu, tnenn i()re 9}httter abgereift iDdre. S^eiu Skater iniirbe itu§ eine fd)one @ef(^id)te er3af)Ien, inenn lyir artiger gemefen iDciren* '^Btxm bu 3^^^ 3^ ^^f^rt f)dtteft, unirbe id) bir eiu niil^Iidieg ^ud) (eil)eu. Q6) iDltrbe geru mit bir gc^eu, aber lueiu 2el)rer iDill e§ uidit erlaubeu; x^ muj f)eute uod) brei ^riefe fd)reibeu. 100. Louisa would be very (mucli) pleased, if she had all these flowers. Henry would not have so many friends, if he were not so kind (gut) and good (artig). We should not yet have (be) come, if we had not received a letter from our father. "VYe should not have sold our house, if my father had done more business (pi.) The master would blame thee, if thou hadst not done thy exercise. I should not believe it, if thou hadst not seen it. If we had an apple, we would share it. We should go with you, if we were not so tired. If I had some money, I sUould buy a pound of cherries. If you loved me, I should love you also. If you told me, where Mr. N. lives, I would give you a glass of wine. Would you believe that I have done this ? Would you do me this pleasure, if I allowed you to play this evening? I would do it willinglv, if I had time. 101. ?( u § a e I) en, to go out 3cl} <^d)t aii5, I go out ; bu gcf))! axi§, thou gocst out er gc[)t axis, he goes out ; Xoix gc^en au§, we go out ; i{)r gcf)et au§, you go out ; fte Qci}cn an§, they go out. ?[ufmad)en, to open ; abl'd^rciBcn, to copy ; jumad)cn, to shut ; mittl}cilcn, to communicate ; junu-ffd^tifen, to send back ; art,^icl)cn, to put on ; an(]ene()m, pleasant ; jdparj, black ; hk ^lad)xid)t, the news ; friUjer, earlier, sooner. Oijs. The compound verbs are tormed by the addition of a particle which modifies the sense of the simple verb, and which is detached from it in the Present and Imperfect tenses of the Indicative Mood. unless the sentence begins with a conjimction or a relative pronoun. Qd) ge^e :^eitte nidjt au^ ; ba§ Setter tft 311 fc^Iedjt. Tldn iBniber voiti audj md]t au5gel)en. Senn ba^3 Setter fdjoner tuare, initrben wiv gcrn au§gel)en» §etnrid), bu madjft nie bie 3;:()ure 3it> l^annft hn btefe ^ommobe aufmadjen? Qd) iimclje mein dimmer 31:, vomn id] auSgefjc. Qd) \d)idc ^'Ijnen bie[eu 5lbenb ba§ ^iidj ^nxM, irelcf)e§ @ie mir ge(ie!)eu l^alien. 93tem S3ctter fdjidte mir geftern ben ©tocf 3urucf, ben id) i^m gelieljen I)atte» (Sujretbft bn alle biefe ^rtefe ab? 2)^u6t bn alle§ ba§ abfdjreiben? Qd) fdjreibe nur fo Diet ah, enbc'i enre Qdt gut an. SJtan m\\^ feine Qc'it tmmer gut anipenben, 104. I will not wait (any) longer. I lose my time. Shall you play to-day? No we shall not play, we always lose. You would not lose, if you played better. We should play better, if you played oftener If I receive my money 65 I shall play once more (noct) etmnal). Does your fatliei not forbid you to play? No, he does not forbid (it) us. This child is very naughty ; he tears his dresses. My neighbor brings up his children very badly. I do not like this young man; he always offends me. Henry corrects his exercise; he employs his time well. He who employs well his money, is wise (ineife). If you give me back my pencil, I shall give you back your pen. One must always give back, what is lent us (what one lends us). 105. 2BoI)nen, to dwell; getooI)nt, dwelfc, been dwelling; Bclctbigcn, to offend; Beteibigt, offended; aniucnben, to employ ; angeiDcubct, employed. Obs. The past Participle of simple verbs is formed by the addition of the initial syllable gc, and the final syllable et or t. In compound verbs ge is placed after the particle ; the derived verbs take only the final et or t. §aben ©ic 3'f)rc 5iufgabe fd)on DcrBeffert? ^c^ Ijabe fic noci) ntcfit lierBe[fcrt ; id) merbe fie fogtetd) t)crBef[enL SlV- ^ruber l)at mid) gcftcnt beleibtgt; id) iviit md)t^ ntcljr mit il)m 3U tijun Ijaben ; tion Ijeute (an) tft er itiein greunb ntdjt tneljr. Sir woUcn cinen ©pajiergang jufammeu maiden. Qd) !amt in btefem S[ngenb(i(f e ntdjt au^ge^eit; id) ^abe biefen 5J^crgen fdjou einen ©pa3tcrgang gemadjt. SSarum l^abett 15k mir mcin gebcrme[fer nod) ntc^t ^uritdgcgeben ? 2Ber ^at bte 2:i}itre anfgcmad)t? Ser I)at Qfjmn bic[e 9^ad)rtd)t mit- getl}ci(t? Qljv ^atcr r)at un§ geftcrn cine artige @efd}td)te cr3dl)(t. Tlcim 9}2nttcr ^at mir erianbt, bie[en Ibenb nac^ ^1, in ge^en. ©inb (Ste geftern ^ti meinem S5etter getrefen? Qa, \vk I)aben hzn ganjen S^ag bei i()m gefptett, ge(ad)t unb gctanjt. 5lbcr l)abt tl]r ani^ gearb-eitet? -3d) glanbe e§ nidjt; ber Seljrcr l]at bid) fd)on mef)rere ^lak getabelt, betne (Sd)inc* fter I)at e§ mir oft gefagt. Ser ^at end) biefen ^orb i!trf(^en gcfd)id"t ? §aft bu beinen !ran!en grennb nod) nidjt befud)t? Wldn OnM 1:)at ein neneS ^ferb geranft ; er ^at ba§ alte bcm ^ntfd)er nnfer$ 9tad)bar5 fitr aifanjig S^f)a(er t)cr!auft. 1C6. (Sinjtg^ single, only; nidjt mefjr, no more; ^ad)c, SDing, thing. Thou hast employed thy time very badly, my dear Henrv. I see that thou hast not done a single exercise 56 r have always praised thee, but I shall praise thee no more. Have you played together, my children ? Yes, mamma, -we have been playing and working. That is very well (out); I shall give you some cherries and plums. I wall divide them. We have divided them already. Why have you shut all (the) windows? The weather is so fine ; I shall open them. Who has copied these letters ? I believe that Henry has copied them, Have you been waiting long? We have waited (for) half an hour. Mr. N. has sent back the umbrella, which you had lent him. I have received a letter from my aunt which I have not yet opened. Your cousin is arrived ; he has told us (a) hundred things. One must not believe all that he tells. I have not believed all. 107. X!m Jtt, iu order to, to ; urn jii loBen, in order to praise, to praise ; urn anjutuenben, in order to employ. ^ SBunfc^en, to wish ; abreijcn, to depart, set out ; gefdilig, obliging , fonbem, but (after a negative pbrase). Ohs. The preposition ju, whicli generally precedes tbe Infinitive, is placed in the compound verbs between the particle and the verb. Qd) fomme, itm btr 3U facjen, bag xdj morgett abreife. Qd) I)aBe tneincn ^ebicnten gefdjidt, urn mix ein ^funb ^udcv gu raitfen. Sir leben nicfjt, urn in effen, fonbern mir effen, itm 3u ieben. Um glltdUd) ^u fetn, ntuB vxan ^ufrieben fein. Um {yreunbe gu fjabert, mu| man gefdlltg fetn. Sdj ^^^ ^^W- 3ett, au§3ugef)en. §akn (Sie Me (3ntt^ bte[e ^wd ^rtefe ab3u[(^reiben. SBoIIen (Bk fo gut fein, bte Zfjixxt auf3U- mad)ml 2Btr l)abm Suft, eiuen fletnen (^pagiergang in mad)tn. ^}m '^ladjHv Ijat itod ^ferbe ^u tjerfaufen. SBer fjat btr eriaubt, fo frit!) ireg^ugeljcn? Q\t e§ nod) nid]t 3ett, auf3uftel)en ? Qdj ^abe ba5 S3ergnitgeti gel)abt, bett §erni 2}ccU in fe:^en. Situfj^ett ©te ntit metnem ^ater 3U fprec!)cu? Qd) iDunfdjc mtt ^^rer grau SJZutter in fpredjen. §aben (gie @elb, um btefen ^tug gu faufen ? §aft bu 3^Jt, utir meiue ^lufgabe in t)erbefferu? §at betu S3ater btr biefe^ \3tth gcgeben, um c§ fo fd}(edjt au3uiiieubeu? 108. Sa0 Unglucf, the misfortune ; ber ©cgcnftanb, the subject. It is no subject for laughter (in order to laugh). It is very difiicult. I have had the pleasure to dance vrith Miss 67 N. Mr. Nollet has had the kindness to lend me his iiorse. Do you wish to go out with me ? I have no time to go to N. We have much to do to-day. My brother has six letters to copy. I have good nevfs to communicate to you. Have the kindness to send me back my book It is time to set out. Which dress do you wish to put on ? AlloYf me to open the window, it is so warm. I •:im come to see, if you are well (iPoljl). I am very (much) indisposed; I have too much to do. You have the bad habit, to get up too late. A young man must get up earlier. My friend has had the misfortune to lose his parents. I come to bring you your boots. That is very ^yell ({lui). I had no mind to v\^ait (any) longer. 109. 3ct) 'ii^crbe gcltclit, T am loved ; id) iinirbc gclicBt, I was loved , bii wirft gelicbt, bu wurbcft o,dkht, cr wirb gclicbt, cr tinirbc gcliebt, Wix wcvtcn gch'cBt, linr iinirbcn gclicBt, il)r wcrbet gcliebt, ii}x tmirbct gcliebt, fie wcrbcn gcliebt, fie tuurbcn gcliebt. ScIot)ncn, to reward ; ftrafen, to punish ; acl)ten, to esteem ; i.uTad}ten, to desi^ise ; gefcf}ic!t, clever ; imiDi)7enb, ignorant. Obs. The verb iretben constructed with the past participle formg the passive voice. Thus the verb to be is translated by iucrbcrt, when the subject is sensible of a certain action; and by fctil, when he finds himself in a certaiu condition. I am paid in the sense of: they pay nie, is expressed by: id) ipcvbe be^at;lt; but in the sense of: they have paid me, it is expressed by: id) bill bcja^lt. 3(i) inerbe t^oit mctncm ^ater geloM, incmt idj ffetgicj unb artit] bin. !^u iDirft t)on betnem i^cljrer gctabctt, ineil bu iinmer faut btft. §einrid) inirb oeftraft, Wtii er unarttt] ift. SJe(d}er d^lami intrb cjctobt itnb rjeldjer mirb getabelt ? '2:cr nefdjicfte Wilann unrb getobt unb ber nmpiffenbe getabe(t. 2^1>e(d)e Unaben inerben be(oI)nt unb Xdtldjt iDcrben geftraft ? ^^iejcnigen, wddjc fletStg finb, iDcrben beloljnt, unb bte, voddjt fan! finb, geftraft. 33ir iDcrben uon unfern (SItern geliebt; ;i}r inerbct t)on ben eurigen gctabelt. Mmxz ^rliber iDerben uon ^'sbermann geadjtet. Sir merbcn t)on unfern geinbcn Deradjtet. 2Birb btefeS ^inb nie gcftraft ? S)on teem tnerbet il}r gelobt? ®eine Sdjipcfter wixh mn i^rer 3}?ntter getnbelt, iDcil fie nicfjt arbeitet. 3d) iintrbe immer mn metnem Sefjrer gcUebt imb gelobt, tveil id; ftet^tg unb arttg Yoav, §etnric5 58 iDiirbc iimncu ton [ctncui 53atcr G^ftvaft, inciiu cr nidjt nr- bcitctc. 110. 3cJ) Bin gclicBt ircrbcn, I bare "been loved ; bu bift gclicbt ivcrbcn, cr ift c\dkbt.\voxhax, \x>ix finb gcltcbt toorben, i^r fcib gclicbt inorben, fie finb geliebt ii^orben. 5cbtcn, to kill ; cr[unben, invented ; cntbccft, discovered ; bie 3)tui)e, the trouble, pains ; ha§ ^^^uber, gunpowder ; metjrere, several. -3d} inn t)on inctnem ^citer geftraft inorben, iDcil id) biefe :53rtcie nidjt abgcfdjrieben I)abe. !4}u bift t)on bcinem Onfel bcloljnt inorbcn, meit bu feine lU)r gcfunben {)aft §einric^ ift fiir feine 9}^ii[)e md)t betoljnt iDorben. S^iefe ))lad)xid)t ift im§ bitrd) §errn SJlod mitget^eilt tnorben. 53on tnem ift biefe Sliifgabe tierbeffert iDorben'? SBir finb t)on bicfem DJIcn^ fdjen me()rere 9}?a(e beleibigt tt)orben, !l:iefe |)erren finb geftern in ber ©efellfdjaft fel)r gctabett tDorben. Siefe§ ^inb ift Don feiner DJtntter geit)afd}en iDorben. (5§ ift mir gefagt morben, bag (Bit cinen ^ebienten fnc^ten* ^on tDent finb biefe ^inber gefdjicft .trorben? S^iefe §dufer finb geftern al(e t)er!anft iDorben. Sir finb oft t>on nnferm Ce^rer ge^ lobt iDorben, ineit wiv imraer nnfere ^Infgaben mac^ten. @nftat) 5Ibolp!) ift bei Sit^^en getobtet morben. ^a§ ^]3u(oer ift t)on .^ert^olb ©djmarj crfnnben iporben. 5lmcrifa ift uon do(nmbn§ entbedt JDorben. 111. (Bid) fvcnen, to rejoice. Sd) freuc mid), I rejoice ; Sd) i^a^Q mid) gefrcut, I Lave rejoiced ; bu freuft bid), bu f)aft hid) gcfreut, cr freut fid), cr I)at fid) gcfreut, ttjir freuen ung, \m ijaben ung gefrcnt, i{)r frcuet cud), iijx ijabt cud) gefreut, fie freuen fid). fie I)aben fid) gcfreut. eici) irren, to be mistaken ; fid) Befinbcn, to be, to do ; fid) irunbern, to be astonished ; fid) anfleibcn, to dress (one's-self ) ; fid) untcrl)alteu, to be amused ; banfcn, to tliank ; jweifcln, to doubt ; iincberfcl)cn, to see again ; feltcn, seldom ; auf, on, upon. ®nten ^ag, (ieber §einrid). S^^^) fi'i^^^c ^n'^^}^ ^^ i^^c* ber3nfe(}en. SBie ge(}t eo? Sie befinbeft bn bid)? S^ hank bir, id) befinbe mid) fcl)r moijt, fcit id) anf bem Sanbe roofine. Sa§ mad)t betn -^rnber? Q]t criuol)!? Qa, tx 59 bcfinbct fidj fel)r tDoI}(. ©a§ tl)u[t bu, ^ublxng? ^ci) fleibe mid} an. ^teibet 3^'-' cud} nod) ntdjt an ? ^ir irerben nn§ fpciter anfktben. §abcn (Bk fid) fdjon geinafdjen, ^enriette? 3d) f)abe mid) nod) nid)t genia[d)en, aber meine ann fommen (Sie juritd? ^ommcn (Sic Dor ober iiad) mi§ ^m'ud? SSir inerben iiac^ Q^mn gmiicf^ fommcn. 2Bo ift mcine ®d}iDcfter? ®ie ift in bcr llirc^e, in bcm ©arten, onf bcm 3}car!te. SBof)in ficl}t bcine S^cutter? (Sie gel}t in bie ^iic^e, in ben ll^eflcr, auf ben d^laxit So^in ]^aft bn mein ^nd) gelcgt? Sd] ^^^^ ^^ "^^^f ben S^ifc^, nnter ben (Stnt)( gelegt. SSo ift bie Keine Sonife? (Sie fi^t auf bem @tnl}Ie, untcr bem 3:^ifd}e, an ber Xf)nxt, (gd}reiben Sie an S1:)xm 55etter ober an Si]^x ^afe? 5{n inen benfen (Sic? 3^ benfe an bie arme gran, tDcldjc id} geftern bei Sfy'^^^ gcfel}cn I}abe. 118. ^et (Sd}ranf, the closet ; unbanfbvir, ungrateful. This is for me, that is for you. He who is not for me, is against me. I cannot do this without him, -without her, without you. I shall arrive before 3^ou; you will arrive after me. You are ungrateful towards us. I al- ways think of 3^ou, hut you never think of me. There is thy little sister ; hast thou nothing for her ? You do not love my brother, you are always against him. Where is your son ? This fruit and these flowers are for him. Where have you been? We have been at (in the) church and at (in the) schooL Where are you going? We are going into the garden, to (on the) market, into the kitchen. Where do these children come from? They come from the public walk (^pajiergang), from church, from the garden. Where have you put my stockings and shoes ? I have put them on your chair, on the table, in the closet. Have you seen my brother? I have seen him at the public walk, in the garden, at the door. I write to my uncle and aunt. "\7e often speak of him and of her. 63 119. 3m instead of in bcm; nm instead of an bem; ing in bag ; an§ an bag ; jum ju bem ; ijcm i^on bem , jur ju ber ; unterm unter bem* 5)ag i^euer, the fire ; \id) fieHcn, to place one's-self, to stand. Obs. The quickness of the pronunciation has introduced the custom of contracting the definite article with certain prepositions. 5Die DJMgb ift tm teller ober tm ®arten. SKtr ge^en biefeii llbcnb inS Z^catcv ober m§ (Concert ©djttfen @te ben ^c^ bientcn ^itm (gdjuljmac^er ober gum (Sdjneiber ? @el}en tr»ir Ijeute gitr STante ober bleiben linr gu §aufe? SSaren @te geftent bei bem 3}^inifter? £ommen ©ie gu mtr ober gu metnem iBruber? SSarmn fit^en @te immer betm gener? 3ft 3^uen fo Mil SKaS ^aben @te am Sluge, amgu^e? Sarmn tragen ^ie eine geber am§ute? ©teilett (Sie fid) an bte 3^I)iire ober an§ genftcr. §aben (Bk btefe iBtmne Dom ©cirtner erijaltcn? (Bk arbeiten oom SJZorgen bi§ gum Slbenb. SSa^ madjen ©te unterm S^ifdje? -3d} fi^Sje meine ^tetfeber. ^arl Ijat fie {n§ 'edjreibgeug getcgt. 120. SBolicn, of what ; bafcn, of that, of it ; ircmit, with what^. bamit, with that, with it Wo^u, for what ; bajn, for that, for it ; \rcran, at what; baran, at that, at it; ircrin. in what ; bavin, in that, in it ; nicburd), hj what ; baburd), by that, by it. ^crab, f^inab, down ; Ijcrauf, ^inauf, up ; therein, tjinein, in. 93rancT)en, to use; gefvtod)cn, spoken ; gcbadjt, tlionght; gtng,went; ftcl, fell ; t)a§ Matikx, the piano. Obs. 1. All these particles are formed of prepositions, combined with the adverbs \VG, ha, f)cr and f)in. If, in the formation of these words, two vowels meet, an r is inserted, to avoid the hiatus. 2. ^tv denotes a movement towards the person speaking ; ^in a movement from the speaker. 2Bot)on fpredjen (Sie? -3ft ^tc§ ba§ iBudj, n30t)on 8ie fpredjen? SSomit I)aben ^ie ba§ gcmadjt? .3ft ^^^ ^k geber, momit Bk biefen ^ricf gefdjrieben tjaben? SBogn braudjen @ie ba§? 2i}oran benfen (Ste benn? .3ft ^ft§ ba^ §au§, iDorin -3I)r Onfet lr)of)nt, bte @tabt, inoburd) Bk ge* fonmten finb? ipat man Don metnem Ungliicf gefprodjen? 3a, man {)at bauon gefprodjen. §abcn Bk an meine Badjc 64 f|cbad}t ? Diciii, icf) (jalu nicljt baran gebac[)t. 'etnb Sie mil 3[)rem iicitcn .^itauier ^ufrieben? 9ccin, icfj bin nicfjt 3111'nebcn bamit. 3ft nod) S}ein in bcr glafdje? Dccin, c3 ift fetner me^r bariiL ^^Ic mi Glicn muffen @ie 311 etnem nciten $}^ocfe l^abcn? Qd) mit^ bret imb cine ^albe (Sde ba3U Ijaben. i^ommen @ie I)eraiif. ©eljcn (Sie ^umb, f)tinmter. SBarmn fommen (^te nidjt f)crein? SBarmn gcf}cn Sie ntdjt I}tncin? !l)er l^uabe gincj gu nal)' an§ 3Ba[fer imb fic( I)tncin. Serben (Bk bte[en ^Ibenb tn§ 2;f)eatcr gei)en? Sir ii^erben nicfjt Ijtii; gcfjcn, abcr ^cinrici) itnb ^var( oeljcu l)in. 121, 23ttten, to beg, to ask; ber ^rieg, the ^ar; ba§ ^c^aufvtcf, tlie play. Do you knovr of what I speak, of what I thmk? That is not the same street, through which we came (are come) this morning, the same house where we were yesterday. Do you speak of (the) war ? Yes, we speak of it. Do you think of the concert ? We do not think of it. Are you pleased with this ring? I am very (m.uch) pleased wdth it. Why do you not coQie up? Tell your brother that I am coming down directly. Come in, my friends. I beg you to come in. Do you go to the play this evening ? We shall not go there. Do you know, where this gentleman lives, where he goes to, and where he is? We do not know it. ^ 122. ^a 3:'ijcO, tlio table ; ba§ ^■i[d}d)cn, the little table. ©ie 2'auBe, the pigeon ; vfl^i-injen, to plant; cben, jo cbcn, just now-, just. Obs. Diminutives are formed by adding the syllable d)cn, and softening the radical vowel. If the primitive word ends in e or en, this termination is omitted. ^malie Ijat t()r ^iitcfjen berloren. 2Bir Ijaben bret Ijiibfdjc ^^ditmdjen geppatiigt. Sent geb;ort biefeS arttge ©artc^cn ? Sie Dte{ f)aft bn fitr btefcS 2;;dubd)en begaljlt? Soljtn .i]el}en bicfe §errd)en? ^omm, 2oitt§d)en, inir iDodcn gn ber 3:antc ge()en, fie I)at etn neneS Uti^djen nnb cin neueS gitnbdjen. ^d) f)abe ebcn ein -53ricfd)en uon nteiner (gdjincftcr erl^altcn, iportn fie mid) intkt, il)r ein 9}|efferdjen unb ein ^offeldjcn gn hnfen. Sd) ^^^^ii ^'^d)t artig fein, 9}|itttcrdjcn, roenn bn mir ein neneS ^(eibdjen !anfft. ■Trage bicfc^S Xijcljdjcn in ben Garten, §enriette, unr liioilcn ein etiinbdjcn barin arbcitcn. 65 Selcf)c<5 :r:orfc[jcn fclje i^ ba imten tm ^albe? SSeldjc^ ^inb l]at bic[e @cfjuf)d)en uedorcn? grtebrid) Ijat cut arttge^ 23ooe(cf]cn mm ©drtncr erljalten. S3ent geljoreit alle bic[c SUimcfjcn? So tft bein ©cIjUKftercIjen, 3'of)Q^^^'^'? 123. iJlotI)i9 f)a'6cn, to want; jicf) fcf}amcn, to be ashan:ecl of; Ipfkt^en; to nse, to be in the habit of; fd)lafrtg, sleepy ; Siirft ^a&cn, to be thirsty; bcr ©^.Htjtcrgang, the walk, the public Avalk ; jcl;cinen, to shine ; fru^^ aarly ; jpdt, late ; id) mbd)t^, I should like. ^euirtd], I)aft bu Suft, ehten (Spa3terc5aitg mit mir ^u ma^ djcn'? 3d) fj^^e i'ctne iOuft, jc^^t au§3ugel)en. S^) ^i^ fcfjldf=* rig. (Sdjdmft bu btdj nidjt, fo fan! gu fein? ^omm, iDtr inollen in ben ©artcn nieinc§ Dn!el5 geljen. Sie t)ie( lUjr ifteS? (S§ ift erft fed}§ llijv, bie ®onne fc^eint nodj. ®u I)Qft ^icdjt, e§ ift nodj frni), id; luill mit bir gcf)cn. 3d) ^-'^P^ge jeben SIbenb einen (^pajiergang 3U ntadjen, el)e id) gn ^ette gcf)e. ©a§ ift eine gitte @en30^nl)cit. (S§ ift mir aber fe()r tpann; inir gc^cn gn gefdjtninbe. 3dj ^)ci^<^ G^'o^^J^ S^urfr, id) modjte einma( trinfcn. SSenn man Wavm ift, muj3 man nidjt trinfcn. Qii) Ijabe notljig, ein incnig an§3nrul)cn; id] bin fo miibc, ba^ id) widjt mcljr fort !ann. !^u mnjt einen fau genb(i(f ©ebulb Ijabcn. ilomm, i^ fitrdjte gn fpdt nad) cganfc jn !ommen. 124. To have patience, ©cbiilb I)a'6cn; to fear, furcf)tcn; to be hard- hearted, ^artl)erjig fein ; to have the head-ache, jvcvfiucf) Ijatcn ; to take pains, fid) bemiifjcn; the moment, bcr SUigcnblic! ; some pretext, ein 23crinanb, (masc.) ; directly, fcglctd) ; the advice, hex diatl). How, you are still in bed ? Are you not ashamed, to sleep so long ? I should be ashamed to get np so late. I cannot get up to-day, I have the head-ache. You are a little idler (^auden^er). When you must go to school, you always look for some pretext. You are in the habit of going to bed early and getting up late. That is a bad habit. I beg you, to have patience (for) a moment. I shall get up directly. I have no mind, to ^Yait (any) longer. I fear to come to church too late. You are very hard-hearted ; you have no pity for a poor patient (bcr ^ranfc). You are not ill; you have no mind to go to school. You are right my friend ; I shall take pains to get rid of this fault (biefcn gcfjlcr ab^nlegcn) and to follow 3'our good advice. 125. ©lau'&en, to believe, I believe tliat it is already late. We do not believe it. Keither does my brother believe it. Do you believe it ? I do not believe it. If I did believe it, you would laugji. I have never believed this. Who would have believed that ? I should believe it, if you told me so (it me). It is an incredible thing. You would believe it indeed, if you saw it. These gentlemen do not be- lieVe it. How will you have me (that I should) be- lieve it ? Your brother believed every thing that was told him (all that one told him) ; he was too credulous. He would not believe it, if he knew you. Keitlier, aud) lii^t ; laugh, ki^^en; would have, l^atte; incredible, imglciubltd) ; indeed, it»ci>t; saw, fe^cn; credulous, (etcl;tgldxibig ; knew, lounte. 126. (Bag,m, to say, to tell. I have something to tell you. AYhat have you to say to me ? I tell you nothing. Tell (it) me only. I shall tell you another time. You will not tell my brother, what I have written to you ? Do not tell him, that I am still in bed. AYhat has he told you ? Have I not told it you ? You have not yet told (it) me. Do you wish (will you) me to (that I) tell it ? One must not tell everything that one knows. He has told it me in a whisper. Your uncle told me yesterday, that he would sell his house. What do you say to that? I would tell you with pleasure, if I knew it. If I said otherwise, I should lie. Only, nut; knows, \feif; in a whisper, inS £)I)r; if I knew, Irenn id;tr>u^te: otherwise, anl^erl ; lie, liigen. 127. 28unfd)ett, to wish ; f)C^m, to hope. I Avish, that your enterprise may succeed. We often wish (for) things, which are hurtful to us. I should wish to be able to serve you. I hope that our friend will obtain the situation that he wishes (to get). She did hope to win her law-suit, but she was mistaken. My cousin has nothing more to hope. We hope every- thing of Providence. My sister hopes, that you will do U'hat you have promised her. Never wish jfor) what 67 jou cannot have. What do you wish? (For) what do you hope ? I believe that my father will arrive to-day We must hope it. These gentlemen wish that we should depart. Does your sister wish to go with us? May succeed, gclingcn; Imrtfal, [d)dbud} ; to be able, fonncn; to serve, btcncrt, niV^Ud) fein; obtain, er()alten ; sitnation, ©telle (fern.); 'svin, (^eunnncn: lav,^-suit, ^^roje^; Providence. S3oxjeI)ung (fem.) ; for -^]iat, iuovauf. 128. Sd}rctBcn; to Avrite ; id) fd)ttcB, I wrote; gc[d}rtcbcn, written; Icicn, to read ; ki) ia§, I read ; gcle]cn, read. I am writing a letter to my brother. My mother will vrrite to him to-morrow. You wrote better for- merly. What have you written to him ? Have you not yet written to him, that our friend Henry is dead? Write that to him. If I had a good pen, I should write also. You write too fast; write more slowly. Show me what yea have written. You must write once more. What do you read? I read an amusing book. Wliat didst thou read yesterday, when thou wast with thy uncle? I read the fables of Gellert, which are very well written. We should read oftener if we had more time. How must we (one) read this word? Remember well, what you have read. Would you like (will you) me to (that I should) read this letter to you ? I should like to know how to read like you. Formerly, fru()er, fonjl; fast, fc^ncU; slowly, lartgfam ; show, jct'gcn; once more, nod) einmal; amusing, iinteTt)altcnb ; fable, %ahci (fern.); remember, bel)alten; I should like to know how, i^ mod}te fonrten; like, tine. 129. ©e'f)crt, to see ; id) faf), I saw ; gcfcfjcn, seen ; fcnncn, to know ; id) fannte, I knew ; gefannt, known. What do I see? Do you not see it? I see nothing. But do look. It is well worth the trouble to see it. I saw your cousin yesterday. Have you not seen him? Do you see how I do this ? Your cousin does not see me. If I saw my friend, I should tell him that you are here. Would you like (will you) me to (that I) bring (a) light; or can you^ee still? I have seen Mr. IST. to- day. Does he know me ? I believe that he knows you. He has greeted me. Have you also known my uncle? Have you not told me that ^^ou knew him? I should know him again if I saw liim. Your brotlier has recognized me by my voice. These children do not know me (any) more. Do look, fcf}cn (iic tccl) ciumat; ^vcll worth the trouble, tticfjt btn ?Di{iI)e Wcxti) ; to greet, gri'i^en ; to know agaia, to recognize, tcicbct cvfcnncn; bj the voice, an icx ^tinimc. 130. @cl}en, to go ; ic^ girtg, I went ; gegangen, gone ; trcggetjcit, to go away ; augge^cn, to go out. lYhere are you going? I am going to my aunt, and my brother goes to schooL Where did you go this morn- ing with your cousin? We went to church. I shoukl willingly go to walk, if you would go with me. I shall go with you, but do not go so fast. Where is your sis- ter? She is gone to see her uncle. We should have gone together if I had had time. Shall you not go to N. to- morrow? My father does not wish (will not) me to (that) I should go there. I go away. Do you go away already? Henry does not yet go away. yfilli3.m is already gone away. Go away. I must go away. I believe that your friends are gone away already. At what o'clock do you go out? I go out every morning at seven o'clock. And at what o'clock dost thou go out? I went out yesterday at six o'clock. Is your brother already gone out? To-morrow I shall go out early. I must go out at half past one. My mother did not wish (would not) that I should go out (went out). To go to walk, fpajicrcn gcfjcn ; to go to see any one, ju Scnicinbcm geljcn. 131. £ommcn, to come ; id) fam, I came ; gcfcmmcn, come ; juviicffomiueu, to come back ; aufcmmen, to arrive. Whence do you come so late? We come out of the garden. Eliza does not come to-day ; she is gone into the country with her father. Come to see me this af- ternoon. It is possible that I may come. I should wish that you came early. Formerly you came every day. I should come oftener if I had not so much to do. My brother is not yet come back. He will come back this evening. My uncle does not come back (any) more. We saw your uncle, when we came back from the country. At what o'clock does the post arrive ? I 69 (jelieve it arrives at three o'clock. Yesterday it came very late. Formerly it arrived at two o'clock. My sisters will arrive to-day from Liege. Eliza, ©tie; to come to see, bcfuc^cn; afternoon, S^ad)mtttag- pos- sible, moglid); evening, $lbcnb ; the post bte ^o]t; Liege, £utticy. 132. Srinfcn, to drink ; id) tranf, I drank ; gctrunfen, drunk ; austrtnfcn, fe) finish (a glass, a cup, &c.) ; e[]cn, to eat ; id) ap, I ate ; gegc[|cn, aten ; ju SJiittag c[)cn, to dine. Have you nothing to drink. I drink no wine. We drink only water, and my brother drinks beer. You do not drink. I have the honor to drink your health. When I was young, I drunk nothing but (only) milk. This gentleman has drank a little too much. He does not eat much, but he drinks much. Who has drunk out of my glass ? I will drink no more. We will drink another glass. The wine which we drank yesterday was so good, that every one drank a bottle. Finish your glass. Y^ou have not yet finished your glass. Drink again. Have you no appetite? Eat a little ham. I have eaten enough, I have no more appetite. You will eat another piece of meat. This child eats the whole day. We ate some days ago (some) delicious fish. At what o'clock do you dine ? I dine generally at two o'clock, but to-day I dine at four o'clock. After dinner I drink a cup of cofiee and then I go out to walk. To your health, auf il)re ®cfunbf)ett; the honor, bie @§re; another glass, ncd) ein ®laS ; every one, 3eber; again, nod) einmal; the appe- tite, bcr Slppettt; some days ago, i)or etntgen JX^agen ; delicious fish, fcftlid}e %i\d)C'y the dinner, "baS 3Jiittage[ien ; then, baniu 5i6nncn, to be able, to know ; id) fcnntc, I could ; gcfonut, been able ; tntfien, to know ; id) \)^u§te, I knew ; geWu^t, known. Can you tell me what o'clock it is? I cannot tell (it), you, I have not (got) my watch with me. If I had it with me, I could tell you exactly. I shall not be able to go out to-day; my father is ill. My brother will not be able to come. I should wish, however, that he could come. I should be able to lend you this book, if it belonged to me. Lewis can carry this letter to the post-office. I could not go out yesterday. My friend could not answer your letter, because he had too much to do. Do you know when my father will 70 come back? I do not knovr. Does your sister know it? We know all, that we must die. Do you know (how) to dance? I have known it, but I do not know it (any) more. My father knew several languages. Henry can speak German. These boys know neither how to read nor how to write. The men do not know (how) to em» ploy their time. I did not know that your brother w^as departed. I shall soon know w^ho has done that. How can you suppose (will you) that I should know this? I should wish that you knew it. (I w^ould, &c.) Exactly, ^cium ; hov/ever, jebcd) ; I should wish, trf) ll^cKte ; to be- long, ge[}cren; answer, anttrorten auf (Ace); because, Weil; to dance, tanjcn; to speak German, beutjct; ]prcd)en. 134. 2,I)un, to do ; ici) tf)at, I did ; Qdi)an, done ; mi)mm, to take ; id) naf}m, I took ; genommen, taken. What are you doing? I do what you have ordered me (to do). W^hat were you doing when I came in? I was lighting the fire. What w^ill you do this evening ? I shall do nothing this evening. Your brother does nothing but run. These children do nothing but drink and eat. When one has done one's duty, one has noth- ing to reproach one's self (with). You have done a good action. Why are you in bad spirits ? What have they done to you ? One must do the will of God. You w^ili write to him; in your place I should not do it. 1 shall do my best to satisfy him. I take this for myself. How many books, do you take? Your brother always takes my pen. W^ill you take my place ? Take what you wish. Take this child by the hand. Who has taken my copy-book? Your cousin took my cane yes- terday. I shall take one of these apples, if you allow (it). I have taken the liberty to write to him. We took some chairs and we sat down. If I took these books, my father would scold me. To order, 6efc{)lert; to come in, I)cremfommen ; to light, anjunbcn ; nothing but, nict)tg al§; one's duty, feme ^flid}t; to reproacli one"3 eelf, fid) tJortnerfcn ; action, t^anbhmg, 5i{)at; in bad spirits, I'ibiet l:'aune; in your place, an S^rer SteKc; to do one's best, fein SJicgtid); jleg tf)un; to satisfy, Sefrtebtgcn; myself, mid) ; place, ^Ici^ (ni.) ; by the hand, bci bcr -§aitb; liberty, ?STet{;cit; to sit down, fid;> fc|cn ; to SCO Id any one, nii't iScmanbcni fd^makn. 71 185. • (^rfyfafen, to sleep ; id) [dyitef, 1 slept : gcfd)(afcn, slept ; brcdjen, 5cr6rcd)en, to break; id) brad), I broke; gcbroftjen, brokeu. We sleep too much ; jou. sleep less than we. I sleep generally (for) seven hours. Formerly I slept longer. Sly brother slept yesterday till eight o'clock; but to- morrow he will not sleep so long, because he must depart for Cologne at four o'clock. Our mother does not allow us to sleep longer, than till six o'clock. I sleep scundly. You were very uneasy in your sleep last night. This child sleeps very peaceably. We have no knife to cut our bread; therefore we break it. You will break this stick, if you bend it so. I do not believe that it (will) break. I should not like it to (that it did) break. This boy has broken a pane. He broke two last week. This servant is very heedless; she breaks something every day. Yesterday she broke two glasses, and on Sunday half a dozen cups and saucers. Less, ireniger; soundly, fcf)r fcjl; to be uneasy in one's sleep, unvuf)i(| fd)tafen; last, yortg; peaceable, fanft; to cut, fc^neibcn; therefore, fcc^; i)alb ; to bend, beugen; I should not like, id) mcd)te nic^t; pane, (Sc^ietbe; heedless, xinbebad)t; on Sunday, am <£cnntag ; cups and saucers, 3;!a[[cn. ^' 136. 91atf)cn, to advise ; id) rietf), I advised ; geratl)en, advised ; brtttgcn, tc bring; id) ferad)te, I brought; gcbrad)t, brought; emp[cf)len, to re commend ; id) emy[al}(, I recommended ; ciTH}[of)tcrt, recommended. I do not know what to resolve ; what do you advise me to do ? One advises me this, the other that. They advised me yesterday, to give up a part of my rights, I should like you to (that you advised) me; in you I have the greatest confidence. Because you wish me to (that I advise) you, I tell you that the most unprofit- able accommodation is better than the most favorable law-suit. I shall bring you the fruits which you desire (to have). I believe they have brought them to me already. They brought me yesterday some lettera from Berlin. When you come back, bring your sister with (you). Mr. N. will bring his son with (him) to- morrow. They brought their aunt with (them) from Vienna. I should wish you to (that you brought) the young man with (you) of vfhom you have spoken. He recommends his son to rae. You rccoriimended your 72 business to him. I have recommended him to* "NvatcL over him. What to resolve, toc^u ic^ mic^ cntl'djlicfcn fclf; onC; lliey, man; even, fcgar; to give up, abtretcn; the right, ha§ 9'ied}t; I should like, id) mcdte; in you, ju 31)ncn; the greatest confidence, bv"i§ mcifte 3xu traucn ; the most unprofitable accommodation, &c., eiit magercr S3cri {\kid) tft Bcffcr, ai§ etn fetter ^rcjc^; to_desire, ixninjcijen; the business, las ®e[d;a[t; to watch, wadjcn; over, iibcr. EXERCISES FOR KEADING. 1. THE LITTLE DOG. (Sin grciulein, mxt 92amen Caroline, ging etnft an bem Ufer clncd gluffeS fpa^teren. ©te begegnete ^ter etnigen Bofen ^naben, bie etn §imb(^en ertrcinfen tDoIlten; fie Ijatte 3i)ZitIeib mil bem armen S^^^iere, fanfte e§ nnb natim e§ mit \id) auf hiv3 SDa§ §i:nbcfjen I)attc balb mit fetner nenen ©ebtetertn ^e^ fanntfc^aft gemacfit unb teiiieg fie !etnen Slngenbli(f me^r. (5ine§ ^benb§, aU fie fic^ gu ^ette legen inollte, fing hcS gitnbdjen plo^ti^ an ^n bellen* -Caroline na!)m ha§> ^id)t, fa(} unter ha^ ^ttt unb erbticfte einen 0)Zenf^en, t)on fiirdjter- iidjem S(u§fel}en, ber fid) ^ier t^erborgen Ijattt. (2§ tear ein ©ieb. Caroline rief nm ^iilfe nnb alle ^ett)of)ner be§ (SdjIoffe§ eilten auf il)r ©efc^ret ^erbei. (Sie crgriffen ben Stdnber nnb itberUeferten i^n ber @ered)ttg!eit. dv geftanb in feinem S5er* F)ore, bag e§ feine 5Ibfi(^t gettn^fen irdre, ba§ grdnlein ^n er^ morben unb ha^ (Si^Iog ^n :|Dliinbern. Caroline banfte bem §immel, baj3 er fie fo gliicflic^ geret* tct Ijabe, unb fagte: 9^iemanb fjdtte gegtanbt, ba^ H^ arme ^{)ierd)en, bem id) ba^ Seben gcrettet I)abe, mir ani^ ha^ ukU nige retten n)iirbe. 2. THE GOOD NEIGHBORS. ©er !(eine ^nabe eine§ ^iil(er§ nar)erte fid) 3n fel)r bem ^ad]t unb fie( ^inein. !Der (Sc^mieb, n)c((^er jenfeit be$ ^a- d)e§ iDo^nte, fa^ et% fprang in ba^ Saffer, 3og ba§ ^inb {)Ci"au§ unb hxad]k c§ bem 93atcr. t^ut i^r ^ater mit bem (Sd^a^c gemeint Ijatte, nnb fie fd)rieben an bie Z^ixxt be§ SBeinbergeg mit gvogen ^nc^ftabcn : 5(rbeitfam!eit ift ber grbgte (Bdjai^ bc§ Mcn\d}tn, 5. THE OAK AND THE WILLOW. )Radj ciner fef)r ftiinttifi^en '^'laii)t ging tin ^akv mit feinem (^oljne auf ba§ gelb, nm gn fe!)en, treldien (Si^aben ber (Sturm t)ernrfad)t I)abe. , (Bid) boi^, rief ber ^nabe, ha tiegt bie groge, ftarfe (Sic^e anf bem ^oben ^ingeftredt, toa^* renb bie fdjinadje Seibe am ^ad)t no^ anfredjt bafteljt. Qd) fjcitte geglaubt, ber (Stnrmn)inb irnrbe Ieid)ter bie SKeibe als bie (5id)e niebergeriffen ^ben, dJlcin 2Birt[}g^aug, the inn ;^ "tia^ ^a[feef)aug, the coffee: house ; ber $ala[t, the palace ;■ bie 2Rauer, the wall; bie ^eftung, the fortress ; ber $afen, the harbor ; bie Umgegenb, the environs. HOUSE. bie S)edte, the ceiling ; ber ^'U^boben, the floor ; bie 2Banb, the wall ; ber <,^amin, the chimney ; bie Md}e, the kitchen ; ber teller, the cellar ; ber 6peid^er, the garret, loft ; taS^ '^i^aii), the roof; ber ^of, the court-yard ; ber @arten, the garden ; ber Stall, the stable ; ber Srunnen, the well. FURNITURE. 5)er %i\d)f the table ; bie ^ommobe, the chest of ber 6tuf)I, the chair ; drawers ; ber Spiegel, the looking-glass ; bag ^anapee, the couch ; ber Sd^ran!, the wardrobe ; bag ©emdlbe, the picture; 77 bie 6tanbur;r, the clock; t^a§ a3ett, the bed; i^ie SJhtra^e, the matress ; bie S)ecte, the bed-cloth; ber D[en, the stove ; ber Seuc^ter, the candlestick ; ber Scfjel, the spoon ; bie ©abel, the fork ; ba» ^Tteffer, the knife ; bie %c^\i^, the cup and sau- cer; ba^ 2;ifd)tu(^, the table-cloth , ba§ %^lkxtu(i|, the napkin ; ba^ .^anbtud), the towel ; bie Sic^tfc^eere, the snuffers; ber 5ie[Ier, the plate ; ba» M\']en, the pillow ; bag S3ettud}, the sheet ; bie SSorfjdnge, the curtains ; ba§ ©lag, the glass ; bie ^la[(^e, the bottle ; ber Roxhf the basket. 4.. THE PROFESSIONS. Da» .gianblDer!, the profession ; ber 8d)Ii:f]er, the lock-smith ; ber ^cinbmerfer, the artisan ; ber SJIer^ger, the butcher ; ber Sdder, the baker ; ber DJluIler, the miller ; ber ^utmad^er, the hatter ; ber 6d)rteiber, the tailor ; ber Sd^ufter, the shoemaker ; lex Sarbier, the barber; ber Bdjxdmx, the joiner ; •^ber 3iii^"^ermann, the car pentir ; ber (5)la[er, the glazier ; 5. Sa§ S3rob, the bread ; bay 2Rel)t, the meal, flour ; ba» ^leifc^, the meat ; ber Sraten, the roast-meat ; ^albfleifc^, veal ; 9]inbfleif(^, beef; t^ammelfleifd^, mutton ; ber ^i\fe[ier, the pepper ; bie Sutter, the butter ; ber .^dfe, the cheese ; bie 2RiIc^, the milk ; ber 2Bein, the wine ; 6. ^er diod, the coat ; bay iiteib, the gown ; ber 9}kntel, the cloak ; bie 2Be[te, the waistcoat ; bie ^ade, the jacket ; ber (Bd)U^, the shoe ; ber 8trump[, the stocking ber ©tiefel, the boot ; ber ^antoffel, the slipper ; bag t^emb, the shirt, shift bie Sdjiir^e, the apron ; THE V^ bag Sier, the beer ; bag 5rii^[tii(f , the breakfast ; bag DJZittaggeffen, the dinner; bag S^egperbrob, the after- noon's luncheon ; bag Slbenbeffeti, the supper. CLOTHING. bag %a^d)entndjf the handker- chief: ber .^nt, the hat; bie D}iii|e, the cap; bie U^r, the watch ; ber 9iegenfd}irm, the. umbrella ; Hv 6Dnnen[(^irm, rke parasol;, ber ^-dc^er, the fan ; ber 6c^^teT, tb^oveil ; ber StoS^ ^e,cane; ber^utel, the purse; ^ S3rine, the spectacles. ber cOanbfd^uf), the glove ; ber 9ting, the ring ; "^"^^ 7. THE HUMA^ BODY. %a 2)lenfd}^ the m^ ; ^ ^, ^^ hex $alg, tht neck ; ber ^orper, the body; * v ^ 'bi^c^mtJr^ me shoulder; ber .^Dpf, the head; ' tfer dinden, the back; bag .^aar, the hair ; bag ©efid}t, the face ; bie Stirrte, the forehead; bag 2ttige, the eye ; bie 5Ra[e, the nose ; bag^br, the ear; berlSSfeb, the mouth ; bag ^inn, the chin: ber Sart, the beard; bie Sippe, the lip ; ber 3iibn, the tooth; bie o^i^'S^? t^-i° tongue; ber Slrm, tl^e arm ; bie .ganb, the hand; ber e^inger, the finger; ber 3^agel, the nail; bie Sruft, the breast ; bag ^er^, the heart; ber 2Ragen, the stomach , bag S5ein, the 'leg; ber 5'UJ3, the foot; bag Jinie, the knee , bie S^^J^r *^e toe ; bafj 0)cl;irn, the brain /U- 79 8. THE QUADRUPEDS. 'S)a^ %\)\ti, the animal; ber ^\i\^, tlie stag; ba» $ferb, the horse ; ber Gfel, the donkey; ier .^unb, the dog ; bie M%^, the cat; bie ^atte, the rat; bie 2}tauy, the mouse; ber DJtautourf, the mole ; '1^0.^ Scbrjein, the hogT bie, Siege, the goat; bie (Semfe, the chamois ; ber .^afe, the hare ; ba^ (Sid^f}orn, the squirrel ; ber Slffe, the monkey; 9. THE Ser SSogel, the bird; ber .^atjn, the cock ; ba» §u!)n, the hen ; ba^ ^li^nd^en, the chicken ; ber Sd^man, the swan; bie ©aux^, the goose; bie G'nte, the duck; bie 2:aube, the pigeon ; ber ^fau, the peacock ; bie SBai^tel, the quail; bie Sd}nepfe, the snipe ; 10. THE Serg-ifc^, the fish; ber ^t^l, the pike ; ber ^d}§, the salmon; ber ^var^fen, the carp; bie Sd}leie, the tench ; ber %oi; the eel ; *-bie ^crelle, the trout; bie iTrote, the toad; ber iyrcfd}, the frog; bag Dief), the roe ; ber Dd}fe, the ox ; ber (Stier, the hull ; bie .^11^, the cow; •^^0.% MVq, the calf; bag f(aumenbaitm, the plum- tree; bei" ,^irf(t)baum, the cherry- tree ; . ber 3lu^I?aum, the nut-tree ; bie Gid^e, the oak-tree; bie ^ic!)te, the pine-tree; bie 2;aHtte, the fir-tree ; bie ^iid}e, the Tbeech; bie Ulrtte, the elm ; bie ^appel, the poplar ; bie ^Bliime, the flower ; bie D^ofe, the rose; bie 31ei!e, the pink; bie Sxilpe, the tulip ; bie Silie, the lily; bie Seijfoje, the stock ; 'i)a§ SSeilc^en, the violet; bie SJiaibluJTte, the lily of the valley ; bie i!ornb(ume, the corn-flower ; ber ^lieber, the lilac ; bie Sanb, the countr}^, land ; U§ g^elb, the field; bie (Segenb, the country ; bie Qhene, the plain ; ber SSerg, the mountain ; bal %'^al, the valley ; ber 2Balb, the forest ; ber S3ufd), the copse ber 2Beg, the road ; ber 33a(^, the brook; bie 2Biefe, the meadow ; bie cgaibe, the heath ; ber ^Jilgel, the hill ; bie ^iltte, the cottage ; ba^ S)Dr[, the village ; ber gleto, the borough ; bag Sd}lD^, the castle ; ber 2)leier|)of, the farm ; bie mtW, tbe mill ; 'ba§> .^orit, the corn ; ber SBeijert, the wheat; bie ©er[te, the barley; ber §afer, the oats ; "ta^ Strol), the straw ; '^a^ ^tn, the hay; bie S^raube, the bunch of grapes ; 81 EASY DIALOGUES. 1. EATDTG AiS-D DPJNKI^^G. Are you hungry ? I have a good appetite. I am very hungry ? Eat something. What will you eat ? What do you wish to eat ? You do not eat. I beg your pardon ; I eat very heartily. I have eaten very heartily. I have dined with a good ap- petite. Eat another piece, I can eat no more. Are you thirsty. Are you not thirsty ? I am very thirsty ? I am dying of thirst. Let us drink. Give me something to drink. Will you drink a glass of wine ? Drink a glass of beer. Drink another glass of wine. Sir, I drink to your health. I have the honor, your health. to drink to 4* <3inb Sie I;ungr{g ? 3^ ^ciW giiten Slppettt. ^c^ bin fef)r I)ungrig. Gfien Sie ettva^, 23ay tncllen Sie effen ? 2Ba§ tniitif^en Sie 311 effen? Sie effen nic^t. ^(^ bitte urn S5er3eif)img, id} w'f^^ fefjr i?iel. ^6j l)ahe fefir loid gegeffen. ^d) l:)abe mit giitem Stppetit gu DJiittag gegeffen. Gffen Sie nec^ ein Stiicfd^en. ^d) !ann ni(^t» mel}r geniefien. Sinb Steburftig? >. ^aben Sie fcinen S^urft? 3^ bin fe^r burftig. ^d) ijergef^e i?cr Sutft. Saffen Sie un^ trinfen. ©eben Sie mir gu trinfen. SBoHen Sie ein ©Ia» 2Bein trin fen? Strinfen Sie ein ©{a» Sier. Srinfen Sie ncd) ein ©la^ 2Be{n 3}Iein .^err, ic^ trinfe auf i^r ©efunb^eit. 3(^ ]^aU bie S^re, auf i^re ©e< funb^eit gu trinfen. 82 GOIXG AXD COMIXG. Where are 3'ou going 1 I am going home. I was going to your house. Where do you come from ? I come from my brother's. ^ I am coming from church. 1 just left the school. Will you go with me ? Whither do you wish to go ? We will go for a walk. We will take a walk. \ With all my heart, most will- ingly. What way shall we take ? Any way you like . Let us go into the park. Let us take your friend along on our way. .. As you please. Is Mr. B. at home ? He is gone out. He is not at home. Can you tell us, where he is gone ? I cannot tell you, precisely. I think he is gone to see his sister. Do you know when he will come hack? No, he said nothing about it, when he went out. Then we must go without him. 2Bcf)in gel)en Sie? 2Bol)er fomtnen Sie? ^d) fomme >oon meinem 33ruber, ^d} !omme an§> ber ^ird?e. ^d) fommefo eben aug ber Sd)ule. 2Bo(len Ste mit mir ge^eti ? SBofjin mollen 6{e gel)en? SBir hJoUen fpa^ieren gel}en.^ 2Bir iPoHen einen Spajiergartg (Sel;r gern, mit SSergnugen. SCelc^eti 2Beg tooden h)ir nel)men? SBelc^en 2Beg i^ fagen. ^d) glauBe, ha^ er gu feiner Sd^mefter gegangen ift. SDiffen Sie, n^ann er inxud- tommt ? 9tein; er !f)at nid^t^ bat>on ge« fagt, a(» er ging. Sann ntuffen irir cl^ne i|n ge^en. 83 3. QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS. Come nearer; I liavc some- thing to tell you. I have a word to say to you. Listen to me. . I want to speak to you. What is your wish 1 I am speaking to you. I am not speaking to you. What do you say ? What did you' say ? I say nothing. Do you hear 1 Do you hear what I say 1 Do you understand me ? Will you be so kind, as to repeat. . . . ? [ understand you well. Why do you not answer me ? Do you not speak French ? Very little, Sir. I understand it a little, but I do not speak it. Speak louder. Do not speak so loud. Do not make so much noise. Hold your tongue. Did you not tell me, that. . . ? Who told you that ? They have told me so. Somebody has told it to me. I have heard it. What do you wish to say ? What is that good for ? How do you call that ? That is called S:reten 6ie nd[;er, id} I;abe 3t>' nen et\va§> gu fagert. [agen. §Dren Sie rtiid^ an. ^d} mod^te mit ^l;nen fpredjen. 2Ba§ ftef)t 311 ^fjren S)ien[ten? ^c^ fpred)e mit ^f'tien. ^d) fprec^e nid}t mit St'iien. 2Ba§ fagen Sie? ■2Ba§ l^aben 6{e gefagt? 3c^ fage md;t5. .^oren (Sie? 33er[tel;en 6ie, iray id] fage? SSer[tel;en Sie mic^? SBollen Sie [0 gut fein, 311 me-- berI;oIen ? '3d} i:er[tel;e Sie irol}!. SBariim antirorten Sie mir iud}t ^ ^ Spre($en Sie nic^t franjofifd}? Sel^r menig, mcin ^err. ^d) »er[tel)e e§ ein irenig, abet id) fpre(^e ey nit^t. Spred^en Sic laiiter. Sprec^en Sie nic^t fo>Iaut. 2}tad}en Sie md}t fo i^iel 2axm. Sd}n3eigert Sie. Sagten Sie mir nid)t, ba^ ? 2Ber f)at ^^nen ha^ gefagt ? dJlan 'i^at e^ mir gefagt. (^§ 1)at mir'^ ^emanb gefagt. ^d) ^abe e5 gebcrt. Sffia^ tDoHen Sie fagen? SBogu fell ba§ bienen? 2Bie nennen Sie bag? ^a^. beif3t 84 May I ask you . . . . ? ^Yllat do you wish ? Do you know Mr. G.? I know him by sight. I know him by name. 4. THE How old are you ? How old is your brother ? I am twelve years old. I am ten years and six months old^ Next month I shall be sixteen years old. I was eighteen years old last week. You do not look so old You look older. I thought you were older. I did not think you were so old. S)arf id) Sic fvagen ? 2Baa toilnf(^en Sie? ^ennen Sie .germ 6. ? ^d) !enne if)n i^on Slnfe^en. ^d) fenne ibn bent, dlarmn wadf. AGE. 2Bie altfinb eie? 3Bie alt ift ^fjr $err Sruber? ^d) bin gtoolf ^afjre alt ^d) bin §e^n unb ein Ijalht^ ^dl)x alt, ^m ndi^ften dJlcnat tuerbe tc^ fed}5e^n ^al^re alt. SSergangene SBoc^e bin ic^ ad)U 3ef)n i^afjre alt getoorben. 6ie fel)en nii^t fo alt axi§. Sie fel;en alter au§. ^d) I)ielt fie fur alter. ^d) f)ielt fie nic^t fixr fcf alt. How old may your uncle be ? 2Bie alt mag ibr D^eim fein? He may be sixty years old. Gr !ann etma fecfj^ig ^a^re l^aben He is about sixty years old. \ Gr ift imgefd^r fed^^ig ^al)xe alt He is more than fifty years old. (5r ift iiber fiinf^ig i^al^re alt. He is a man of fifty and up- wards. He may be sixty or there- abouts. He is above eighty. That is a great age. Is he so old ? He begins to grow old. 5. dr ift ein SRann »on ffinfjig unjj einigen 3<^^ren. Gr !ann etin^a fed^jig ^al;rf laljkn, JSr ift liber ad^t^ig ^al^re alt. Sal ift ein l^olje^ Sllter. Sft er fo alt? dx fdngt an ju altern. THE TIME.^ What o'clock is it? 2Sie tiel U^r ift e§? Pray, tell me what time it is ? ^c^ bitte, fagcn Oie m\x, tvdd) 3eit eg ift. It is one o'clock. (fy ift ein lll)x. 85 It is past one. It has struck one. It is a quarter past one. It is half past one. It wants ten minutes to tyro. It is not yet two o'clocl^ It is only twelve o'clock, l It is almost three o'clocl?. It is on the stroke of three. It is going to strike three. It is ten minutes past three. The clock is going to strike. There the clock strikes I It is not late. It is later than I thought. I did not think it was so late. 6. THE What kind of weather is it ? It is bad weather. It is very cloudy. It is dreadful weather. It is fine weather. We are going to have a fine day. It is dewy. It is foggy. It is rainy weather. It threatens to rain. The ^y becomes very cloudy. The sky is getting very dark. The sun is cominor out. The weather i again. It is very hot. It is sultry. cle ©^ ift ein U^r t)crbe{. G» i]'t ein SSiertel auf md, (§y i[t l)alh iidd. (S» fef)len gefjn DJIinutcn an gJuei (5» {[t nc^ iud)t giuei U^x. QS i[t er[t stUDlf. Qx> ift beina^e brei. a^ ift gegen brei. G» mirb gleic^ brei lll;r fd}Iagen (E§ ift 3ef)n 2}linuten nad) brei, 5)ie Vii)x toirb fcgleid; fc^lagen. S^a fd}Idgt bie U\)x I Q§> ift nic^t fpdt. as ift fpdter, all id) )ia&jU, ^d^ bad}te nic^t, bai3 c§> fo fpdJ mdre. WEATHER. ma§ ift el fiir 2BetterV QB ift f(^re(itel SBetter. ^m ift triibe. ©I ift ein abfc^eulid}el Setter. (SS ift f(^5nel SBetter. '^• 2Bir it»erben einen fc^onen %ag^ l^aben. (fl l^aut. 6» ift nebelig. (I» ift regnetifc^ el SBetter. (51 hxc'i)t 3U regnen. S)er fiimmel um^ie^t fid). 2^er .^immel tuirb bunfet. 6ie Sonne fdngt an fid} gu geigen. up S^al SBetter fidrt fid} tt?ieber auf ei ift fe^r ^ei^. Gl ift eine erftidenbe $i|e. 86 It is very mild. It is cold. It is excessively cold. It is raw weather It rains. It has been raining. It is going to rain. I feel some drops of rain. There ure some drops of rain falling. It hails. It snows ; it is snowing. It has been snowing. It snows in large flakes. It freezes. It has frozen. It begins to moderate. It thaws. It is very windy. The wind is very high. There is no air stirring. It lightens. It has lightened all night. It thunders ^ The thunder roars. The thunderbolt has fallen. It is stormy weather. We shall have a thunder- storm. The sky begins to clear up. The weather is very unsettled. It is very muddy. It is very dusty. It is very slippery. It is bad walking. G^ i[t fe^r milb. G^ i[t fait. 6'» ift eine iibermd^ige Miit* ^§> ift raufjeg SBetter. ©g regnet. GS f)at geregnet. 6v luirb gleid} regnen. 3c^ [Af)Ie Df^egentropfen. | G^ [alien 9^egentrop[en. ^§> I;agelt. ^§> fc^neit; e§ fdllt 6(!)nee. Gio ^at gefc^neit; i§> ift B^utt gefallen. G^ f(^neit in grcf^en g-Iotfen. G^ friert. Gg I;at gefroren. ^§> fdngt an gelinber ju merbcn. , ^§> tl^aut ayx'i, dg ift \t\)i iDinbig. ^er SBinb wel)t ftar!. 6» \ot\)i !ein £ii[t(^en. (?^ blip. ®» I;at bie ganje Dlad^t gebli|t. (5^ bonnert. ^er S)Dnner rollt. ©» 1[)0.t eingefc^Iagen. (5-S ift ftiirmifd)e^ SBetter. SBir ^ irerben ein ©etoitter be* !cntmen. ^er ,§immel fdngt an, fid; auf 3ul;dtern. ^a^ SBetter ift fel;r nnbeftdnbig, G» ift fe^r fd^mulng. Gi3 ift fel)r ftanbig. ^§> ift fe^r glatt. G^ ift fd}led}te§ @e^en. 87 It is day-light. It is dark. It is night. It is moon-light. Do you think it will be fine weather. 1 do not think that it will rain. I am afraid it will rain. I fear so. G^ {ft %aq, (^§ ift bunfel. m ift dla^^t S)er Tlonh fc^eint. (^lauben Sie, ba^ e» gutel 2Bet« ter geben tuirb? ^d) glaube nic^t, baJ3 ey regnen mtrb. ^c^ fiirc^te, e§ mirb regnen. oc^ fiirc^te e§. 7. THE SALUTATIOIS". Good morning, Sir I I wish you a good morning. How do you do ? How is your health ? ©uten SRorgen, mein ^err! gen. 2Bie befinben 8ie fic^ ? 2Cie gel^t e^o mit ^f)rer ©efunbi ^eit? Sefitiben Sie fic^ immer mof)!? Do you continue in good health ? Pretty good ; and how is 3^cinltd) tr»cl}l, unb Sie ? yours 1 Are you well ? Very well, and you ? I am perfectly well. And how is it with you 1 As usual. Pretty well, thank God. I am very happy to see you well. einb eie too!}!? Sebr tDD^l, unb Sie aucf)? ^d) befinbe tnid^ fel^;' vooU, Unb trie gebt e^ mit 3^nen? S)ie geirDf)nl{(^. 3temli^ gut, (^s^tt fei S)an!. 6'^ freut miii) fef)r 8{e lncf)( gu fef)en. 8. THE VISIT. There is a knock. Somebody knocks. Go and see who it is. Go and open the door. It is Mrs. B. Q§ !lDpft Semanb. ©e{)' unb fief), mer ba ift. ©el/ unb Dffne bte S;i)ur. e=§ ift SRabame 33. I wish you a good mornino;. I am Iiappy to see you. I have not seen you this age. It is a novelty to see you. Pray, sit down. Sit down, if you please. Take a seat. Give a chair to the lady. Will you stay and take some dinner with us ? I cannot stay. I only came in to see how you are. I must go You are in a great hurry. Why are you in such a hurry ? I have a great many things to do. Surely you can stay a little longer. I will stay longer another time. I thank you for your visit. I hope to see you soon again. ^d) roiinfcbe ^Imn guten OJ^ori gen. G^ freut tnidf), 8ie gu fel()en. ' (Sy i[t ein ^afjrfjunbert, [eit ic^ (bie md}t faf). (5^ i[t eine Selten^eit, Sie 511 fef)en. 8e^en Sie fic^, ic^ bitte. 6et^en Sie fic^ gefdlligft. 3^el;men Sie $Ia|. ©ib 2Jlabame einen StuI;L SBcUen Sie gum 2)littag§e[|en bet ung bleiben? ^d) !ann nic^t bleiben, ^d) bin nur gefommen, urn gu er[al)ren,4t3te Sie fic^ befinben. ^d) mu^ ge|)en. Siq finb fe^r eiHg. aSesljalb finb Sie [0 eilig? ^d} f)abe i^iel §u tl;nn. Sie !5nnen iDoI}! ncd) einen 2Iu; genblid bleiben. Gin anber 2Ral n?i(I id) Idngei bleiben. ^d} banfe ^l^nen fiir ^Fjren Se^ fud}. ^d) Ijoffe Sie balb n^ieber 311 fel;en. 9. THE BREAKFAST. Have you breakfasted ? Not yet. You are come just in time. You will breakfast with us. Breakfast is ready. $aben Sie gefruMtudt ? dlod) md)t Sie fcmmen gerabe 311 redjtei Beit. Sie merben mit nni§ friibftiicfen. ^a§ ^yriifjftitd i[t bereit. 89 Do you drink tea or coffee 1 \Yould you prefer chocolate '? I prefer coffee. What can I offer you ? Here are rolls and toast. What do you like best ? I shall take a roll. How do you like the coffee ? Is the coffee strong enough ? It is excellent. Is there enough sugar in it ? If there is not, do not make any ceremony. Do as if 3"ou were at home. ^Trinfen Sie 3;f)ee cber i?a[fec ? 2Bc((en Sie i^iellcid^t Itcber (^IjO' fDlabe? ^d} 3iel;e ben ilafiee ^ox, 5Ba» !ann id} ^^neu anbieten? t^ier finb SJlild^brobc^en unb ge« rc'ftete ^Brcbf^nittc^en. SBag mcgen Sie am liebften? ^d} iperbe ein 58r5bd^en nefjmen. SBie finben Sie ben i^afjce? S[t ber ilaffee ftar! genug ? (?r ift i^ortrefflic^. 3ft genug 3uder barin? Sl't e^ ni(^t, fo mac^en 6ic !eine ^lomplimente. 3:F)un Sie, al^ cb Sic ju .^anfc it)dren. 10. BEFORE DINNER. At what time do we dine to- day ? We shall dine at two o'clock. We shall not dine before three o'clock. Shall we have anybody at dinner to-day 1 Do you expect company ? I expect Mr. B. Mr. D. has promised to come if the weather permits it. Have you given orders for dinner ? What have you ordered for dinner ? Have you sent for fish ? I could not get any fish. Unt vodiije B^it e[[eii mt I;eutc 3u2}littag? 2Bir trerben unt gloei Uf)r ef[en. 2Bir toerben n{d}t )ocv brei Uljr ejTen. SEerben tolx I;eute gum Gfjen ^emanben bei un^ I)aben? Gmarten Sie Gefellfd^aft? ^(^ eriDarte ^errn 35. ijiexx S). 'i)at ijerfprod^en gu Urn-- men, menu e» baS ^Better eriaubt. t^aben Sie bie Sefel^le gum dJllU tagyeffen gegeben? 2Ba» ^ahen Sie 311m Q]\cn he-- ftellt? .^aben Sie %\\d) befcrgen laffen? 3c^ \)abe feinen ^-ifc^ beFommea fcnnen. 90 I fear, we shall have a very ^d) Befcrge, ba^ Wix !ein fon« indifferent dinner. berlid}e§ 9}tittagye[]en 1)dbcr\ tnerben. We must do as we can. 2Bir miiffen im5 bei^elfen. 11. DIXNER. What shall I help you to ? Will you take a little soup ? No, I thank you. I will trou- ble you for a little beef. It looks so very nice. Which piece do you like best ? I hope this piece is to your liking. Gentlemen, you have dishes near you. Help yourselves. Take without ceremony what you like best. Would you like a little of this roast-meat ? Do you choose some fat ? Give me some of the lean, if you please. How do you like the roast- meat? It is excellent, delicious. What will you take with your meat ? May I help you to some ve- getables ? Will you take peas or cauli- flower ? It is quite indifferent to me. I shall send you a piece of this fowl. 2Bay foil id} ^\)\Kn t»DrIegen? SBoaen Sie etm§ Suppe? 3d} ban!e. :^c^ irerbe 6ie urn etmag S^iinbfleifd) bitten. ©» fiel)t fo gut an§, 2SeI(f)eg 8tiict i)aben Bk am liebften? ^c^ |)D[[e, ba^ bie» 'Bind nadj Severn ©efd)made ift. 2)^eine ^erren, bte (Sd^iifj'eln fte^en ccr Sf'^^i^. ^Bebienen Sie fic^. 3tef}men Sie Df)m Uinftdnbe, tDa§ 3f)nen beliebt. 2BoEert Sie ein iuenig i^cn bie^ fern $8raten? SBollen Sie^^etteB? ^ehen Sie mir 2)lagere», tDcmi e» 3^nen gefdKig ift. 2Bie finben Sie ben Sraten? G^ ift ^ortrefflid^, foftlid?. 2Ba^ mlinfc^en Sie pm ^leifd; ? ^ar[ id} 3f)nen ©emiife gcben? SBi'mfc^en Sie (^rbfen Dber ^liu nienfcbl? (?» ift mir ganj glcid). ^d} irill 3f}"sn ein Stfiddfjen itcn biefem ©ef(iige( reid}en. 91 No, thank j^ou, I can cat no ^d) ban!e, id; !ann iud^t» mebr more. You are a poor eater. You eat nothing. I beg your pardon, I do honor to your dinner. You may take away. efi'en. 6ie finb ein ji^toad^er Gffer. 6ie effen gar nid^t^. 3d} bitte iim 3Ser3eif)img, mac^e ^I^rem Gffen dfjre. ^l)v fonnt aliC^bann abbeden. i* 12. TEA. Have you carried in the tea- things ? Everything is on the table. Does the water boil ? Tea is ready. They are waiting for you. Here I am. We have not cups enough. We want two more cups and saucers. Bring another tea-spoon and a saucer. You have not brought in the sugar-tongs. Do you take cream ? The tea is so strong. I shall thank you for a little more milk. Here are cakes and muffins. Do you prefer some bread and butter ? I shall take a slice of bread and butter. Pass the plate this way. Ring the bell, if you please. \Yill you kindly ring the bell ? We want some more water. $a[t bu Sides gebrad)t, \va8 ^um 3;bee gel)ort? G5 i[t Sides auf bem 5:{[d;e, Siodjt ^a§> 2Baf)er? S)er Z^ee ift fertig. ©ie irerben emavtet. .^ier bin id). 2Biv fjabcn n{d}t ^afj'en genug. 2Bir mfiffen n^dj girei %a^en Ijahcm, 93ringe ncd} einen 3^l;eel5ffel unb eine Untertaffe. ^u f)a[t bie S^^^^^^Q^ ^ic^t gebrac^t. 9Ie!)Tnen 6ie 9ial)m? Ser 5i^ee ift fo [tarf. ^d) merbe ncd) um etiuaS Wild:} bitten, c^ier ift Sind)en urtb 33rcb!ud^en Gffen Sie lieber Sutterbrob? ^d) n?erbe ein SButterbrcb nebs men. ^dj'uh ben Zdkx ]^ier|)er. 8cbeden 6ie gefddigft. SBclIen €ie giitigft bie ilfingel giel^en? 2Bir brau^en nc^ mefjc SCaffcr. 92 Bring it as quickly as possible. Make haste. Take the plate with you. Is your tea sweet enough ? Have I put sugar enough in your tea? It is excellent. I do not like it quite so sweet. Your tea is very good. Where do you buy it ? I buy it at ... . Have you already done ? You will take another cup ? I shall pour you out half a cup. You will not refuse me. I havft already drunk three cups, and I never drink more. S3riiic3e c^^ jo [d^nell aU rnQQliif. 33eei(e bid). Tdmm ben teller mit. 3[t bev 3:l;ee filfs gemig? ^abe id) genug 3^^^^ i^ 3^r^w %l)ee getljan? Gr i[t cortrefflid). ^d) 1;)aU iljn md)t gem fo [u^. 3I;r 2:l)ee i[t fef)r gut. 2Bo !au[en Sie i^n? ^(^ ^aufe {f}n bei 6inb 8ie [(^on ferttg? Sie iDerben nod} eine 3:affe nef)men? ^(^ h?erbe Sf).nen ncc^ eine ^^albe Saffe einfd^enfen. Sie irerben e§ mir mc^t abs fd}Iagen. ^d) hahe fd}on brci Xa^en ge* trunfen, unb me^r trinfe ic^ ffiie. A NEW PEACTICAL A^D EASY METHOD OF LEARXH^-G THE GEKMAN LANGUAGE. BY F. A H N, DOCTOE OF PUILOeOrnY AXD PKOFESSOR AT Tira COLU:QE O? NECES. SECOND COUESE. FIEST AiTEEICAN, rROil THE EIGHTH lOXDOX EDITION NEW YOEK: D. APPLETON AND COMPANY, 549 & 551 BEOADTTAT 18?2. INDEX. Theoretical Part. ^""^^ Chapter I. — Of the x^rticle 7 Chapter II. — Of the Substantive . 8 1. Of the Gender of Substantives 8 2. Of the Declension of Substantives 10 3. Of the Formation of the Plural 13 4. Of Proper Names 16 5. Of the Formation of Feminine Nouns 17 6. Of the Diminutives 17 Chapter III. — Of the Adjective 18 1. Declension of the Adjectives 18 2. Degrees of Comparison of the Adjectives. . . 20 Chapter IY.— Of the Numbers 21 Chapter V. — Of Pronouns 23 1. Determinate Personal Pronouns 23 2. Indeterminate Personal Pronouns 24 Ckaptefo VI. — Of Adjective and Relative Pronouns, 25 1. Demonstrative Pronouns 25 2. Possessive Pronouns 27 3. Relative Pronouns 27 4. Interrogative Pronouns 28 Chapter VII.— Of the Verb 29 1. Preliminary Notions 29 2. Of the Conjugation of Assonant Verbs 30 3. Of the Conjugation of Dissonant Verbs ... 32 4. Of the Conjugation of Irregular Verbs 38 5. Of the Formation of the Compound Tenses . . 41 6. Of the Conjugation of Passive Verbs 44 7. Of Reflective Verbs 46 8. Of Impersonal Verbs 48 9. Of Compound Verbs 49 Chapter VIII. — Of Prepositions 51 Chapter IX. — Of Adverbs ,,,..,.... 56 PAGB Chapter. X. — Of Conjunctions 68 Chapter XI.— Of the Use of the Moods 59 1. Indicative Mood 50 2. Subjunctive Mood 59 3. Imperative Mood 60 4 Infinitive Mood 61 5 Participles 62 (^tiAPTER XII.— Of the Use of the Tenses 63 1. Present Tense 63 2. Imperfect Tense 63 3. Perfect Tense 64 ChaptePw XIII. — Of the Construction 64 Table of all Irregular Forms of the Irregular Yerbs, 69 Practical Part. Alphabetical List of all those words which are to be met with in the 136 exercises of the first course, and with which the pupil is supposed to be quite familiar • 81 Exercises 84 Diverse Exercises 106 1. The Cane-pipe 106 2. The Three Eobbers 106 3. The Pilgrim 107 4. The Kobin-Redbreast 108 5. The Voice of Justice 108 6. The Peaches 109 7. The Desert Island 110 Vocabulary 114 Collection of much used Phrases 118 THEORETICAL PAET. CHAPTER I. PRELIMINARY ITOTIONS. § 1. The German Language is composed of eight kinds of words, called the ^arts of speech. They are : the Article, the Substantive, the Adjective, the Pronoun, the Verb, the Adverb, the Preposition, and the Con- junction. § 2. There are in German two numbers: the Sin- gular and the Plural; three genders: the masculine, the feminine, and the neuter ; four cases : the Nomina- tive, the Genitive, the Dative, and the Accusative."^ OF THE ARTICLE. § 3. We distinguish in German two kinds of Ar- ticles: the definite Article bcr, bie, baS, and the indefi- nite Article ein, eine, ein. I. DECLENSION OF THE DEFINITE ARTICLE. Singular. Plural Masc. Fern. Neut. for all genders. Ifoni bcr, btc, ^Oi§, bic. 1>he, Gen. be4 iev bc§. bcr. of the, Dat. bent, ber, bcm, ben, to the, Ace. bert, Vu, ba5, Viz, the. 2. DECLENSION OF THE INDEFINITE ARTICLE. N'om. em, emc. cin. a, Gen. cirteS, ctner, eines. of a, Dat. einem, cmcr. cincm. to a, Ace. einett, eine, , melancholy. The other words compounded with SJZutI), are mascu- line. Ex. : bcr §0(f)mitt^, haughtiness. § 8. There are some Substantives which have two genders, but with diJBTerent meanings : 5)er S3anb/ the volume ; \i S'f)or, the gate ; bcr 33crbien|i, the gain ; \i. The second forms the Genitive in n. The third is in the Genitive like the JSTominative. First Declension. § 10. The first declension comprehends : 1. All neuter Substantives without exception. 2 All masculine Substantives, which do not follow the second declension. 11 1, Genitive in §, JSToru. ber ©^iegel, the mirror ; Gen. bc§ (SpiegelS, of the mirror ; Dat. tern ©piegel, to the mirror ; Ace. ben Spiegel; the mirror. To be declined in the same way: S)er <§immcl, tlie sky ; baS ^enfier, the windoAv ; ber 93ater, the father ; ba§ 5luge, the eye ; bcr 5)egen, the sword ; ba0 3}tabd}en, the girl. 2. Genitive in c§» When euphony demands it, the § of the Genitive may be preceded by an e, and this e must be preserved in the Dative. In familiar style this softening is almost always neglected, but it is necessary in the Genitive of all those Substantives the terminations of which would be too hard without this half-mute e. Ex. : ISTom. bcr Z\\^, the table ; ba§ .^mb, the child ; Gen. be§ %i\^)§unb, the dog ; bie «§unbe, the dogs ; hk <§anb, the hand ; bie «§dnbe, the hands ; has 33eirt, the leg ; bic ^eine, the legs. 2. The Substantives ending in nig, fal and tng, as (V'ell as those beginning by cj e and ending by the radical syllable : 2)ic 5vcnntnif, knowledge; bte .^cnntniffe, knowledge; iia§ (S^eufal, the monster; hk (Scf)cufale, the monsters ; ber ^TCinbling, the stranger ; bie i^TcmblingC; the strangers ; tia§ ©ebet, the prayer ; bie ©cbetc, the prayers ; ba§ ®efd}cuf, the present ; bte @cfcf;cnfe, the presents. 2. Plural in er : 1. The Substantives ending in f^um: $Dcr 9lcid)tf)um, wealth ; bte 9letd}t-^iimer, the riches ; fe«r 3rrtf)um, the error ; bie Sut^umer, the errors. % The following monosyllables: Ser ©eij^, the mind ; bcr Slanb, the border ; 2)er 2cib, the body ; ber SBalb, the forest ; S)er @ott, the god ; bcr SSiirm, the worm ; bcv 2}?ann, the man; bcr Dxt, the place 2)a§ Stmt, the office ; baS '^a^, the cask ; bag Q3anb, the ribbon ; baS §clb, the field ; has ^iih, the image ; ba§ ®ia§, the glass ; ta§ 53rett, the board; bag @lteb, the limb; bag ^urf), the book; bag ®rab, the grave ; bag ©a^, the roof; bag -^aug, the house ; has Serf, the village ; bag «§ut)n, the chicken; bag ffilatt, the leaf; bag kaib, the calf; bag ^inb, the child ; bag <3c1)Id^, the castle ; bag ^Icib, the dress ; bag '^i)ai, the valley; bag Sieb, the song ; bag 33oIf, the people ; bag Sod), the hole ; bag SBcib, the woman. 5* 14 3. Plural in n : 8. All Substantives of the second declension, which take u in the Genitive of the Singular: S}cr J^naBe, tlie boy ; bte ^naBen, the boys ; ber 2)eutld}e, the German; bte 2)cilticl)en, the Germans. 2. The feminine Substantives in e, el and er: hit Sicnc, the bee ; bie Stcnen, the bees ; bte (Sc^irtejler, the sister ; 'iik ©d)tx)cftern, the sisters ; bte ©aBel, the fork ; bie ©aBcln, the forks. 4. Plural in en : 1. All Substantives of the second declension, whicb take e n in the Genitive Singular : 2)cr T^iitfi, the prince ; bte j^utftcrt, the princes ; ber Solbat, the soldier ; bte (£otbatett, the soldiers. 2. The Substantives ending in ^ e i t , !ett, f^aft, in and ung: bie %tii^i{i, liberty; bie ^ei^eiten; bie Sirtigfeit, politeness ; Vit Strtigfeiten ; bie STeunbfd)aft, friendsliip; bie ^^eunbfdjaften; bie ffi}irtf)in,* the hostess ; bie S^irtl)innen ; bie 2)ieinung, the opinion ; bte 2}kinungen. 8. The following Substantives : 2)a§ Sett, the bed : bie ^rau, the woman ; ba§ t§emb, the shirt, Vit (id)lacf)t, the battle; ba§ ^ixi, the heart : bie 3Sc[t, the world ; ba0 £)\)Xf the ear ; bie %^§unb/ the dog ; ber Xa^, the day. 8. The following Substantives, which do not change m the Plural : Ser 5(pfet, the apple ; ber 33ater, the father ; ber 2)ZangeI, the want ; ber 33ruber, the brother ; ber S^agel, the nail ; ber ®arten, the garden ; ber (Battel, the saddle ; ber ^aben, the thread ; ber ?0?antel, the cloak ; ber £)fen, the stove ; ber SSogel, the bird ; hk Wlutkv, the mother ; ber '§aminery the hammer ; bie ^cd?tcr, the daughter. 16 TABLE of the drfferer t inflexions of German Subatantivos I. Singular. 1. 2. 3. Nom. — — Gen. § or e§ n or en — Dat. — oi e n or en — Ace. — n or en — 11. Flural. 1. 2 3. 4. Kom. e cr n or en — Gen. c er n or en — . Dat. en m n or en tt Ace. e er n or en — IV. OF PROPER NAVIES. §. 117. The proper names of persons are declined with or without the article. If declined with the article they do not change in the Singular. Ex. : Kom. ber ^axl, Charles ; fcer 'Bd)ilkx, Schiller ; Gen. hcS ^axi§, of Charles ; fcc0 ^djUkx, of Schiller ; Dat. bem ^axi, to Charles ; fcem (ic^tller, to Schiller ; Ace. ben ^axl, Charles ; ben tg bcr clfte, Lewis the eleventh ; «^cinrtd) ber inerte, Henry the fourth. CHAP TEE V. OF PRO^S'OUIs^S. 1. DETERMINATE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. § 28. The first person is expressed by ic^, I; Plural, Mm, we; the second person by bit, thou; Plural, i^r, you ; the third person by cr, he ; fie, she ; e§, it ; and lie, they ; Plural for all genders. They are declined in the following manner. Singular. First person. Second person. N. idj, I ; bit, thou ; G. meincr, of me ; bciner, of thee ; D. mix, to me ; btr, to thee; A. iiiid), me ; bttt, thee. 24 Plural. N". \x*[r, we ; ii^x, yon ; G. wnfcr, of us cucr, of you ; D. un§, to us ; end), to you ; A. nni, us ; curf), you. Third person. Singular. Masculine. Feminine. Neuter. N, er, he ; fte, she ; c§, it ; G. fcincr, of him ; ii)xex, of her ; fciner, of it ; D. t()m, to him; t()r, to her ; if)m, to it; A. {|;n, him. fie, her. c§, it. Plural tor all Genders. E". ftc, they ; G. t^rer, of them ; D. x^nen, to them ; A. fte, them. § 29. The reflective pronoun of the third person fid), himself, herself, itself, has no Nominative, and is declined thus: Masculine and Neuter. Feminine. Plural. G. fciner, of himself; t^rcr, of herself ; if)rer, of themselves ; I>. fid), to himself; fid}, to herself; fid), to themselves ; A. fid), himself. fic^, herself. fid), themselves. Sometimes the word fctbft, self, is joined to the perso- nal pronouns. Ex.: ic^ felbft, myself; bu felbft, thyself ; er felbft, himself; fid) felbft, one's self; \v>iv felbft, ourselves. In joining the word fe(bft to a verh, the pronouns are not repeated as in English. Ex. : (gr fjat e§ felbft gcfagt, he said so himself; fie l)at e§ mir felbft gcfagt, she told it to me herself. § 80. The pronoun bit is used in intimacy or con- tempt. When the Germans speak to a person who de- serves respect, they employ @te and Sljnen, that is t-r say, the plural of the pronoun in the third person. Ex, (Sic l^aBcrt c§ mix gefagt, you told me so ; i^ fenne ©ie Ttid)t, I do not know you ; id) toiii eS 2^nm gebcn, I will give it to you. 2. INDETERMINATE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. . 81. The indeterminate personal pronouns are: 2}?aTt, one, they ; ^cbermann, every one ; Semanb, somelDody ; Siner, some one ; ^icmanb, nobody ; Reiner, no one. I 93?an is indeclinable ; 3'^'^^^'li^^'itt'-^ takes in tlie Genitive an ^; ^^emanb and 9tiemanb are either invariable or take the endings of the definite article. Ex.: SBcnn man reict) i\t, fjat man ^^rcunbc. When one is rich one has friends Setermann tr»irb e§ tf)nen fagcn. Every one will tell you. (S§ i)at Semanb nad) 31)ncn gefvagt. Somebody has asked for you. 9}ian mu§ Dltemanben Ijaffcn. We must hate nobody. Reiner iwcip, cb cr morgcn noc^ Icben No one knows, if he will live till lt)irb. to-morrow. § 32. Add to these pronouns the following words : (StttJaS, something, anything ; nid)t§, nothing ; jcbcr, jebe, jebeS^ every, each, every one ; aikx, alk, aikS, all, everything ; folder, fot^e, fold)cs, such ; manner, mand)c, man^cS, many a, many a one ; mctjrere, several; irgenb cin, any, some etntge, some ; ^k meiften, the most. Examples. 3d) 'ijobi ct\va§ ^cm§ i?cvnommcn. I have heard something new. 3ct) I)abe nid)t§ ge^ort. I have heard nothing. Sebcr mu§ fcinc *J|5^id)ten crfuHcn. Every one must fulfil his duties. 3cbcg i'anb i}at fcine @cbrdud)e. Every country has its customs. SU(e 2)tcnfd)cn ftnb ftcrblid^. All men are mortal. 5UIcS i^ lu^rloren. Every thing is lost. (Sin folc^er 33erlufi if! unerfclttd). Such a loss is irreparable. Slianc^er jdct, ber nic^t ernbtct. Many a one sows, who does not reap. 3d) T)abe manc^cn STag lierlorcn. I have lost many a day. ©cben (Sie mtr cinige ^cbcnt. Give me some pens. £cil)cn Sic mir irgenb cin 33ud). Lend me some book. 93i£in ©ruber Ijat mel^rere ^Teunbe. My brother has sevei*al friends. ^k mcifien 2}ccnfd)en xirtl)eilen nad) Most men judge according to ap* beni (£d;ein. pearances. CHAPTEK VI. OF ADJECTIVE AND RELATIVE PKONOUNS. 1. DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUITS. § 83. The demonstrative pronouns are : For near objects : biefcr, bie[e, biefe§, this, this one. For distant objects : jener, jenc, ienc§, that, that one. Ex. ©icfcr 9}cann, this man ; bte[e %xau, this woman ; btefe^ 5?tnb, this child ; jener ^ifd)/ that table ; jcne Sober, tliat pen ; |ene§ S3uc^/ 26 Aat book. S)ie[cr iji gluc!lid}, Sener ijl imgludlid), this oue is liappj that one is unhappy. The demonstrative Pronouns have the same termina- tions as the definite article, and are declined in the same manner. Masculine. Feminine. Neuter. Plural ]S^ biefer, btcfc, biefcS, bic'e, G. btcfeg, bicfer, bicfc0, bicfer. I), biefem, biefcr, bicfcm, btcfen, A. biejeit, bieje, btcjeS, bieje. Instead of btefe§, one may say bteS in the Nominative and Accusative Neuter : bie^ -^udj, this book. § 84. Instead of biefer and jerter the article ber, bie, 6a§, is very often employed, on which in that case a greater stress is placed. Ex. : 2) C r 2)iatttt, this man ; b t e %XQ. S^erieuicje, &c. is always construed with the re- lative pronoun ir)e(d)er, iT^eldjC, &c. and answers in this construction to the English; he who, that which, the one who or which. Ex. : S)erientge, n^elc^er fommt, he who comes ; biejenige, itield}e lpTid}t/ she who speaks : bagfcnige, "vodd^^ id) meinc, that wliich I mean ; btcjenigen, ixtetdje bcrcit fi^^; those who are ready. 27 2. POSSESSIVE rEOXOU:N'S. § 87« The possessive pronouns are either joined to a substantive or they stand alone ; or in other words they are either conjoined or disjoined. The conjoined possessive pronouns are the following : lasculinc. Feminine. Neuter. mcin, meirtc, mdn, my; betn, beinc; bein, thy; fCtlt; fcinc, fcin, his; ii)x, it)rc, il)r, her; fcin, feine, fein, its; unfer, unfere, unfcr, our; cuer, eiicrc, euer, your ; \i)X, if)re, i^r, their. § 38. The conjoined possessive pronouns take the same inflexions as the article ein, eine, ein. Ex.: Singular. Plural. jS". mem 93ruber, my brotlier ; tneine S3rxibcr, my brothers ; G. nteineS 53rubcr0, mctner ^rubcr, D. metnem 53rubcr, incinen S3rubertt, A. ■meinen S3rubcr, mcine ^ruber. § 89. The disjoined possessive pronouns are derived from the conjoined ones, by adding the syllable tg. bcr meinigc, bte ntcmtge, t)tr lob — en il)r Icb — et tjir Icb — et fie lob— en fie lob — en. Imperfect Tense. id) lob — te, I praised, I did praise, icE) lob — te, (if) I praised. [was praising, bn Icb— tei^ bu lob— tejl cr lob — tc er lob — te tr>ir lob — ten nirlob — ten i^r lob— tet i:^r lob— tet fie lob — ten fie lob — ten. Iraperatiye Mood: loB — t, praise (thou); lob — ct, praise (je). Present Participle : lob — enb, praising. Perfect Participle : ge — lob — i, praised. Observation. "When the euphony demands it, the terminations of the Imperfect, as well as those of the Present Tense in t and \t, are pre- ceded by an e. Ex. : 3^ tebc, I speak; bu rebejl:, thou speakest; et rebet, he speaks ; \))x rebel, you speak. Scl) rebete, I spoke ; bu rebeteft; thou spokest; er rebete, he spoke; it»ir rebeten, we spoke; il)r rebctet, you spoke ; fte rebeten, they spoke. In those verbs, the root of which ends in b or t this softening always takes place. 82 § 49. There are assonant as well as dissonant verbs, which do not take the initials cj e in the Perfect Parti- ciple. Of this class are : 1. The verbs, which have the foreign termination ire 11 Drier en. Ex.: j, regicren, to govern rcgtert, governed fpajicrcn, to walk fpajiert, walked abbircn^L to add abbirt, added. 2. Those derived verbs, which begin by one of the particles be, ge, ent, tmp, cr, ber, ^er.* Ex.: Be[ud)ett, to visit Bcfud)t, visited erlangert, to attain erkrtgt, attained ijetirteilert/ to stay setiDeilt, staid jcrftorcn, to destroy gCrftort; destroyed. 3. The verbs, "which are compounded with an inse- parable preposition or adverb. Ex.: unterrtd)ten, to instruct xintcrrtd)tct, instructed Itibcrlcgen, to refute it>iberlegt, refuted lioHcnbeU; to complete iJoKenbet/ completed. In verbs, which are compounded with a separable pre- position or adverb, the syllable g e is placed between the verb and the preposition or adverb. Ex. : aBfurjcn, to shorten abgefurjt, shortened onflagcn, to accuse angcflngt, accused fortjageit, to send away fortgejagt, sent away. . § 50. Conjugate the following verbs : fagcn, to say ircincn, to weep iieben, to love Iad)cn, to laugh glaubert, to believe fii^lert, to feel ttji'mf^en, to wish t)orcn, to hear f)oftcn, to hope jpielen, to play. 3. OF THE COIS^JUGATION" OF THE DISSONANT VERBS. § 51. The number of dissonant verbs is about 150 and they take in the Present Tense of the Indicative and Subjunctive Moods the same terminations as the assonant verbs. The Imperfect Tense of the Indicative Mood in dis- sonant verbs is formed by changing the radical vowel or diphthong. The first and third person Singular * See the Chapter on derived and compound verbs. take no inflexion, the other persons take the same as in the Present tense of the Indicative Mood. The Imperfect tense of the Subjmictive Mood is formed by softening the vowel of the Indicative (a into (t, into d, U into ii), and adding the terminations of tlie Present tense (Subjunct. Mood.) The Imperative Mood takes commonly the same tenni* nations as in the assonant verbs; sometimes also it is formed by changing the radical vowel. The Present Participle is always the same as in the assonant verbs ; but the Perfect Participle terminates in en instead of et and very often undergoes also an altera- tion of the radical vowel. MODEL OF COXJUGATION. Xxxnkn, to drink. Present. Tense. Indicative Mood. Subjunctive Mood. tcf) ix'ml — c, I drink, am drinking, id) trinf — c, (if) I drink, hi tvinf — ft tu trinf — zit cr trinf — t cr trinf — e lr>ir trinf — en \x>\x trinf — en if)r trinf — t \\)X trinf — et fie trinf — en jte trinf — en. Imperfect Tense. id; tranf, I drank, did drink, vas \6,) trdnf — e, (if) I drank. [drinking. tu tran! — j^ bit tranf — c|! cr tranf er tranf — c ir>ir tranf — en irir tranf — en if)r tranf — t if)r trdnf — et fie tranf — en fie trdnf — en. Imperative Mood : trinf — e, drink (thou) ; trinf — ct, drink (jo). Present Participle : trinf — enb, drinking. Perfect Participle : ge — trunf — en, drunk. Observation. The e of the Imperative may be suppressed : tttnf| irinft; lob', lc6t. § 52. The Singular of the Imperative Mood is some- times formed by changing the radical vowel (§ 51), but the Plural always keeps the form of the assonant verbs : gcben, to give; gib, give (thou) ; Qebct, give (ye). 84 Every time the Imperatiye Mood is formed hy clianging the radical vowel, the 2d and 8d Persons of Present Tense, Indicative Mood, undergoes the same change: gcbeit, to give; gib, give (thou); bit gibft, thou givest; er gibt, he gives. Ex.: (Sterben, to die. Present Tense. Indieative Mood. \6,) ftcrb — e, I die. bu ftirB— ft cr ftirb— t iuir ficrB — en iijX fterb— t fte ftcrb — en Subjunctive Mood. [&) fierB — c, (if) I die. bu ftcrB — tcgcn, to weigli frtcren, to freeze ycrlicren; to lose frcr lu'rfcr gcflcgcn gcwogcn gcfroren iHTlorcn bictcn, to offer bet gcboten |ilic()cn, to flee jte^cn, to draw fief) gejicl)en gc^ogen fd)erett, to shear fd}Wdren, to swear faugcn, to suck iiigen, to lie (sjDeak an tintruth) 6ctvugeU/ to deceive 2. fd)lc0en^ to shoot ^ie^cn, to pour gcntc^en, to enjoy fd}lie|cn, to shut ycrbric^en, to grieve jpric^en, to germinate frierfjcn, to crawl rlec^en, to smell triefen, to drip ficbcn, to boil jcc^ten, to fight ficd^ten, to plait, to braid quellen, to spring fd}ir>e((€tt, to swell f aufett, to drink (to animals) fcff Observalion. Most verbs of the first class have { c for their radical vowel. The verb jiel^en changes in the Imperf, Tense and in the Perfect Part, f) into g ; ttiefctt/ ficbcn and faufett double the end-con- sonant of the root, in order to make the o short. SECOND CLASS. The second class comprehends those verhs, which change their radical vowel into i (t short) or into ie (i long). 1. i short ld)ov gcfd)oren fd)ivoc ge djworctt H ge ogen log gclogcu Betrcg fcctrcgen short. fd)o$ gcfd)of|c)t 600 gcgoffcu qcno§ gcnclfcn \dm gcfd}lof|cn Vcrbvcp ycrbroficti fprojj gefproffeit frod) gcfrod)eix rod) gerod)cu trcff gctroffen; fott gcfottcit fo^t gcfod^ten |iod)t gcj!od}tcii quote gcquollcn c^woU gcfd^woUett ) fcff gcfoft'cn. Infinitive. Imperfect. Perfect Part. Vfcifctt, to whistle m gt^^fiffett greifen, to seize flriff gegriffett tnetfen, to pinch fniff gefniffett fd)lcifcn, to grind fc^Ujf 9cfd}ancit fect§en, to bite Big ge&iflen rci^en, to tear rig gertfictt fd)lci0cn, to split Wi^ gefc^liffett jd)mci§en, to throw f^mig gefc^mif)ert gleid^en, to resemble gli^ gcglic^ctt gefd)li^ett fd}lcid)cn, to sneak mi^ ftreid)en, to stroke fkidj gcftrtdjcu ireid)cn; to yield irtd) getiiid;cit glcitcn, to glide g(itt gcglittett rctten, to ride on horsebacL : ritt gerittcn fd)retteii, to stride fc^rtft gefc^rittcK fheiten, to dispute ftritt geftritten Icibcn, to suffer litt gciitten fd)nctbcn, to cut fd}nitt gcjc^nttten 36 2. ic long. Inftrdtivc. Imperfect. Verject Pert. bfctbcn, to stay blt'cb gc'blicljen rcibcn, to rub ricO cjcrtcben |d}reibeTt, to Tvrite |d)ricb gcfcl)ricbcu treibcn, to drive tric& gctrtcben meibcn, to avoid micb gcmicbcn fd}etbcn, to part fd}icb gcfd)lcben ftcfgen, to ascend ftieg gcfticgcn fdjiveigen, to be silent fd^lxneg gcfdjwtegcn Icifjcn, to lend Itel) geitcl)cn jci^en, to accuse jict) gejiefjen gcbei^en, to thrive gcbicT) gebte_^cn fd)emen, to sbine jd}tcn gejc^icneu iDctfen, to show iuieS gcwicfcn Vreifcn, to praise ipticS gcpTtcJen fc^reten, to cry fc^rte gej^ricen fV^eien, to spit fpte gefpieett. Observation. All verbs of tL vowel, those which change it of their root ; except d) and ^» THIRD CLASS. The tliird class compreliends those verbs, which change then- radical vowel in the Imperfect Tense intp a, and in the Perfect Participle into U or © : 1. a and it. Imperfect. e second class have ^ t for their radical into { short double the end-consonant Infinitive. binbcn, to tie fituben, to find fd}it>inbctt, to vanish tr)tnbeTi, to wind bringen, to press gclmgert, to succeed hingen, to sound ringert, to wrestle fd}[mgcn, to sling fd)tDingen, to swing fingen, to sing fprmgen, to spring swingcn, to force ftnfcn, to sink ftinfcn, to stink trinfcrt, to drink brcd^crt, to break fted;crt, to sting fprcd;cii/ to sjK'.ak banb fanb fd)iranb ii^anb brang gclang hang rang fd)lang fc^tDang fang jprang ^\rang fan! ftanf tranf a and 0. Perfect Part. gcbunben gcfunbcn gefd)tr>unbcn gewunJjcu gct)rungen g clung en gcflungcn gerungen gefc^lungcn gcfd)ti3urigen gcfungcn gefpningen gcjwiingen geUinfcn gcftunfctt gctrunfcn brad) fvrad? gcbrcd)cn gcftcd)cn gcjprcd)cn Imperative. brtd) fttd) fprtc^ 37 I)cf[cn, to help ijal] gcljolrcn l)itf f^clten, to be worih qait (^cgoltcn gilt fd^'Uen, to chide fd)a(t geid)oltcn id)ilt ftcxhm, to die ftaxh gcftcrben ftirb iccrbcn, to enlist Waxh gcu^orbcn iinrb Vcvbcr&en, to spoil tcrbavb ycvbcvbcn licrbtrB it^crfen, to throw tiHirf gcirorfcn \inrf bcrqcn, to hide barg gcborgcn birg trcffcrt, to meet traf gotroncn trifi nc(}mcn, to take na()m gcnoinnicu iiimm ftdjkn, to steal \W gcftc(}lcn ftic!)t bcfe{)lcn, to command bcfaf)! 'bc[o()lcn bcftci)f. bcginncn, to begin bcganu bcgonncn rtnnen, to flow rann gcvonncn fpiuncn, to spin fpann gcfponncn [mncn, to meditate fann gd'onncn cjcinmncrt, to gain c^cirann gcwonncu fdjinimmcn, to swim fd^wamm gcfd}irommciu Observation. All verbs of the third class have i or c for their radi- cal vowel ; those which have e change it in the Imperative Mood into 1, and this t is pi*eserved in the second and third persons of the Pre- Bent Tense of the Indicative Mood (ir niuffen iJ)r muft flc mufiett I may- id) barf bu barfft cr barf UMr burfcn \{)x bi'irft fie bfirfen bu fannjl er fann unr fonnen [i)x fount ]k fonnen Hike ic^ mag bu magfi cr mag inir mogen i^r mogt fic mogctt 39 (if) I mvist (if) I may (if) I can id) muffe id) burfc id) fonne fcu muffcfl hn bur[c|1 bu fonnc]! er niu[[e cr burfe er fiinne Wix muffett tntr biirfcn ivir fbnneit ijr muffct il)X biirfct ihx fonnet fie miifien [te burfctt fie fonnen Present T ens e^Sidtj unci. Mood). (if) I like ic^ mogc bu mcgeft er moge h3tr mogett i^r moget fie mogett. Imperfect Tense {lad. Blood). id) mu§te id) burfte id) fonnte id) tiiocl)te. Imperfect Tense (Subj. Mood). id) mu^te id) biirftc id) fcnntc id} modjte. The Imperative Mood is wanting. The Present Participle is regular. Perfect Participle ; gcmu§t; geburft, gcfomtt, gemodjt. 2. SSil'fcu, to know, is conjugated as follows : Present Tense. Indicative Mood. Subjunctive Mood. id) tuctf, I know id) tt3i|je (if) I know bu trei^t bu wi[fcft er tt>eip cr icifje xoix wtffcn wir tntjfcit ifir tni§t if)r tDifjet fie tinffcii fie toiffen. Imperfect Tense. id) XoVi^k, I knew. id) Xdu^it, (iO I knew. Imperative Mood: toiffe, know (thou); triffet, know (ye). Present Part. : toiffenb, knowing. Past Participle : gewu^t, known. 8. Pollen, will, to be willing; follen, shall, ought; are irregular only in the Pres. Tense, Ind. Mood. id) trin, I will fc^ fcf(, I ought bu teiilft bu fodft er tnt(( er foil tinr wcUcn iinr foffen il)r mat i^x foUt fte aoUen fie foHen, The Imperf. Tense of the Subj. Mood is like that oi the Indie. Mood: id) tnollte, I would, (if) I would; id) fodte, I should, (if) I should. 4. -^rtngen, to bring; ben!en, to think; ge^cn, to go; fte^en, to stand, and tf)mt (contraction of tfjuen), to do ; are only irregular in the Imperf. Tense and in tho Perfect Participle : 40 bringcu brad}t^ gcbradjt tcnlcn bad)te gcbad)! gci-icn ging gcgangcn ]\cb,cn ]tant gcftanbeu ti^mx tfjat gctl)mu The verb tijim has in the Present Tense of the Ind. Mood : id) tf)ue, bu tijitft, er tijiit, wiv ttjun, xi]v tl)i\t, fie ti)nn. In the Present Tense Subj. Mood the contraction does not take place : ic^ t1:}m, bu t()ueft, cr tl)itc. 5. ^cin, to be, is conjugated as follows: Present Tense. Indicative Mood. Subjunctive Mood. id) bin, I am [6:) \d, (if) I be bu bift bu fettt cr ift cr fei ivir ftnb \t>ir feicn \i)x fctb ifjr feiet fte finb fte jeien Impcrfec, t Tense. \6.) \oox, I was ic^ iuarc, (if) I were bu toarft bu irareft cr \var cr ware lt>ir t'oarcn irir iriarctt i{)r \r>arct \i)x tndrct [ie warcn fte trdren. Imperative Mood : fei, be (tbou); j [cib, be (3'e). Present Participle : fctcub, , being. Past Participle : gctoefen, been. 6. §abcn, to have J is con^ jugate d thus : Present Tense. Indicative Mood. Subjunctive Mood. \6) fjafcc, I b; are \6:j f)abe, (if) I fea-re bu I) aft bu ^abcft cr I) at ei ^^ht itjir ^abcn teir I)aben t()r ^abt i^r Ijabct ftc f)aben fte {)aben. Imperfect Tense, id) Ijvrtte, I had i^ ptte, (if) I had. The Imperative Mood and the two Participles are irregular. 7. 29cvben, to be, to become, is conjugated thus: Present Tense. Indicative Mood. Subjunctive Mood. id) Werbc, I become id)\ncrbc, (if) I become bu \inrft bu \i?crbcft cr \invb cr \x>crbc 41 \mx toerbcn \xiix tocrbcn ii}v toerbet il)x tuerbct fie tt)crbcn fie iiDcrbcn. Imperfect Tense. id) knirbc, I became. \6.) ti^urbc, (if) I became. The Imperative Mood and Present Part, are regular, tlie Past Par. ticiple is geWovbctt, become, and \uorbctt, been. In order to facilitate tlie researches, Vfe have added at the end of this part of the Grammar, an alphabetical list of the Imperfect and Present Tenses, the Imperative Moods and Past Participles of the dissonant and ir- regular verbs, indicating also the Infinitives to -which these Tenses belong. 5. OF THE FORIMATIO^ OF THE COMPOUND TENSES. § 56. The Germans have three auxiliary verbs; fein, to be; l)abcn, to have; iDcrben, to become, shall or wilL The verb feiu serves to form the Perfect Tenses of most neuter verbs; Ijakn to form those of the active and reflected verbs ; and iperben serves to form the Future tenses and the Conditional Mood* of all verbs without distinction. Ex.: 1. 2^rlu!cn, to drink. Perfect Tense. Iml. Mood. Subj. Mood. 3c() I)a"be gctrunfcn, I liave drunk. id) IiaBc cjctrunfcn, (if) I have drunk, bu I)aft gdrunfcn, k. bu Ijabcft getrunfcn, jc. Pluperfect Tense, id) Tjcittc getrunfcn, I had drunk. id) 'i^atk getrunfcn, (if) I had drunk. tu l)atk\t getrunfcn, k. H fjiittcft getrunfcn, jc. First Future Tense. id) ircrbc trinfen, I shall or will id) trerbc trmfen, (if) I shall or will drink. drink, bu \vix]t trinfen, k. bu ivierbefl trinfen, )c. Second Future Tense, id) 'lucrbc getrunfcn IjaBcn, I shall id) ^erbc getrunfcn tjaben, (if) I shall or will have drunk. or wili have drunk, bu \vix\i getrunfcn J^abcn, jc. bu ivcrbcft getrunfcn IiaBcn, k. * The Conditional Mood is, properly speaking, only another way of expressing the Imperfect and Pluperfect Tenses of -the Subjunct. Mood; inasmuch as it is quite the same if we say: id) l^atte or \di r^iivbc f)aKm; id) fiatte gcfjabt, or id) rourbc gcf)al't (jabcn. 42 First Conditional Tense. icf) luurbc tvinfcn, I should or would drink, ba lijurbcft trinfen jc. Second Conditional Tense. id) ft>urbc gctrunfen ^a&cn, I should or would have drunk.- bu iriirbcft gctrunfen Ijaben, :c. 2. ^ommen, to come. Perfect Tense. Indie. Mood. Subj. Mood. ?d) bin gcTommcn, I am come. ic^ fci gefommcn, (if) I be come, bu bift gefommcn, k. bu feift gefommen, k. Pluperfect Tense. [^) timr gcfommen, I was come. t^ tnare gefommcn, (if; I were come. bu warft gefommcn, jc. bu lodrcft gefommcn, k. First Future Tense, id) tDcrbe fommcn, I shall or will ic^ it>erbe fommen, (if) I shall oi come. will come, bu lohft fommen, k. bu tocrbefl fommcn, jc. Second Future Tense, id) toctbc gefommcn fein, I shall or id) trcrbe gefommcn fcin, (if) I shall Avill be come. or will be come, bu itjirft gefommcn fein, ic. bu Vocrbejl: gefommcn fein, ic First Conditional Tense, id) tinVcbe fommen, I should or would come, bu ioiivbeft fommen, }c. Second Conditional Tense, id) tourbc gefommcn fetn, I should or would be come, bu toiirbcft gefommen fein, jc. By the two preceding models we see : 1. That the Perfect Tense is composed of the Present Tense of f)aben or fein and of the Perfect Part, of the verb ; 2. That the Pluperfect Tense is composed of the Imperfect Tense of ()abcn or fein and of the Perfect Participle of the verb ; 3. That the first Future Tense is composed of the Present Tense of toerben, and of the Present of the Infinitive of the verb ; 4. That the second Future Tense is composed of the Present Tense of lr»erben and the Perfect of the Infinitive of the verb ; 5. That the first Conditional Tense is formed of the Imperfect Tense, Subj. Mood, of Uicrben and the Present of the Infinitive of the verb; 43 6. That the second Conditional Tense is formed oi the same Tense of iDcrben, and of the Perfect of the Infinitive of the verb. § 57. As to the formation of the composed Tenses of the auxiliary verbs, ^abm and fein form their Perfect Tenses of themselves, and iperben forms them by the auxilir.ry fein. Ex.: 1. §aben, to have. Perfect Tense. 3cf} IjaBc get)abt, I have had ; id) I;abc Qd)aht, (if; I have had. Pluperfect Tense. id) T)vittc gct)abt, I had had ; \6:) ^dtte yel^abt, (if) I had had. 2. ^ein, to be. Perfect Tense. Set) ¥m gcircfett, I have been; i&) fct gcwefen, (if) I have been. Pluperfect Tense. tci) tear getucfeit; I had been ; ict) irarc gcttsefen, (if) I had been. 3. SSerbett, to become. Perfect Tense. Sd) Bin getootben, I have become ;* id; fct geirorbeit; (if) I have become. Pluperfect Tense. id) trar getrotben, I had become ; id) t»dre gctccrben, (if) I had become. The two Future and the two Conditional Tenses are formed like those of the other verbs by the auxiliary inerbcn. Ex. : First Future Tense. Second Future Tense. 3(^ teerbe l^a&en, I shall have ; id) toerbe ge{)abt Ijaben, I shall have had; ic^ trcrbe fein, I shall be ; id) if erbe gc\t)c[en fein, I shall have been ; l^ ircvbe ircrbcn, I shall become ; id) incrbe gcirotbcn fcin, I shall have become. * Instead of gctrovben we say simply toorben, when the verb Werben 'b constructed "with an other verb and only has the function of aK auxiliary 44 First Conditional Tense. Second CcndiLiond Tense. Id) \TJurbe l^aBcii; I should have ; icf) tuurbe gcljabt IjaBcn, I should have had ; id) it'iirbe \d\\, I should be ; ic^ twurt'e gcvocjcn fcin, I should have been ; \d) itifirbc ii?crbcn, I should become i(^ wiirbe gewotbcn [cin, I should have become. § 58. Besides the verbs Ijakn, fern and iDerben, the Germans employ also, like the English, iPoUcn, will ; Ia[]"en, let; mogen, may; foKen, shall, and mitffen, must, as auxiliary verbs, in order to express different respects ol Moods and Tenses. £a^t im§ gel)en, let us go ; \t)ir ivoUcn gcl)en, we Avill go ; bu foHft fterben, thou shalt die ; bit mu^t fterben, thou must die ; ic^ tnunfd)e, ba§ cr c§ CT^alten moge, I wish that he may receive it : mcge cv gliicfiic^ anlonnncn, may he arrive safely. § 59. Conjugate the following verbs in all cheir Moods and Tenses : Assonant. Dissonant. 3a'[)Ien, to pay leibeit, to suffer Icben, to live fwgcn, to sing faiifen, to buy Voerfcn, to throw arbciten, to work fa((cn, to fall Icrncn, to learn fcmmen, to come. 6. OF THE C02syUGATI0X OF PASSIVE VERBS. § 60. Transitive verbs have two forms: the active form and the passive form. If is in the active form, when the subject does the action which the Verb ex- presses, it is in the passive form when the subject suffers the action expressed by the verb. In the sentences: id) liebe, I love, and ici) inerbe geltebt, I am loved, the verb (iebeu is presented in those two forms. § CI. We have already in the preceding paragraphs shown the conjugation of the active form of verbs; it is therefore only left to represent their passive form. The verb in the passive voice has but composed Tenses, which are all formed by means of the auxiliary Uicrbcn, and the Perfect Part, of the verb. 45 MODE OF THE C0XJUGATI0:N^ OF A PASSIVE VERB. ©clicbt li3erbcn, to be loved. Present Tcme. Indicative Mocd. Saojunctivc Mood. 3d) tvcrbc gcliebt, I am loved ; id) Wcrbc gclicfct, (if) I be loTod ; tu \mx]t Qdkht bii ttcrbcft c^dkht cr wixh geltebt cr ^vcrbc gcUcbt roir WcxUn gcHcBt iinr tijerbcn gelteBt i()r inerbet gdtebt il)r inerbct gelicb.t fie rocrben gcltcbt fte Werbcn geltebt. Imperfect Tense, id) tourbe gclicbt, I T»'as loved ; id) mirbe gcltcbt, (if) I were loved bu \rurbeft geltcbt bu iriiTbeft gcltcbt cr iviurbe gcltcbt ' er inurbe gcltcbt MUX iijiirben gcltcbt Wix tcurbcu gcltcbt il)r tmirbct gcltcbt ii)x xonxtd gclicbt fie ixnirbcn gclicbt. fie i\)itvbcn gcltcbt. Perfect Tense, id) bin gclicbt ti^crbcn, I have been id:) fci gclicbt irovbcn, (if; I hove loved ; been loved ; bu bift gclicbt tnovben bu fcift gclicbt irorbcn cv i]t gclicbt tvorbcn cr fci gclicbt irorbcn wix ftub gclicbt ircfbcn inir feien gclicbt worbcn il)r fcib gclicbt \rcrbcu il}r feict gclicbt \t»orbcu fie finb gclicbt u^crbcn. fie fcicn gclicbt ivorben. Pluperfect Tense, id) Wax gclicbt ii:crbcn, I had been id) ir»are gclicbt ii^crbcn, (if) I had loved ; been loved ; bu \t»arft gclicbt irorbcn bu Wdrcfi gclicbt tt»Drbcn cr Wax gclicbt irorben cr indrc gclicbt tt»orbcn Wix waxm gclicbt inorbcn wix waxen geliebt lijorben it)r iraret gclicbt tvorbcn i^r Waxd gclicbt \t*crbcn fie iDarcn gclicbt ircrbcu. fie Waxen geliebt irorbcu. First Future Tense, id) \vctbe gclicbt iucrbcn, I shall be id) tocrbc gclicbt ti^crbcn, (if) I slinD loved ; be loved ; bu ^itirft gclicbt h^erbcn bu tecrbeft gclicbt tocrbcn cr \t»irb gclicbt trcrbcn er Werbe geliebt werben Wix wcrbcn gclicbt irerbcn Wix K»erben geliebt tncrbcn il)r ircrbet geliebt wcrbcu ii)x tyerbet geliebt luerben \ic wcxicn gclicbt ii^cvbcn. fie ir>erben geliebt irerbcn. ^Second Future Tense. id} ivcrbe geliebt ircrbcnfciu, I shall id) WcxH gclicbt ircrbeu fcin, (if) I have been loved ; shall have been loved , fcu iinrft gclicbt ircrben fcin bu \i3crbcft gclicbt ^rcrbcn jcin er wivb gclicbt tvcrbcn jcin er ircrbe gclicbt rocvbcn fcin 46 mx \vcrbctt gcIicBt k^orbcn fciu Wix hjcrbcn gcticBt ircvben fcitt ii}x tvcrbet gclicbt lijcrben ^cin iijx ft^erbet gcliebt tt»orben fein fie \rcrbcu gdtcbt iijcrbcn jcin. ftc ircrbcn gclicbt tx^orben fcin. Conditional Mood, First Tense. Second Tense. id) iin"irbe geliebt toerben, I should id) Wiixht gclicbt toorben fein, I should be loved ; have been loved ; bii iriirbeft gclicbt tncrben bu ttJiirbejl gclicbt tttorben \dn er iviirbe gclicbt tnerbcn er tniirbc gclicbt tcorben fein tnir wiirbcn gcliebt tTocrbeu Wix voiixbcn gclicbt worben fcin ibr wiirbct gclicbt tnerbcn il^r tourbet gcliebt ttJotben fein jtc it)iirbcn gclicbt iverbcn. fie iviivbcn gclicbt tvorbcn fcin. Imperative Mood. ircrbe gclicbt, be (thou) loved. la:crbct gcliebt, be (ye) loved. Participles. Present : getiebt toerbenb, being loved. Perfect : gcliebt ioorbcn, been loved. 7. OF REFLECTIVE VERBS. § 62. Yv^hen a transitive verb expresses an action which falls back directly or indirectly upon the person who performs it, we call it a reflective verh. The re- flective verbs like the transitive verbs take fiaben for their auxiliary and the second pronoun, -which is the Accusative of the first, is placed now before and now after the verb. COXJUGATIO]^ OF THE REFLECTIVE VERB. (Sicfj freuen, to rejoice. Present Tense. Indie. Mood. Subj. Mood, ^d) freue mid}, I rejoice. id) frcitc ntid^, (if) I rejoice, bu freiift tid) bu frcucfi bid) er freut fid) er freue jtd) Wix freucn mi§ iuir freuen iins ibr frcut znd^ ibr freuct euc^ fie freucn fid). fie fi-eucn jid). Imperfect Tense, id) freute mid), I rejoiced. id) freutc mid), (if) I rejoiced. tu freuteft tid) bu frcutcft hid) er freute fid) er freute ^id) )X)ix freuten una \m frcuten un§ ii)X frcutet end) il)r freutct eud) fic frcuten fid). fie frcuten fid). 47 Perfect Tense. Indie. Mood. Subj. Mood. id) I)afce mid) gcfvcut, I have re- kl) f)aBe mid) cjcfrcut, (if) I bavo joiced ; rejoiced; bu Ijaft V\6) (^cfrcut bu Iiabcfi bid) gcfreut cr i)at fid) gefreut cr i)K\hz fid) gcfreut linr l)abcn iing gcfreut ivir f)abcu uu§ gefreut i()r t)abt cud) gefreut ij)r ^abct cud) gefreut ftc ()vibcn fid) gefreut. fie I)abeu fid) gefreut. Pluperfect Tense. id) I)attc mid) gefreut, I had re- joiced ; bu t)atteft Vi6:j gcfreut cr f)atte ftc^ gcfreut iinr Ijattcu ung gefreut i(}r Ijattet cud) gcfreut fie I)attcn fid) gefreut. id) l^atte mid) gefreut, (if) I had rejoiced ; bu ()dttcft bid) gcfreut cr ()dtte fid) gefreut \x>ir t)dtten \m^ gefreut il)r l)dttet cud) gcfreut fie f)dtten fid) gcfreut. Wcj trterbc mid) frcuen, I shall re- joice; \:\x \riirft 'ii'i^) freucit cr wirb fid) freucn unr trcrbeu un§ freucn if)r trerbet cud) freucn fie tverbcn fid) freucn. First Future Tense. \6) toerbc mid) freucn, (if) I sIibU rejoice; bu tocrbcft bid) freucn cr tt»crbc fid) freucn iinr tnerben un§ freucn il)r werbet cud) freucn fie tccrben fid) freucn. Second Future Tense. id) tverbe mid) gcfreut I)aBen, I shall \6:} ircrbc mic§ gefreut :^aBcn, (if) I have rejoiced ; shall have rejoiced ; W \o\x\t bid) gcfreut :^aBctt bu tocrbcll bid) gefreut ()vrben cr tvirb fi(^ gcfreut i)aben cr trerbe fid) gefreut t)abcn trir werben un§ gcfreut f)aBen nnr ttjcrbcn ung gefreut ()aBcn if>r werbct cuci) gefreut t)abctt i^r n?erbct cuc^ gcfreut ()abcn fie n^erbcn fid) gefreut t)abcn. fie tocrben fid) gefreut f)abcn. Conditional Mood. First Tense. d) toiirbe mid) freucn, I should re- joice ; bu ttturbci"} bid) fi-cucn cr nn'irbe fid) freucn irir nuirbcn ung freucn il)r nnirbct cud) freucn ^e \uurbcn fi^ freucn. Second Tense. [^ iriirbc mid) gcfreut r)aBcn , siiould have rejoiced ; bu tourbeil bic^ 0efrcut ^aBen er tnurbe fid) ge|reut \)o!btxi Xo'ix wiirben un§ gcfreut I)aBen i{)r tniirbet euc^ gefreut ^abcn fie tr»iirben fid) gefreut I)a&cn. Imperative Mood. freue bid), rejoice (thou), frcuen tuir ung, let us rejoice, frcuct cud), rejoice (ye). 48 Participles. fid) [rcucnb, rejoicing. fid} gcfreut fjabcrt, liaving rejoiced. Conjugate in this manner: fid; be!lagcn, to complain. § 63. There are some reflective verbs, whose second pronouns are in the Dative, as fid) fdjincidjclit, to flatter one's self. Ex.: [6.) fd)metd)Ic mix, I flatter myself; bu jd)mct^elft bir cr 1d)metd)clt fid) ivir fd)mei(^cln mts il)r fd}mcic^elt cud) fie fd}mcid}eln fid). 8. OF IMPERSONAL VERBS. ^ 6-i. Impersonal verbs are those, which can only be used in the third person Singular and with the neuter pronoun c§, it. Their composed Tenses are formed by means of the auxiliary Ijaben. Ex. : Indie. Mood. Siibj. Mood. Pres. T. c§ rcgnet, it rains ; eS rcgne, (if) it rain ; Imp. T. e§ rcgnete, it did rain; c§ regnetc, (if) it rained ; Perf. T. c§ ^at gercgnct, it lias eg t)aht gcrcgnet, (if) it have been been raining ; raining ; Plnp. T. c§ I)attegcregnct, itliad cS I)dtte gcregnct, (if) it had been been raining ; raining ; 1st Fut. T. eg toirb rcgncn, it will c§ ii:tcrbe regncn, (if) it will rain ; rain ; 2d Fut. T. c§ trirb gcrcgnet I^aBcn, e5 ii^erbe gcrcgnet '^aBcn, (if) it will it will have been raining. have been raining. 1st Cond. T. c§ tourbe regncn, it would rain ; 2d Cond. T. e§ ttiiirbe gcrcgnet ^abcn, it would liave been raining ; Imperat. T. eg rcgne, may it rain ; Perfect Part, gcrcgnet, rained. § 64. There are verbs which are impersonal by their nature, as : rcgncn, to rain. fdjncicn, to snow, bcnncrn, to thunder. nebcin, to be fogg3^ blit^cn, to lighten. ^agcln, to hail. There are also others, which are employed imperso- nally but in certain ways of speaking : 49 gcben, to give ; c§ giBt, there is, there are ; Ca ^vib, there was there were, fcin, to be ; c§- i]t, it is, there is ; c§ l\t Warm, it is warm ; cS toat fa[t, it was cold. Some verbs are employed impersonally in German, "nliicli are not in English: t§ tft mix hjarm, I am warm. c§ ijl inir licb, I am glad. e§ friert mid), I am cold. c5 tl;Ut mir Icib, I am sorry. c§ id}ldfcrt mi(^, I am sleepy. cS frciit mid), I am glad, mid) t)ungert, I am hungry."* cS wunbert mid), I am astonished, mid) buritct, I am thirsty. mir tiJtib iibel, I feel sick, mir i\t bange, I am afraid. cS rcut mif^, I repent. eS gclingt mir, I succeed. All these verbs can express the three persons of Plu- ral as vrell as of the Singular. Ex. : c§ frciit mid), I am glad. c§ gclingt mir, I succeed. c§ frcut bid), thou art glad. eS gelingt bir. c§ frciit i()n, he is glad. e§ gelingt if)m. c§ frcut un§, we are glad. e§ gclingt un§. c§ frcut cuc^, you are glad. eS gclingt cud). c§ frcut fie, they are glad. c§ gclingt if)ncn. 9. OF COMPOUND YEEBS. § 66. A simple verb becomes a compound one by the addition of certain particles vrhich are joined to it and precede it. There are two kinds of compound verbs : 1. Those, the joined particle of which remains always attached to them in all Tenses and Moods : these verbs form their Perfect Participle without adding the syllable g e, and are called inseparccble verhs. 2. Those whose particle is not always joined to the verb, but is detached from it in certain Tenses : those ones are called separable verls. § 57. Inseparable verbs are those , whose accent rests on the verb and not on the particle. There are but very few of them, and they begin either by the prepositions Ijinter and roiber, or by the adverbs off en and DO 11. Ex. : * "When an impersonal verb is constructed with a personal pronoun, llie word e § ma}^ be omitted. 50 iuibctj)3red)ett, to contradict; id) tctbcr[prcd)c, id) f)a6c iinbevi^n'ocf)en ; Ijintcrbringcn, to inform; id) f)mtcrbringe, id) t)abc ^interbvad}!; vodcnben, to complete ; id) yoKcnbe, id) I)abc t?cUcnbct ; cft'enbaren, to reveal ; id) offcnbarc, id) f)abc cjfcnbart. The compound verhs must not be confounded with the derived verhs j the latter are formed of a verb and a prefixed syllable, that is never detached from •t. Ex.: ad)ten, to esteem; i5evad)tett, to despise; id!) i?evad}te, I despise; fagcrt, to say ; cntfagcn, to renounce ; id) entjagc, I renounce. § 69. Separable verbs are those, whose accent resta on the particle and not on the verb. Their number is very great, and they begin either by one of the prepo- sitions ab, an, auf, au§, bet, ein, mit, nad}, bor, gu, or by one of the adverbs bar, fort, Ineg, l^in, fe^l, Io§, and nteber, Ex.: abfc^rcibcn, to copy. l^ctllenen, to represent, anfangen, to begin. gufc^reiben, to ascribe. aufftet)en, to get up. barbicten, to offer, auslcgen, to explain. fcrtid}ttfen; to send away, beifiigen, to add. ~ it)cgge^en, to go away. einfiil)rctt, to introduce. fef)lid)lagett; to fail, mittljeilcn, to communicate, loioma^en, to detach. nac^fe()en, to revise. niebertDerfen, to throw down. § 69. The compound verbs, which are formed by the prepositions burd), f)tntcr, it&er, um, itnter, are sometimes separable, sometimes inseparable, according to their hav- ing the accent on the verb or on the particle. Ex. : iiber j e | c tt , to translate ; t^ uber[e|e, t^ 'ijO^^ uberfe^t ; uberfe^ctt, to cross (a river); id) fe^e uber, id) f|abe ubergefe^t. Practice only can make up this rule. CONJUGATIOjS^ of a compound separable VEPvB. ^bfdireiben, to copy. Present Tense. Indie. Mood. Suhj. Mood. 3d) fd)reibe a^, I copy ; id) f^reibe cA, (if) I copy; bu fd)rcibfl ab bu fd)Tcibeft ab er fd)rctbt al er fd)reibe ah inir fd)reiben ah \X)ix fc^rcibcn ab il)r fd)rcibt ah i\)x fd)reibct ah jte fd)rcibcn ab. fiic j^veiben ab. Impeifcct Tense, id) \d)XKh ah, I copied id) |d)t{cbc ah, (if) T copied bu jdjriebft ab, u. bu jd;ricbcfl ah, k. 61 Perfect and Pluperfect Tenses. i^ ijab^ a6gci'd)ricBen, I have co- id) fjaBe abgefc^xicBcn, (if) I have pied; copied; id) ^attc a&gcfc^rieBert, I liad co- ^ id) tjatte at^gcfc^rtcBcn, (if) I liad pied. ' copied. First d?id Second Future Tenses. id) Wcxhc ab\d)xd^cn, I shall copy ; id) tt»crbe at)fc^rct6eu, (if) I shall copy; id) rtierbe aBaefdjricBcn I)a&cn, I shall ic^ it*crbe a6gcfd)rtcBen IjaBcn, (if) have co]3ied. I shall have copied. First and Second Conditional Tenses. j(^ tourbe a6fd}reiben, I should id) tt)urbe abgef^rtcDen I;a6cn, I copy. should have copied. Imperative Mood. f(^retBe aB, copy (thou) ; Ia§t un§ aBl"d)rciBcn, let us copy ; fc^reiBt aB, copy (ye). Participles. aBi'djrciBenb, copying ; aBgefdjrteBcn, copied. If tlie compound verb is reflective, tlie particle ts always placed at the end. Ex»: fic^ CtnBilbctt, to imagine. Present Tense. id) Btlbc Tinr citt, I imagine ; bu Bilbeft bir etn cr Btlbet fid) dn ioir Bilbcn unS cin il)r Bilbct eud) d\\ ftc Bilbcn jtd) ein. CHAPTER YIII. OF PEE POSITIONS. § 70. The prepositions are invariable words which are placed before the nouns or pronouns in order to express the relations which would not be sufficiently pointed out by the cases. They are : 1. Either primitive words, as an, at, to; auf, upon in, in; fiir, for; mit, with; 2. Or derived or compound words, as aiif^er, out of; ^\in[djcn, between; obei1)a(b, above; anftatt, instead of ; 52 8. Or words taken from otlier parts of speech, like fraft, by virtue of; tvoi^, notwithstanding; giifolcje, in con- sequence of. § 71. Nouns or pronouns, whose relations are defined by a preposition, are always placed either in the Geni- tive, or in the Dative, or in the Accusative. Some prepo- sitions govern but one case, others govern two, according to the kind of relation we wish to express. 1.^ rREPOSITIOXS GOYERXIXG THE GENITIVE. llnirctt, ii?ar)rmb/ minds, lxa\t, laut, i^ermcge, inncrf)alb, aii^tx'^alb, cbcrf)a(b, unkxi)alb, btesfeit, jenfeit, lt)dben, wcqm, imgea^tet, ftatt. UnVocit, not far from : iimrett beg (Sd)lo[[c§, not far from the castle ; untt?ett bcr Stabt, not far from the town. SBafircnb, during : irdl)renb be§ (Summery, during the summer ; "Kcily^ rcnb bcr d'lad}i, during the night. 2}iittcl§, mittdit or tJermittelf^, by means of: mfttel^ 3f}rc§ S^ciftanbcS, 3f)rer «§ilte, by means of your assistance. 5;ra[t or t»ermcge, by virtue of: fraft hc§ ®c[c|c§, b}- virtue of the la^v ; l^crmcgc feineS ^c\d)l§, by virtue of his order. £aut, according to : laut metnc^ ^c]kx ^tatt, in my sister's stead. ^ 53 There are three more prepositions, which govern tho Genitive or Dative indiscriminately; lang^, along; y.u fotge, in consequense of, and trol^, in spite of: laiuy$ bcm glu[fe or lancjg be§ g(u[fe§, along the river ; 3ufoIge be^ ^ertrage^ or 3ufoIge bcm S^crtrage, in consequence of the treaty; tro^ fetnen SSorftellimcjen or trolj fctuer ^orftdlim* gen, in spite of his remonstrances. 2. PREPOSITIONS GOVERNING THE DATIVE. Wlit, iteBf!, fammt, bet, feit, 'oon, nad), auSf au^er, ju, jmnibcv, entgegen, gegenubev^ 2)tit, with : er ifi mii metnem Sniber angc!ciumcn, he is arrived with my brother ; id) getjC mit bir, I go with thee. 91c6jl or fammt, with, together with : er, neBf! fciner (Hd)it»cf}cr, he and his sister ; tie 3}2utter neBj^ or fammt i()rcn ^inbern, the mother with her children. S^d, near, at, with : er ittar Bci mir, he was with me, at my house ; t>ei ten 3tomcrn, with the Romans ; Bei S3ertin, near Berhn, Sett, since : feit fctner 3uruc!funft, since his arrival ; \dt gtwci Saljreu, for two years ; feitbem, since then. SBon, of, from : id) ^abe c§ ijoit bcm ©rofcn cxi)cdkn, I have received it from the count ; dw Jtinb t)On bret 3af>ren, a child of three years ; id) fomme i?Ott S3ertin, I come from Berlin. dlad), after, to, according to : er fant nad) mix, he came after me ; wad) bem ^]\cn, after dinner ; nad) bent ®efe|e, according to law ; id) ge^c nad) Berlin, I go to Berlin. 9(it§, ont of, from : iinr fcntmcn axis bcr '^d)uU, we come from schorjJ , au§ bem 'Bd)xanU nef^men, to take out of the cupboard ; aul aVi.m £rd[ten, with all (one's) power. ?(uf er, out of, besides : cr ino^nt auf er ber ^taht, he lives out of town ; id) :^abe feinen ^Teunb aufer S^nen, I have no other friend but you. 3n, to, at : ^ommen ^te ju mtr, come to me ; fe^en iel Uf)r ? at what o'clock? unt funf \\i)x, urn 2}t{ttema^t, at five o'clock, at midnight ; urn bie 3eit ber S'ntbte, at harvest-time. Df)nc, fonber, without : tc^ fann ttic^t leBcn o'^ne bic^, I cannot live without you ; toaS ifi bag £ekn c6ne einen STeunb ? what is life without a friend ? (Bonbcr is no more used except in poetry ; fonber 3tueifel, fonber ^u^e, without doubt, without trouble. ©egcn, iriber, to, towards, against : bie ^j!id)tett aegen bie ©Item, the duties towards parents ; nttlbtf)at{g gegen hk mmen, charitable to the poor ; gegen Slbcnb, towards evening ; iviber hk 2)iauer, against the wall ; iciber hk ®efe|e, against the laws. 4. PREPOSITIONS GOVERNING THE DATIVE AND ACCU SATIVE. 5(n, auf, in, iibcr, iinter, tior, ij'mtcx, nefeen, ^ttiifc^en. These prepositions govern the Accusative, when the verb of the sentence denotes either a movement or a direction towards an object, and the Dative, when it does not denote this movement. S(n, at, on : with the Dative : tx ^d)t an ber X^ux, he stands at the door ; biefe (£tabt licgt ant 9lf)ein, this town is situated on the Rhine ; an bir 'i^ab^ id) einen ^eunb, in thee I have a friend. With (he Accusative : fe^e ben 2!o^f an bas ^euer, put the pot by the fire; id) bacf)te an bicj), I thought of thee ; er iijenbcte fxd) an ben ^onig, he addressed laimself to the king. §(uf, on, upon : uith the Dative : fie fl|t auf bent ^tuX)U, she is sitting on the chair ; ba§ ^nd) licgt auf bent %i\d)C, the book lies on the table ; tneitt S3ruber i]t auf ber Sagb, my brother is out hunting. With the Accusative: fc^cn (£ie fid) auf biefen <£tuf)t, sit down upon this chair; legcn (£te bag ^nd) auf bcnZi'\d), put the book on the table ; irir gcf)cu I)cute auf btc 3agb, we go out hunting to-day. 55 SU/ in, into; with the Dative: ev \V)oI}nt ill bcv (italjt, lie lives in the town ; er iuo^nt \\x bcr 3Jtittc fcincr ilinbcr, be lives surrounded by his children ; fie \\i 110^ im S3ctte, she is still in bed. With the Accusative: icf) gcf)e in bte (£d)u[e, in ben ©arten, I go to school, into the garden; t)Ci§, ^inb fid in 'im %[\i^, the child fell into the river; cr jagte CS mix in'g £)f)r, he whispered it into my ear. HcBer, above, over; with the Dative. baS ©cmaibe pngt iibcr be? 1i)iir, ubcr bcm Spiegel, the picture hangs above the door, above the window ; ubcr mix tt>Df)nt ein ^unftlcr, an artist lives above me. With the Accusative: l^dngcn (Sie ben iiafig xiber bie 3;^f)iir; hang the cage over the door; xoix gcl)en iiber btefe ©riic!e, we shall pass this bridge ; bic (S()re gel)t iiber "iim 9leid)tl)um, honor is better than riches. Untet; under, beneath, among; with the Dative: mttcr bent %i\d)t Itegctt, to lie under the table ; [)mxi I){ntev ber ^ird)e, Ave live behind the church ; er fam fjinter mir, he came after me. With the Accusative: er ftcllt ficf) Winter bie %i)\ix, !f)intcr mid), he places himself behind the door, behind me. DieBen, by the side of; icith the Dative: er \a^ ncBcit mir, neBcn meiner ijd)ctt bie ^tx^m S'il'd^c, he put the chair between the two tables ; ber D^ing ftel j\\)ifd}en bie ©teine, the ring dropt among the stones. § 72. Frequently tlie prepositions are united in one >Yord -witli the Dative or Accusative of the Article Ex.: am instead of Oin bem vcm instead of ijon bem ans — — an ba§ fiirS — — fiir bag §um — — ju bcm Beim — ■ — 6ei bcm jur — — ju bcr bnrdi§ — — burd) "^o.^^. 56 CHAPTER IX. OF ADYEIIBS. ^ 73. The -Adverbs are divided into three principal classes; Adverbs oi^lace, oitime, and Oii quality. 1. ADVERBS OF PLACE. SBC/ where %hx, here \)Qi, tcrt, there \uett, fern, far nal)C, near _ {^inteit; behind torn, before obett, above unten, below irgcnbltJO, anywhere, somewhere nirgenbwo, nowhere liBerad, everywhere jurucf, backward »orwdrtg, forward feitwdrtS, sideways rucftx)drt0, backwards linfS, on the left vect;t§, on the right, (fee. 2. ADVERBS OF TIME. 5ffiann, when ^cute, to-day morgcn, to-morrow ubermorgen, the day after to- morrow geftertt, yesterday Dorgcftern, the day before yester- day ]c|t, now eI)emaU, formerly bamalS, then, at the time eft, often nie, never ^mreilcn, sometimes tmmer, always gusor, before fci}on, already , friif}, early fpdt, late gleid;, foglcic^, directly^ orauf, upon which Vriomit, wherewith lr>orau§, out of which Iroran, wherefrom it)orm, in which '^o^u, for what tcobci, whereby \\3onad), after which.t § 75. Some adverbs, and especially adjectives used adverbially, are susceptible of being compared, and form their degrees of comparison in the same manner as the adjectives : jpdt, late :, f^ater, later ; f*?atej^, latest ; oft, often ; c\kx, oftener ; c[teft, oftenest. The simple form of the Superlative in eft is little used ; we more frequently have recourse to circumlocu- tions, in which the adverb is replaced by the neuter of the adjective, preceded by the prepositions an or auf Ex.: * The primitive form of ba is bar, and is used every time w^hen, in the formation of these words, two vowels meet. t "When it>0 is combined with a word beginning by a vowel, an X is inserted, to avoid the hiatus. 58 am [pStcftcn, latest ; am oftcftcn, oftenest ; auf has gcnauefle, most minntely ; auf has gcfdjlinubcfte, most quickly. The Superlative sometimes also takes the ending cn^, Ex.: \xui}cftm§, at the soonest; i)bd)ftcn§, at tilt most. The following adverbs form their degrees of compari- son irregularly: gut, well ; bcfjer, better ; am Bejleit, best , K)id, much ; mef)r, more ; am meiften, most ; bath, soon ; eljer, sooner ; am efjeften, soonest ; Qixn, Avillingly ; Itcber, more willingly ; am liebften, most -willingly. CHAPTER X. OF CONJUNCTIONS. § 76. The following is a list of the principal con- junctions. 1. SIMPLE CONJUNCTIONS. Unb, and ; cber, or; aber, aftem; but ; lonbcrU; but (after a negation) ; a(§, when, than ; benn, for ; ha, as ; ivcii, because ; it»enn, when, if; oB, if, whether; Vt)ann, when ; bann, then • ba§, that ; bocf), yet ; €l)e, before ; aifO/ thus, consequently. 2. COMPOUND CONJUNCTIONS. S)amtt, auf ba^, in order that ; obcjleic^, obfd)on, although ; uad}bem, after; inbem, while ; mitfjin, consequently ; cntWebcr. . .ober, either. iDcber. . .nod), neither.., fowo^t. . .alS, as well. . , tr>ie. . -fo, as. . .as ; je.. .befto, the., .the. The conjunctions are followed now by the Subjunctive and now by the Indicative Mood ; some of them change the construction of the sentence, others do not change it (See the following Chapters.) 59 CHAPTER XL OF THE USE OF THE MOODS. 1. INDICATIVE MOOD. § 77. The Germans generally employ the Indicativ Mood, where in English, for the sake of brevity, the Infinitive and Present participle are used. Ex.: Set) glaube, t>af ev mx rcd}t[d}af|cner I believe him to be an honest 2Jtann i\t. man. SStr ^aben immcr gcfim^cn; fcafj er We have ever foimd him to speak bte 9BaI)rf)cit fprarf). the truth. 3(^ tt»ei§ nid)t, toa§ id) t'^un foil. I do not know what to do. Semanb, J^er in Scutfc^knb rcijle, Some one, travelling in Germany, fanb found 5Bcil id) nidjt xdd) bin, ^cibe id^ ISTot being rich, I have no friends feine §^cunbc. ScJ) iiah^ c§ gejcf)cn, al§ id} !ocrbci= I saw it in passing. ^an madjt ftc^ oft Ser'^aft, inbem Vf e often make ourselves hated by man Me SSatjrficit fagt. speaking the truth. (It will be remarked, that sentences of this kind are formed by circumscribing the English and adding either a relative pronoun, or one of the conjunctions, baj, ba, wcit, al§, iubem, ipenn.) SBcnn man lange franf gc^refen ij!, After having been ill for a long fu^It man ben SScrt^ ter ©ejunbs time, we feel the value of health i)cit befto me^r. the more. @[)e man rebct, mug man fcenfcn. Before speaking, you must think. Sometimes the Imperative is replaced by the Indica- tive Mood. Ex. : Subletbjl! Stay! 3l)r fommt :^cr ! Come here ! 2. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD 1. When relating or quoting what has been said of done, the Subjunctive Mood must be used in German. Ex.: ©r fagte mir, ha^ ex franf gcteefen He told me that he had been ill. trare. SKan fragtc \m§, trclcf)c§ imfcr 23a= They asked us, which was our terlanb ware. country. 60 3d^ glaufttc, hci^ ct frcin! iuarc. I thought he was ill.* 2Str ^orten, bcv3ug fci abgcgangcn. We heard the train had started. 2. After tlie conjunctions iDcnn and ob, if, wlien the verb is in the Imperfect or Pluperfect tense. Ex.: 2Bcnn tr faljen fie tanjcn. 3}ccin ^rubcr tcrnt gcid^ncn. I may hope. Thou canst -write. He must work. "\Ye hear him speak. We saw her dancing. My brother learns drawi In all other cases the Infinitive is preceded by tho preposition 3U. Ex. : 6'r lin"infd}t mit S^ncrt jit fprcd)cn. He wishes to speak to you. SSir (}ctfcn mcvgcn cincn ^ricf ju crs We hope to receive a letter to morrow. I beg you to get up for a mo ment. I fear to tell it him. It is sad to have no friends. We have still three miles to go. ijaitcn. 3d) bittc ^ic, cmen SlugenBlic! aufju; ftet)en. 3d) furd)tc c§ iijm ju fagen. (§5 ift traurig, fcine greunbe ju ()aben. 2Bir 1:)almi ncd) brct 3}ict(cit ju inad)cn. If we wish to indicate precisely the object, the motive of an action, um is added to the prep. gU. Ex. : 3d) fcmme, um mit 3l)ncn ju I come in order to speak to you, fprcd)en. QBir leben nid)t, um ?u cj]cn, fciibcvn We do not live in order to eat Wix c)fcn, um ;u Icbcn. but we eat in order to live. 7.. 62 Every German Infinitive may be taken substantively-, and be preceded by the article. Ex.: has Zxinkn, drinking ; ia§ S^anjcn, dancing. 5. PARTICIPLES. § 80. The present participle is mostly employed as an adjective. Ex. : S)er ftcrbenbe @retl ; the dying old man. 5)te Icibenbe 9}Zenfci)|cit ; ' suffering humanity. S)a§ Icfenbe 5lmb ; the reading child. There are, however, cases, where the present Parti- ciple is also used in German to unite two sentences into one ; which, however, can only take place, when the two sentences have the same subject. Ex. : Sittentb fagte er mtr He told me trembling (Srrot^enb )?or (Bd)am cntfcrnte er Blushing with shame he with- fid^, drew. § 81. The past participle serves not only to form the compound tenses of verbs, but it is also very often used as an adjective. (Sin gefronteS ^^ain^t; a crowned head. 5)a§ gelicbte £inb; the beloved child. X'CX angefangcrte ^rief; the commenced letter. The past participle replaces sometimes the Imperative, the Infinitive, and even the present participle. Ex.: ©etruTtfert, gcfpielt! Let us drink, play! 2)aS ijd^t gearbeitet (instead of: That is called working. arbeiten). (5'r tarn gelaufcn, gefV'tungett. He came on running, jumping. Sometimes also the past participle of those verbs the Infinitive of which is used without gU (§ 79), is replaced by their Infinitive. Ex. : Sd) l^abe tfjn an!ommcn fe^en I have seen him arrive. (gefe^en). (Bx fjat be^afjlett muffen (gemuft). He has been obliged to pay. SStr t)aben if)rt fingen ^oren (gcs We have heard him sing. l)ort). <2ie i)at c§ ii]m ntd}t fagcn biirfcn Slie dared not tell him. (gebiirft). In rhetoric style, the past participle also serves to connect two sentences and to render the expression more concise and distinct. Ex.: 63 Son fcmen ^reunben ycvratf^cn, fon Betraj^ed by his friends, peree- jeincn i^cmben l^crfclgt, entjicf) cuted by his enemies, Themis- X(;cmtf^oflcS nad) ^eificn. __ tocles escaped to Persia. ©ie Uttfct^ulb ift bcr (Scclc ©liicf; Innocence is the happiness of the Sinmal t>erfd}erjt unb aufgegcbcn, soul ; once forfeited and lost, 33erld^t fie un§ tm ganjcn Vcbcn, it will leave us for ever, and Unb tcinc 9^eu' brmgt fie jurucf. no repentance can recall it. CHAPTER XII. OF THE USE OF THE TENSES. 1. TEESENT TENSE. § 82. The Present Tense is used in German as in English, and in addition in the following case, where the Perfect is substituted in English ; viz., when speaking of any length of time past, up to the present moment, and including it. Ex.: SBir n3oI)ncn [cit fimf 3aT)rcn in "We have been living in thii bicfcm «^aufc. house for five years. 3:^r D^eim i\t fdjon elf SaTjve Their uncle has been dead these tobt. eleven years. Sd) f^abt c5 fc^on fcit nicincr I have had it from my childhood. i?inbf)eit. (icit tvann ftnb Sie r)ter ? How long have you been here ? 3d) ttJatte bercitS fcit eincr u md)t jietftg, fo mad)ft bu If thou art not diligent, thou feine ^ortfc^ritte. wilt make no progress. 6. Interrogative sentences are formed without the help of any auxiliary verb, by merely placing the verb befor^i its Nominative. Ex.: ®d)tn ©le fjeute au§ ? Do you go out to-day ? S3t([tgen ©ie c§ ntd)t? Do you not approve of it? 5iommt ber dJtann md)t Wichcx ? Does the man not come back again ? Negative sentences are likewise formed without the help of auxiliary verbs. Ex. : ScE) trei^ tS nid)t, I do not know it. ^r fommt nid)L He does not come. 7. The Nominative is placed not only after the verb, but also after the adverb and other words depending on the verb, if the sentence begins with the neuter personal pronoun e§. Ex.: (B§ tarn gcjlern Scmanb. Somebody came yesterday. (SS erctgnct ftd) nt^t a((e Jl'age cine Such an opportunity does not fold)e ©elegen^eit. happen every day. ( 87. The Germans place certain words at the end of the sentence, which are its Jce^/, and without which the sense would not be understood. These words are : 67 1. The attribute of the subject. 2. The adverb referring to the verb of the subject. 8. The preposition with its regimen or in its place the illative particles baran, baritnt, &c. 4. The prepositions and separable particles with which the verbs are compounded. 5. The Past Participle and the Infinitive. 6. Lastly the verb of the subject. 1) When the sentence begins with one of the conjunc- tions irenn, if; Wdi, because; obf(i)on, although; baj/ that; bamit, in order that; bet)or, e(]e, before; atg, ba, when; irctljrenb, while; nac^bem, after; bi§, until; 2) when the sentence begins with a relative pronoun ; and 3) w^hen it begins with an interrogative pronoun or ad- verb, provided that the interrogation be indirect. Examples. 1 3^ bin mcincn ^rcunbcn ge^ I am true to my friends, trcu. (Scib gegcn 3cbcrmann I}5f' Be polite to every one. ltd). 2. Stcfe %xa\i Itcbt ifjrc ^inbcr This -woman does not love her nid)t. children. ®cr .^ranfe Bcftnbct jTd) Bcfjcr. The patient is better. (2te fingt btefe^ I'ieb fc^ijn. She sings this song beautifully. 3. 2Btr fpred;en imx unfcvn @c; "We speak of our affairs. 2Ba§ mad)ert 'Bk bamit ? "What are you doing with it ? SScHen (£ie bai^on? Do you wish some of it? 3d) befummere mid) ntd}t ia- I do not trouble myself about it rum. 4. SO'tad^et bte 2'f)ure ju. Shut the door. te brannte brdlft, brdt Imp. Ind. and Subj. Pres. Ind. 2d and 3d pers. Imp. Ind. and Subj. do. do. do. Pres. Ind. 2d and 3d pers. Imp. Ind. and Subj. Past part. do. Imp. Ind. Imp. Ind. and Subj. Past Part. Imp. Ind. and ^ubj. Past Part. Pres. Ind. 1st and 2d pers, Imperative Pres. Ind. 2d and 3d pers, Imp. Ind. and Subj. Pres. Ind. 2d and 3d pers, Imp. Ind. and Subj. do. do. do. do. do. do. Imp. Ind. Pres. Ind. 2d and 8d pers. cffen, to eat bacfen, to bake binbcn, to tie bergen, to hide bitten, to beg befe^len, to command do. fid; bcfici^en, to appl j one's self. do. befcf;[en, to command btgtuucn, to begin. do. do. beircgcn, to mo^e do. jein, to be bergen, to hide do. bct§en, to bite blajen, to blow blciben, to remain blafen, to blow biegen, to bend berften, to burst bieten, to offer bred)en, to break bringen, to bring brennen, to burn braten, to roast 70 brid) Imperative brict;!!, Biicljt Pres. Ind. 2d and 3d pers. brict, brictc Imp. Ind. and Subj. bad}te, bdd)te do. barf, barf ft Pres. Ind, 1st and 2d pers. brang, brdngc Imp. Ind. and Subj. brtjd) Imperative brifd)cfl, brifd)t Pres. Ind. 2d and 3d pers. brcfd), brcjd)e Imp. Ind. and Subj. burfte, biirfte do. cinpfat}! Imp. Ind. em^fic:^t Imperative empncl}lfl, cmv^fteljlt Pres. Ind. 2d and 3d pers. empfol)!, empfctjie Imp. Ind. and Subj. empfef)len Past Part. erbltd), erblid;e Imp, Ind. and Subj. etblic^en Past Part. crlifd) Imperative erlifd)c|i, erlifc^t Pres. Ind. 2d and 3d pers. crlcid), crlo jd}e Imp. Ind. and Subj. crlcfd)cn Past Part. erld)c(l, erfd^cHc Imp. Ind. and Subj. crfd}c((cn Past Part. erfd)raf, erfd;rdfe Imp. Ind. and Subj. erf^ttd Imperative erfc^rtcfj!, crfdjricTt Pres. Ind. 2d and 3d pers. erjd)rocfett Past Part. eni^cg, crwcge Imp. Ind. and Subj. erwogen Past Part. \a[)x\t, fd^rt Pres. Ind. 2d and 3d pers. daft, fdnt do. anb, fditbe Imp. Ind. and Scbj. fdngft, fdngt Pres. Ind. 2d and 3d pers. u-t}tft, ficl)t do. 'id, fteie Imp. Ind. and Subj. inq, fingc do. iid}tft, fitd)t Pres. Ind. 2d and 3d pers. ttod)t, fiod}te Imp. Ind. and Subj. fiog, flcge do. fiot}, m<^ do. H, ficife do. Dd}t, fcd)te do. ra^, frd^c do. ror, frorc do. xi% Imperative fri|ieft,Jri^t Pres. Ind. 2d and 3d pers. ul}Xf fu^rc Imp. Ind. and Su))j. gab, gdbe do. gait, gdltc do. brcdjen, to break do. bratert, to roast bcnfcn, to think burfen, to dare bringen, to press brcf^en, to thrasb do. do. burfcn, to dare empfcljlen, to recom mend do. do. do. do. crblctc^ett, to grow pale do. erlcfdjcn, to extinguish do. do. do. crfc^ alien, to sound do. erfd)re(fen, to be fright ened do. do. do. ertvdgcn, to consider do. fa^reit, to drive (in a carriage) fallen, to fall finben, to find fangen, to catch fcd)tcn, to fight fallen, to fall fangen, to catch ^cd;ten, to braid do. fiiegen, to fly fiic^en, to flee flie^en, to flow fec^ten, to fight fre))en,to eat(of animals friercn, to freeze freffen, to eat do. faljren, to drive (in a carriage) gcbcn, to give gelten, to be v.'orth 71 gcbacfen Past Part bacfen, to bake cjcbar, gcbate Imp. Ind and SuLj. gcbarcn, to bear f^cbctct Past Part bcten, to pray (]cbicr Imperative gcbdren gcbtcif , gebicvt Pres Ind 2d and od per 3. gcbaren, to bear bet^cn, to bite cjcbtfjcn Past Part. fjcblafct: do. blafen, to blow gcbltebcn do. blctben, to remain gebogcn do. btcgen, to bend gcborcu do. gebdren, to bear gcborgcn do. feergen, to hide gcboriten do. Ijcriten, to burst gcboten do. btetcn, to offer gcbracl)t do. bringcn, to bring gcbranut do. Brcnnen, to bum gcbratcn do. bratcn, to roast gebrod)cu do. brcd)en, to break gcbunbcn . do. binben, to tie "gebad)t do. bcnfen, to think gcbicf), gci:»tct)C [mp. lud and Subj. gcbeif)cn, to prosper gcbic()cu Past Part. do. gcbvoidicrt do. bre[c^en, to thrash gcbrungcu do. ■ l^ringcn, to press gc bun gen do. bt'ngcn, to bargain biirfen, to dare gcbuvft do. gcfaf)rctt do. do. faljTcn, to drive (in a carriage.) gcfafkn do. •anen, to^'fall gcfangcn do. 'angen, to catch gcflccl)ten do. iicd)ten, to braid gcjiipgcu do. iiegcn, to fly gefto^cn do. itetjen, to flee gcflcfjcn do. iie^en, to flow gctcd)ten do. cd^tcn, to fight gcfrcilcit do. re[fcn,to eat(of animals gcfroren do. rieren, to freeze gcfunben do. inben, to find gcgangcii do. geljen, to go gcgcbctt do. gcben, to give gcgcfjen do. effen, to eat gcglid^en do. gteic^cn, to resemble gegltttcn do. gletten, to gUde gcglommcn do. glimmen, to glow gegcl)rcn do. gdfjren, to ferment gegotten do. gcltcn, to be worth gcgcfjcn do. gie§en, to pour gcgrabcu do. grabcn, to dig gcgnffen do. gretfen, to seize 9cl)altcn do. i)alten, to hold gcfjaucn do. ijaum, to hew gc{}ci^cn do. ^ct§en, to be called ge^obcn do. I)eben, to lift ge^clfcu do. I}clfcn, to help 7-2 gcFannt Past 1 art. fcnncn, to know gcflcmmen do. flinimcn, to climb gcfUmgcn do. fltiu^cn, to sound gcfniffcn do. fnctfcn, to pinch gcfcmmcn do. fcmmcn, to come gcfcnnt do. fcnncn, to be able gcfrcdicn ■ do. hicd}cn, to creej) gclvit'cn do. labcn, to load gelaiig, gctaiigc Imp. ind . and SuLj. gclingen, to succeed gclaffcn Past Part. ' Iviffen, to leave gclaufcn do. Iau[cn, to run gclcgcn do. Itegcn, to lie (down) gclcfcn do. Icfen, to read gcltclicn do. lcif)cn, to lend gelittcn do. Icibcn, to suffer gclcgcu do. liigcrt, to lie (speak an untruth) gchmgcn do. gclingcn, to succeed gcmal)lcn do mal)len, to grind gemeficn do. meffen, to measure gemtct)cn do. inetben, to avoid gcmoct)t do. mogen, to like gcmolfen do. nieifen, to milk gemuBt do. mufjcn, to be obliged gcnannt do. nmnen, to name Qtnas, genai'e Imp. Ind. and Subj. gencfeit; to recover gcnefctt Past Part. do. genommen do. ncljmen, to take genofien do. gentc^en, to enjoy geno^, genoffe Imp. Ind. and Subj do. gepiiffen Past Part. i?feifen, to whistle gepflogctt do. Vjiegcn (dlati) jc), t« consult ge^^rfcfcrt do. prcifcrt, to praise geqiiollcn do. queHen, to spring gcrannt do. rcnncn, to run gcrati) en do. rat()cn, to advise {|cricben do. rcibcn, to rub gerifjen do. Xci^m, to snatch gcvittcu do. veitcn, to ride (on horsa- back) gercrt)cn do. rtcd)cn, to smell gcrcnncn do. rinnen, to flow gcriifcn do. rufen, to call gcntngcn do. ringcn, to wrestle gcjanbt do. fcnben, to send 0cid)atfcn do. jd)affen, to create gcid}al), gc[d;rci{)e linp. Ind. and Sub] gejd)cl)cn, to happen gcfd}cl)cn Past Part. do 3cid)icbcn do. fdicibcn, to part acm)tc()t Pres. Ind. 3dp ers. gcldici)cn, to happen gcid)icncn Past Part. jdicincn, to seem 3eid}lafcn do. jd;'la[cn, to sleep 73 gclcl;licl;cu 0clcl)Uffcn gcicl}li|]cn geicl}loffcn gcict)lungcn gcfc^mtlfen gcjcl}mcljcn geid)nittcn {Hcfcl}ncbcn gc idle ben geidicltcn gcidicrcu gcjd}c)]cn gcjd^rtcbcn gefd}riccn geid)rittcn gefd)unbcn gcfdmnegcn geid}n:tcUen gel'd)tt?cmmctt geld}ircreu gefd)iininl^cn gefd^nnuigen gclcf)en gclefien gcfcffcn. gcfcntictt gcfcttcn g tip tc en gelplinen gefpcnnen gei>rcd}en geiprcifen geipningen geftanten gefttegen gcitcdien geftcl)len geftcrben geftc^en geftrid)Ctt geftrittcn geftunfcn geiungctt gejimfen gcti)an getragen gctreten gctricben Getvcffen Past Part. fd}(agen, to beat do. fd}lctd)en, to sneak do. fd)leifcn, to whet do. fd)lct§cn, to split do. fd}Ucicn, to shut do. fd}lingcn, to devour do. fc^mei^cn, to throw do. fdjmeljcn, to melt do. fd)neiben, to cut do. fd}nauben, to snort do. fd}ieben, to push do. fd}eltcn, to scold do. jd}cren, to shear do. fd}ic^cn, to shoot do. fd)reiben, to write do. fd}rctcn, to cry do. id)reitcn, to step do. fd}inben, to flay do. fd}tr»c{gen, to be silent do. fdjWcUen, to swell do. fd)ir»immen, to swim do. |d}Wi3rcn, to swear do. jdjtrinben; to vanish do. fd}tx»ingcn, to swing do. fei)en, to see do. fi^en, to sit do. faufen, to drink (of ani mals) do. fmncn, to meditate do. 'icbcn, to seethe do. pelen, to spit do. plei^cn, to split do. ptnncn, to spin do. fprcd)en, to speak do. fpric^cn, to germinate do. fpringen, to jump do. ftcl)en, to stand do. ftctgcn, to ascend ftcd}eit, to sting do. do. ftc^Ien, to steal do. ftcrben, to die do. fto^en, to push do. ftrcid}en; to stroke do. ftrciten, to contend do. ftmfen, to stink do. jfingen, to sing do. finfen, to sink do. tl)un, to do do. trvigcn, to carry do. treten, to tread do. treiben, to drive do. trcffen, to hit 74 gctrogctt cjctrimfctt gc»afd)ctt getcanbt gcwann, gc\t»annc gtni?ad)ien gctrekn gewid)cn geiricicn gcicogcn gewontien neworben gcttJorben geir»otfcn geinorrett getDunbett getuup gejie:^ett gqogen geiwungen gib, gieb gtbft, gibt gtitft, gilt ging, gtngc glirf), glid)c glit, gittte glomm, glontmc gc^r, gojre gcit, golte go§, ga§e grdbft, grdbt gnff, grtffe grub, gn'ibe f)a(f, f)ulfe pltft, f)d(t r)aft, f)at l)atte, f)dtte ftteb, f)tebe I)telt, f)te[te f)itfft, f)tl[t r)iif f)cb, l^cbe i^ f im, fame !.tnn, fannjl fannte, fonntc flang, flcinge flomm, ftontme fnift, fniffe fommi!, fcmwt Past Part. do. do. do. Imp. Ind. and Subj. Past Part, do. do. do. do. do. ao. do. do. do. do. do. do. do. do. Imperative Pres.Ind. 2d and odpers. do. Imp. Ind, and Subj. do. do. do. do. do. do. Pres.Ind 2d and 3d pers. Imp. Ind. and Subj, do. do. Pres.Ind. 2d and 3d pers. do. Imp. Ind. and Subj. do. do. do. Pres.Ind. 2d and 3d pers. Imperative Imp. Ind. and Subj. Imperative Pres.Ind.2d and 3d pers. Imp. Ind. and Subj. Pres.Ind. 1st and 2d pers Imp. Ind. and Subj. do. do. do. Pros Ind. 2d and 3d pers. tvicgctt, h-ugett; to de ceive. trfnfcn, to drink ivafd)en, to wash iiU'nben, to turn getinnnen, to win lrad)fen, to grow fctn, to be ir»eid^cn, to yield itieijen, to show iDtegcn, to weigh gelfinnen, to win inerben, to enHst tDcrben, to become irterfen, to throw ti^irrcn, to entangle iriinben, to wind iriffen, to know jeil^en, to accuse, gie^en, to draw jtningen, to compel geben, to give do. getteit, to be worth gef)en, to go glet(^cn, to resem-ble gleiten, to glide gtimmen, to glimmer gdbren, to ferment gclten, to be. worth gic^en, to pour graben, to dig greifert, to seize graben, to dig l)cI[eTi, to help l^alten, to hold l;aben, to have do. f)amn, to hew i)alkn, to hold i^d^m, to be called l^cifen, to help do. l^eBeit, to lift efjen, to eat do. fommcn, to come fcnncn, to be able fcnncn, to know flingcn, to sound flinimen, to climb fncifen, to pinch fcmmcn^ to come 75 fonntc, Bnntc Imp. lud. and Su!)j. frod), h'odje do. lag, Icige do. lag, Idfe do. Idffeft, Id§t Pres. Iiid. 2d and od pors. Idufft, Iduf' do. lief, liefe Imp. Ind. and Subj. lies Imperative liefeft, (tef! Pres. Ind. 2d and 3d pers. lic^, lic^ Imp. Ind. and Subj. litt, Ittte do. (eg, logc do. lub, lub do. mag, magfi Pres. Ind. 1st and 2d pers. map, md§e Imp. Ind. and Subj. mtcb, micbc do. mifi Imperative mtffeft, mift Pres. Ind. 2d and 3d pers. mod)te, mcdjte Imp. Ind. and Subj. muf , mugt Pres. Ind. 1st and 2d pers. muBte, mu§tc Imp. Ind. and Subj. naf)m, nd{)mc do. uannte Imp. Ind. uimm Imperative ntmmj!, nimmt Pres. Ind. 2d and 3d pers. V^nff, pftffe Imp. Ind. and Subj. pfiog, pficgc do. pricl, priefe do. quiU Imperative qutdil:, quIKt Pres. Ind. 2d and 3d pers. quoK, quijUc Imp. Ind. and Subj. rang, range do. ranu, rdnnc do. rannte Imp. Ind. rdt()ft, rdtf) Pres. Ind. 2d and 3d pers. rtcb, rlcbe Imp. Ind. and Subj. rief, ricfc do. rictl), rtct^e do. ti§, riffc do. rttt, ritte do. red), r5d)c do. a(), jdl;e do. luC'tc Imp. Ind. ;ng, fdnge Imp. Ind. Subj. xnt, fdnfe do. ann, jdnne do. U^, id^e do. fdufft, iduft Pres. Ind. 2d and od pers. {c^alt, id)dltc Imp. Ind and Subj, foiuicn, to be able fr(cd)cn, to creep licgcn, to lie (dowa) Icl'en, to read lafjcn, to leave laufeu, to ruu do. Icl'en, to read do. tafjen, to let leiben, to suffer li'igen, to lie (speak wj untruth) labcn, to load mogen, to like meffen, to measure meiben, to avoid mcl'ien, to measure do. mogen, to like muijcn, to be obliged do. ttc^mcn, to take nennen, to name uc()men, to take do. Vfeifctt, to whistle Vfiegcn 0iati) jc), to consult pretfcn, to praise queUcn, to spring do. do. ringen, to wrestle rinnen, to flow rennen, to run ratt)en, to advise rciben, to rub rufen, to call ratten, to advise rei§en, to snatch rciten,to ride (on iiorse back) rtcd}en, to smell fc()en, to see fenbcn, to send fingen, to sing ftnfcn, to sink finncn, to meditate fi^en, to sit jaufen, to drink (of animals) jdicltcn, to scold 76 fd}tcb, fd}icbe Imp. Ind L. and SuLj. \d/.cn, |d)icnc do. frt}iltft, fd}ilt Pres. Ind. 2d and od pcrs. \d)ia\]t, fct)taft do. fd)lagft, fd)ldgt do. ^rfilaug, fd)ldnge Imp. Ind . and Suhi. fd)lid}, fd}ltd)e do. fd)lief, fd^liefc do. fdjliff, fc^liffe do. Id^lif, fdjltli'e do. 1d)to^, fd)tD[[e do. fd}lug, fd)luge do. ic^milj Imperative la^miljcf}, fd^miljt Pres. Ind . 2d and 8d pcrs. fd)mi§, fc^miffe Imp. Ind . and Sub]. jd^molj, fd}m6l5C do. fd)nitt, fd^nitte do. fd^ttoB, fd)n6be do. fd)cB, fd)obe do. fd)alt, jc^olte do. fd)Dr, fc^ore do. fd}of, fdjofie do. td)rteb, fc^rieBe do. ]d)xk, fc^rtee do. d)ritt, jd)ritte do. d)uf, jd)u[e do. d)ivamm, fc^indmmc do. c^wanb, fc^iudnbe do. d)ii3icg, fd}Wtege do. fd}Wtnft, jd}wiat Pres. Ind. 2d and od pers. [lijiinU Imperative fd^iroU, fc^iT^oKe Imp. Ind, , and Subi. fd)Wor, fc^wore do. fd)raor, jd)Wore do. fd)wang, fc^wdnge do. fd}wur, fc^ivure do. m Imperative \id}}\ rid}t Pres. Ind. 2d and 3d pers. foff/ \m Imp. Ind . and Subj. ^cg; I'oge do. iott, fotte do. jpann, jpat^ttc do. ivtc, fpice do fpli§, fpliffe do. ^pr ad), fprdd)e do. f prang, jptdnge do. fpridji't, fprid}t Pres. Ind, . 2d and Sd pers. jprtd), Imperative fprc^, fprcffc Imp. Ind . and Sn1)i. ftad), ftvTd)c do. ftaf, ftdfe do. fta^l, ftdf}Ie do. fd)eibcn, to part fd^emcn, to seem fdjelten, to scold id)lafcn, to sleep fc^lagen, to beat fd}lingen, to devour fd)leid)en; to sneak |d)Iafcn, to sleep fd}leifett, to whet {d)let^en, to split |d)lic^cn, to shut id)(agen, to beat jd;mel^en, to melt do. f(^meif en, to throw fdjnieljcn, to melt td)neiben, to cut fd)nauBen, to snort fd}ie6en, to push fd)elten, to scold fc^eren, to shear ic^te|en, to shoot ((^reibcn, to write |d)reiett, to cry fd)reiten, to step fd)affen, to create fd)it)immen, to swim fd}Winben, to vanish id)tt)eigen, to be silent fd;wcllen, to swell do. do. fd)\tidrert, to fester fd)it)oren, to swear fd)»tngcn, to swing fd)»oren, to swear je|ett, to see do. faufcn, to drink (of ani- mals) faugen, to suck jieben, to seethe Iptnnen, to spin fpcien, to spit fplei^ctt, to split tprcd)en, to speak jpringen, to jump fprcd;en, to speak do. fprtc§cn, to germinate ftcd}cn, to sting flcdcn, to stick ftc()(on, to steal 77 f!aub, jlanbc [tanf, ftanfe ftaxh, fti'ivbe fttd) fttd}fl, flt(I)t fticg, l^icge ftict)l, fticl)ltl, jltcT)lt \tixh\l, fttvbt ftirb ftoBtf , fto|5t jtrid), ftxid)i fixitt, firitte ftarb, ftiivbe tijat, tljak ti)n (e) {■()U|1, tf)Ut txa\, trdfc trdgjl, trdgt txanf, tranfc tvat, trdtc tricb, tvicbc ttiff tvtffll, trip trittft, tvitt tvitt h-cg, tr5gc trug, triige I'crbarb, ycrbiivbc l^cvbirb i^cvbtrbt'!, iicrbivbt ycrborbcn yerbroffcn ycrbroi, tjcrbrcffc l^crbarb, Derbiivbc licrga|, J;)crgdpe l^ergcffen tergiffcft, ycvgi^ lun-gif itcri;oI)fcn lun-icren i\xkx, vcvlcre \i\id}icft, \vad}]i tiHinb, ii\inbe toanbtc Mwx, Wvirc Yoaxh ivarb tiHirf,- toiirfe \vdid;cft, wdfd)t Imp. Ind. aiiJ Subj. do. do. Imperative Pros. Ind. 2d and 3d pcrs. Imp. Ind. and Subj. Imperative Pres. Ind. 2d and 3d pers. Imp. Ind. and Subj. Pres. Ind. 2d and od pers. Imperative Imp. Ind. and Subj. Pres. Ind. 2d and od pers. Imp. Ind. and Subj. do. do. do. Imperative Pres. Ind. 2d and od pers. Imp. Ind. and Subj. Pres. Ind. 2d and od pers. Imp. Ind. and Subj. do. do. Imperative Pres. Ind. 2d and 3d pers. do. Imperative Imj). Ind. and Subj. do. do. Imperative Pres. Ind. 2d and 3d per^. Past Part. «' do. Imp. Ind. and Subj. do. do. Past Part. Pres. Ind. 2d and 3d pers. Imperative Past Part. do. Imp. Ind. and Subj. Pres. Ind. 2d and 3d pers. Imp. Ind. and Subj. Imp. Ind. Imp. Ind. and Subj. In . Ind. do. Imp. Ind. and Subj. Pres. Ind. 2d and 8d pers. Pres. Ind. 1st and 2d pers. ftcfjcn, to stand fiiufcii, to stink ftcrbcn, to die ftcdjcn, to sting do. ftcigcn, to ascend ftc()lcn, to steal do. flc{3crt, to push jicvbcu, to die do. flciitctt, to steal fto^en, to push ftretd)cn, to stroke ftrciten, to contena fterbcn, to die tl)un, to do do. do. tvcffen, to hit tragcn, to cany trtnfctt, to drink trcten, to tread trcibcn, to drive trcjfen, to hit do. tvcten, to tread do. trugen, to deceive tvagen, to carry ycrbcrben, to spoil do. do. do. Dcrbricfcn, to vex do. »crberBen, to spoil tjcrgeffen, to forget do. do. do. »cr^cl)(en, to conceal Dcrlicren, to lose do. tradjfett, to grow h)inben, to wind inenben, to turn fein, to be iucrbctt, to enlist iDcrbcn, to become hjctfcn, to throw lrafd)en, to wash \inj[cn, to know 73 \mc§, tr»tcfc Win, tijiUjt \t^ixbft, wirBt h)irb h)irfj!, U)trft xocQ, tuogc JDurf)0, wuc^fe trarb, tnurbe irurbe, wurbc irufc^, wiifrf)e i\)ugte; wuftc Imp. Ind. and Subj. do. Pres. Ind. 1st and 2d pers. Pres. Ind. 2d and Sd pers. Imperative do. Pres. Ind. 2d and 3d pers. do. Imp. Ind. and Subj. do. do. do. do. do. do. i!o. \ocid)cn, to yield iDcifcn, to sliow ttJoUcU; to be willing incvben, to enlist do. \\>crfctt, to throw do. toerben, to become trticgen^ to weigh toad^feit, to grow totxbm, to enlist iuerben, to becoma hjajc^en, to wash tci[)en, to know geif)en, to accuse jie^en, to draw j^aoingen, to compel PRACTICAL PART. ALPHABETICAL LIST OF ALL THOSE V70RDS WHICH AEE MET WITH IN THE 136 EXERCISE8 OF THE FIEST COURSE, AND WITH WHICH THE PUPIL IS SUPPOSED TO BE QUITE FAMILIAR. 1. SUBSTANTIVES 5(ad)cn 5lbcnb S-lmalte 5lr5t Slugcublitf S3anO Safe SQaiiin S3crg S3cfuc^ *8icr 93mic matt S3lct Slciftift Slumc a3rob Snibcr S3ruf)cl Slid) ging S)orf Qik eitci-n (Smilic (S'ngldut'cr Benfter Winter Stattener ^•inqcr^ut .Vuffce %la]d}t ^aih %kii(i) ^Urt %xMdn 5^ die ^Tcunb ^a^^ ^rcunbtn Jtaufmann f^veUjeit teller ^•ncbric^ ^ittb ^•rud;t ^trc!^c %n^ ^tridje ©abcl Plainer ©artcn ^Ictb ©drtncr ^oln @clb_ ^onic^ ©cmufc .^onlgtn ©cid)dft c^opfwc^ ®cid)id}te ^crb ©cfcdfdMft i^ricq @circ(}n{)ett Jluti'd)cr ©las i^ud;e ©clb :ecbctt ®utc £c()rcr ^atgbinbe ^etnwanb «§anb l^cd) •^anbct ^'cifct <§anbl'd}uf) 2croc ^aus ^'itbirig •^elnrid) I'cuife •^cntb £'uft ^err £'utt(^ «|)uf)n SOidbd)ctt •^unb 9?Jagb dnai •^ut 3a^r 9}tann 3cf)ann 2?iarft SKcffcr ^Ictaii a\Mttag 2}ionb 2}ionat SJiorgcn a'ltuttcr aiiidjc 9^ad)bar 9iad)bartn 5lad)vid)t Duibcl £bft Cnfcl C^aar Si>avtcr ^i^rilaumc ^sfcffcr ^filid}t $funb ^ubcr $Kcd}t 5)icgcnfd;tnu gting ^ad;e eal5 Sd)n)ci!cr (id}uftcr (Sd)ncibcr (2d)rcmcr •Hdnif) ed;(ci 82 Sdjinfcn (ct'nmm ^i)kx 33or\pattO ed)u Ic (itocf 3:l;uve 93alb £ri)ulcr etra^e 3:cd}ter QSafier Sd^ranf (Btrumpf 3:ud) 2i]ettcr Scnf etul)l lU)r _ aSetn gtlber •etunbe llngliuf men (Ecl)n etiic! Unrcd;t mif)chn (Bonne (guppc «atcr aSitlen S org [alt 2ag Setter _ 2Bdc^c epajtergang Xante 93ct9nugen aSuritt epicgct 3:afc^entud} ffierjtanb 3at)n eptel 2^aubc Sicrtcl 3cit 8ta()I Siger S3cgc(. 3tnimcr eicUc !Jifd) a^olf 3ucfer ettcfcl :it;ci( 33cricrjung 2. ADJECTIVES. alt X)axt nct^i'g treu angcncl)m f)od) nu^li'^ tbeurcr arm rjDJiid^ cffen unartig unban^bar bd'c^elbctt :^ubld) reic^ beic m^ rein unglaublid? beutjd; talt fd)dblid) ungludtic^ faul flcin fc^ldfrig unirifienb ficimg franf fd)lcd}t nnwobl gefdUig lang fd)ncn pcrtrejfltd) gefct)ic!t langfam fd)on ivarm gcfunb lcid)t fd)roarj tretg gliicfltd) (cid)tgldu'6ig fc^wer ja{)trei(^. golbcn Itebengmirbig itlbcrn jufrieben grcB mubc ftarf gut ncu traurig 3. VERBS. abrcifcn beleiblgen erfinbcn gni§en abfc^rciben bclo^nctt cr batten baben ad}tcn Bemuf)cn, fic^ crtauben ^agettt anflciben bcfud}cn erjdf)lett bci^en anfcmmen Betrugctt erjicben l^ungern anttrortcn bitten crwarten trren, f[^ anycf)cn bictbcn ciien faufen an^unben b(t|cn fatten fenncn anraenbcn braud)cn finbcn fcmmen arbcitcn bredjen freucn, ftd; fcnnen aufmadjen bringcn frieren tad)en aufrtct)cn ban fen iiird)ten tegen fluggefjen bcnfen geben leiben aueru^vn bcnuern ge()en Id'cn bcfc 1)1 en burrtcn gel)cren lieben Bcfiuben, f;c^ cnipfchlen geirttnnm to ben fcct)altcn cntbcifcn glaubcn tiigen 83 mi ttt)€i(cn mufjeu ncfjmen ratt)tnt rcgncn fageit fd}dmen^ |xd) fd}cineu ic^ icfen jd^lagen fd^neiben fdjneictt fd)rc(&cn trinfcn ci)cn untcvljaltcn, fid) cin t)crad)ten 'e|€n »erbc[fcm 'i|cn »erbietett )3ajicrcn ttcrfaufen pielen Dcrtieren i)rcd)cn »€rfprcd}ctt ■tcdcn tt>arten ftrafen toa^d)m tabeltt todfjktt tanjett tocggc^cn t^cilett toeinen tobtctt toerbeu totebcr[e§en in if) en irof)ncn tvoKen tuunbcnt, fid; iuunfd)ert jeigcn jcrrei^en juma^ett guriicfgebeit juriidfommcn ^urudfd^icfctt jweifcitt 4. DETERMINATIVE ADJECTIVES AND PRONOUXS. bcXf hkf ba€ biefer, jcncr mem, bcin, fcin, ic. bcinige, meinige, jc, berjenige, biejcnige, ic. id% bit, cv ii)\x, fie, eg mir, mi^f Hv, bid) ung, end), i§ncn tneldjer, tt»cld)e, tocld}c» man, nicmanb fcin, nic^t^ icmanb, mel^re anbcre, afie cin, einjig gtt^ci, brci, K. crftc, gn^citc, k* ganj, i)aib cAcXf fonbent all, fur auf, au§, an bei, big cben, focbcn ba, ba»on, bamit, K. burd), baburd) ef)emal§ geftcm, fieute oft, immer feltcn, fpdt fru(), fru^et gern, genug 5. PARTICLES. gcfdHigf}, langc l^ier, bort I^erab, (lerein, jc. l^inab, l^inaus, jc. in, barin, tccxiix mit, tamitf k, ja, nein noc^, nid)t ob, ober, nur o{)nc, nad) f€t)r, fo fe^c fd}on, feit fcgleid?. unb, unter mi, ju »ie( toieoici, fooiel trcnig, trentger »on, »or toic, tcarum, Wil tto, wofjin, trofier hjooon, tt)omit tooran, \ttoju, ic. njann, Wenn EXERCISES. 1. ^'tc Slofe, tlia rose , bcr £na!)e, the boy ; tie ©ropmuttcr, tlie grand- mother; bic 9lcid)t, the night ; i)orig, last; IJefi^crt, to possess. 'A)k Diofe ift eine jdjone iBdtmc. ^'oljans tft tin faulci ^mhc, Somfe tft ein peiBtgc^ 3}Iabcf)cn. UMjere @rogmitt=* tcr tft etne aite grait. !Der §itnb ift cin nulj(t(^e§ 2^^tei% !Dtefer arme dJtann ift fc^r frattt 5)ie Donge 9?adjt irar fcljr Mt ^ctnrirf) ift mein alter greitnb> Zf)tvt\t tft metne jiingfte ©cfjiueftcr. ®er ©raf I)at etnen bitnbcn (So^n imb cine btinbe STodjtcr. QfjX 9ladjbar bcfi^t ein frfjone^ ^au$ itnb cincn Gvogcn ©artcn. 2. 3)er 53cbtcnte, the man-servant ; bcr ©crud), the smell ; tie (Spraclje, the language ; cugUfd), English ; franjofifcf), French ; betrol^nen, to inhabit ; Icrncn, to learn ; tijicbcrfinbcn, to find again. You liave a bad pen. Henry has a good father and a good mother. We have a faithful (man-) servant. Our neighbor inhabits a very small house. This flower has an agreeable smelL We learn the German lan- guage. My son has read a French book. My uncle has received an English letter. My sister has lost her black cat. Louis has found again his little dog. The (maid-) servant has made a good fire. 3. ^ciU; no, none, not any, not a. Tl^in ^ruber trtnft !etn ^ier itnb !ciitcn SBctn. S5?tr rffeit :^eute fctne (Suppe unb feiit S^ctfcf). §aBeit wtv !cin :^rob unb feincn 3^^"'^^*? 3^) ^ff^ "^^'^^^ fdjwar^c^ ^rob. .I^iefer §crr ift !cin gran^ofe. SDicfe SDanie ift fcine ($ng* (dnberin. D^cein Onfct {)nt !eine .^ttnbcr. -3f^ I)abe feine vnft fpa3icre]t ju gcljcn. Qd) l]aht fcin @elb hci mir. Ostein 85 53ruber Ijat and) feiuen ^^fennig. Tldm (So^ne ^ahzn feiiie ^auben me^r. ^nr( fjat f'cineit greimb mel)r. Sir lefcn fetue beutfdjen ^iicfjcr me!)r. S^) ^^i^ ^^^^ ^i^b mcl)i\ S'^i; fprecfje fctn S^eutfc^. 4. SaS 3Seif, the work. I liave no pen and ink. My cousin has no gloves. The birds have no teeth. This boy eats no fruit. This woman drinks no beer. This gentleman does not speak English. What are you drinking? We drink good beer and good wine. I have no more ink and paper This young girl has fine teeth. This poor mother has no more children. This man is not a shoemaker My son reads no more English works. 5. ®ic ^crfc, the purse, the exchange ; tie (id)uB(abc, the (''-awer ; "i^aS ^anhf the country; jci)cn!cn, to give (as a present). 2So {ft betn -53ruber? S<^ gfaube, bn^ er tm ©artcn ober in ber kndjc ift. ©iub Sie ifciitt in bcr @c^u(e gciuefen? DJtctite (SdjiDcfter ift feit brei ZaQcn aiif bcm Sanbe ; fie k- finbet fid) uidjt iuoI)L 3Bol)in cjcl)cn (Sic jcl^t? Qd) gcl)e mit mcincm ^niber in bie ^irdjc, nnb tion ha incrbcn mir ^nr i^orfe ge()en. S^ragen Sie bicfen ^ricf anf bie "ipoft, el)e ^ie in§ S^^^eater gel)en. SSoIjin I)abcn ^k mein g^ebermcffer gelegt? Qd) ^abe e§ in bie edjublabe ge(egt. S3}oI}er fommen bicfe ^naben? S^ g(anbe, fie fommen an§ bem SSatbc. 33enn ^avi an§ ber (2d)n(e fommt, fo fdjicfen 2k \^n ^n mir. id) nnti if)m ein fd)one^ -53nd) fd)cn!cn. ■ '^tx (Btciil, the stable ; ter ^aU, the ball ; bag 5tonjcrt, the conwrt bag Srf)aui>icl, the plaj ; ha§ 3Sht^gl)au0, the inn, the tavern ; baf JcUcrtiid), the napkin ; ba§ S^tfdjtud}, the table-cloth ; ber S^cffe, th nephew ; gcf|en, to go, to walk. Where have you been, my children? We have been at school and at church. Is the coachman in the sta l)le? Is the (maid-) servant in the cellar? My mothei has been at the market, and my father at the post- office. We shall go to the ball this evening. My bro- thers will go to the concert or to the plav. My cousins 8* 86 have been in tlie country these two months.^ This man goes every day to the tavern. Where do you come from at present? We come from a walk. My aunt comes from church, and my uncle comes from the exchange. Your nephew comes out of the garden. Put these napkins into the drawer and this table-cloth into the cup-board. Do not go out of the room. 7. JT'cr %ki^f application, assiduity ; bte Se|d}eibenl)c{t, modesty ; bte ^enntnif, knowledge ; bcr S3ertt3anbte, the relation ; ber ©aiicr, the peasant; bcr $alaft, the palace; i)a§ ®ut, the estate; ha§ I'anb, the Jand ; pvM}tig, magnificent ; Ijcxxiid), splendid ; arbeitfam, industrious. §aben (Sie SSergnltgeit auf bem :8anbe ge^abt? §aben 8ie S3enimnbte in ^oln? Sir ^aben bort feine ^ertt)anbten, ab-cr Diele grcunbc. 9}^eiu Dlac^bar {)at ®e(b unb £rebit, unb er tft borf) nidjt ^ufrieben* ©iefer jimgc SOIann Ijat t)ielen Sb'crftanb unb mk ^enntniffe ; er tft \t^v ht\d)dhtn. Qd) Ijahz Unglitd geljabt; id) ^abe fd)(edjtc ©efdjdfte gemadjt, 3I)re ^inber {)abcn gteij unb ^e[d)etben^eit ; fie n^erben Don ^e^^^ii^^^^ getiebt nnb gelobt. Wttin D^eim befi^t groje (Sitter, prddjtige ^aldfte unb ^err(id)e ©cirten. Qn nnfernt l^anbe gibt e§ groge @tdbte, fdjcine !i)orfer, reidje ^anfiente, arbcttfamc ^aucrn nnb nortreffUdjcn SBcin. 8. 5)a§ ©liut, (good) luck, happiness ; bet SSerbvuf , vexation, trouble , miintcr, gay; yerfolgcn, to persecute; Bet, with, at the house of; bas Unglurf, bad luck ; c§ ift moglic^, it may be. You have been playing to-day; have you had good luck? We have had bad luck; we have lost every- thing. If we had money, we should also have friends. If you were in (bad) trouble, you would not be so gay. We should have had pleasure, if you had been with us. It may be that you have knowledge, but you arc not modest. If this man had had good luck, he would not be so poor. It is sad to have enemies, who perse- cute us. 9. 2)a0 <§dIj, the wood ; l>ou '^clj, I)^!^^"!!, of wood, wooden ; ba§ ®clb, the gold ; von @otb, golbeit, of gold, golden ; ber ©riff, the handle ; bie 33rucfe, the bridge : bie S'reppe, the staircase ; ber ^tcff, the stuff; * See 6 82. 87 tic (Scibc, silk ; bie S3aumironCf cotton ; btc ^cinivanb; linen ; baS Jcbcr, leather ; bcr ©tcttt, the stone ; bcr 2)iarmor, the marble ; baS Sifenbettt, ivory; bie Scitung, the newspaper; bic 2)cfe, the box; bcr ©efanbte. the ambassador; bcr ^atfcr, the emperor ; (£d)lc{ten, Silesia; Oejlrcic^/ Austria ; ruffifc^, Russian ; iicrtr»a^rcu, to preserve. ^etitrid) l)at feme golbcne U^r oerbren. Soutfe I)at iljveu [Kbcrneu Soffet gerbrocljen. ^ie fetbenen Stoffe finb tl)eurer al5 bie bainmrtolleitcn. ©icfcy 9Jle[fer ^at etnen ^ol3erneu ©riff. 2Bir l}aben eine fteinerne ^ritd'e unb eine ntarmornc S^reppe gefefjcu. @ebcn ou fcinem ^otfe geliebt !Der ruffifc^c (sicfmibte ift abgcreift. 10. ®te QBoHc, wool ; bcr (£aa(, the saloon, hall ; bic ^ilbjaiile, the statue ; bic 5^ctte, the chain; bic 33anf, the bench, the bank; bcr ilnopf, the button ; ta.§ eldje t)on btefeit gebcrn ift bie befte? ^elc^eS t)on bicfett ^linbent ift 31)^ 92effe? S)on inetdjcm bicfcr Offtstcre (jabcn (2ie ba§ 'f^ferb Oefaitft? SSa§ ^benSie bafitr bejafjlt? SBouon fpnc!)t3()i §3ruber? 2I?orau benfcn (Sic? ST^omit Ijaben ^ie bicfe^ Qcmaif)t? Sobitrcf) ift ber dJlaim fo itngliicilic^ getDorben? 12. £ie SScmunft, reason ; baS ®cfccf)t, the battle ; tier 3et(^ncnlc])re?, ilie drawing-master; crfaf)rcn, to hear; liertuunbcn, to \vound ; ubcx^ ficbcn, to deliver; fcmmen imdj, to pass by; cs i]t btc S^icbe, they are talking. Who is that man? Who are these ladies? Of whom do you speak ? To Tfhom do you write ? Of what are you talking? Who has done that? To whom have you given my cane? For whom do you work? What do you seek? What did he answer you? What have you taken? What is man without reason? Where is Louisa? Does she not know that the drawing-master will come? What would he say, if she were not here 'J Who has been in my room ? To whom have you told it ? From whom have you heard it? By which towns have you passed? In which battle has your brother been wounded? Which of your brothers is arrived? With which of these gentlemen have 3^ou been in Paris? To which of these servants have you delivered the letter ? 13. ^ix or ircld)er, who ; bcfjcn, bcren, whose ; bte S'a^'^fcrfcit, valoi, bravery ; ber SBcrtf), the value ; tk Spi^e, the point ; ber (S'belftein, the precious-stone ; ber 2BetnI)dnblcr, the wine-merchant ; bcr (Sci)tnicgcrs |ol)n, the son-in-law ; fcreit, broad, wide ; geraumig, spacious ; rcttcn, to save ; rufjitten, to boast ; f^erben, to die ; anyertraitcn, to confide ; jiibrmgert; to spend ; abbrec^cn, to break down ; 'i^a unten, down there. §ier ift bcr junge OJcann, bcr baS l!inb unfer^ Dladjbara gcrcttet I}at, ©aS ^an^, tddd)c^ (2ic baDon benfcn. ©(anben ©te nidjt 5lt(e^3, wa^ er fagt. (Sr Ijat mir feinen Summer nidjt anticrtranen inoUen, 11HV3 mir fe^r leib tl)nt. §ter ift, \mv 5 f)tit mtr G^[ci9t, bag ©ie morgen abreiften. 9}tau mug Don ^liemanbCem) ^bfe^ reben* Qd) tann c^3 bir ntcfjt geben, benn id) Ijabe c^ 3emanb(em) t)erfprodjen. Dciemaub iDeig, bag ©te I)ter fiub. SBir ^aben c§ 9ctemiaub(em) o^<:\ac\t, 3d} J)^^^^ ^"t^i^^^ ^o^^ memcn ^iidjertt tierloren. Qd) Ijabc nid]t§ 3U tijuu. Sir fjabcu uou md)t6 gefprodjcu. !Dcr (£tanb, the station, the state ; bet %m\i, the prince ; bcr Untcvi t[)an, the subject ; ber (Stubcnt, the student ; ha§ ©erdufd), the noise ; crfdjiXiJcn, to frighten, terrify ; ciitmat, once, some day. Every station has its pleasures. Every noise terrifies him. I have told it to every boy and every girl. Every one must die some day. The prince speaks to every one of his subjects. Lend me some pens. We have seen some students. Some of our friends will come this evening. I shall take some of your books. Nobody knows it. I know nobody. I shall tell it to nobody. None of my friends will come. Do you know some of these ladies? I do not know any of them. I have spoken to none of the gentlemen. I speak of some one, whom you have not yet seen. I have lent my umbrella to somebody who will return it to me to- mor]-ow. 25. Scr (Sine, the one ; bcr 5(nberc, the other ; 53cibc, both ; cinanbci, one another; me^tcrc, several; ge\r»i§, certain; jebcr bet, any one ^v!io ; tucbcr. . .ncc^, neither. . .nor ; ber 93ortrurf, the reproach; bci §ib[rf)icb, the leave ; baS ©cfc^, the law ; taS 33ein, the leg ; felten, sel dora, rare ; gcboreiT,. born • trennen, to separate ; bcnciben, to envy ; ocrtljeibic^en, to defend ; angrcifeu, to attack. (Sr gibt bent Giucn, unv3 er bem 5Iubcrn utmmt. ^cibe l;abcn Unvedjt. Gr (jat ^nibcn 'iH^ninlrfe gemadjt; abcr 94: ruebcr ber (Eiue nod) bcr Sdibere Ijat fie tierbtcnt Qd) l)aht Don ^ciben Slbfcfjieb genommen, !4Diefer ©olbat l^at kibe ^eine t)eiioren. ©iefe beiben ^ritber Ikhzn fii^ fe^r, fie ge{)en nie oljne einanber au§. (Sie !onnen fid) nidjt con etn^* anber trennen, ©eben ®ie mtr einen anbern §nt nnb anbere §anbfd}nl)e. ^eneibet nidjt haQ ©liid Slnberer, @pred)en Ste mtr t)on ctwa^ 5lnberm, S^ mi^ barliber nt{^t§ ®e* iDtffc0. (gin geit)iffer §err unb eine geiniffe ^ame ^aben e^3 mtr er^a^It ^c^ f)abe e§ t)on 2}^el)reren ge^ijrt. (g§ ift felten, bag man me^rere grcnnbe ^at -gc^ trnrbe btr eine geber (eiljen, inenn ic^ mel}rere ^citte. SKir l^aben mel)rere 3:age in biefer @tabt gngebrai^t Qd) fage e§ einem ^eben, ber e§ ^dren roiU. 2Bir n^erben un§ gegen ^eben t)ert^eibigen, ber nm angreifen luirb. X)a^ ®efe^ ir>irb Qc'i^m beftrafen, ber e3 ntdjt hcohadjkt 26. 5)ie ^erfort, the person ; bie SangeiDeile; weariness, ennui ; tocI)(tl)a; tig, charitable. The thing is not yet certain. A certain boy has told me so (it me). I have given your book to a certain school-boy. My father knew nothing certain of it yet. Several of my friends know it. I have received to- day several letters. I have heard it of several persons. Give me another shirt and other stockings. One says this, the other says that. Have you no other ink, no other pens? These two boys love one another; they are both diligent. Men must love one another. These two friends think often of one another. Every one who is rich ought to be charitable. Whoever is in- dustrious has no ennui. 27. S)te ®elegen!^eit, the opportunity ; gctoi3I)nt, accustomed ; iiid, thick, fat; gte^cn, to pour; benu|en, to profit bj, to make use of; ftc^ auf i}aikn, to stay. Qd] gc^e morgen nad) ^ladjen. Tldn ^ater ift fd)on ge^ ftern Ijingegangen. Sd) ^^^ ^^od) md)t ha. @ie Ijabcn nid}t§ babei gemonnen. S'^ \t)txht mid) brei 2^age bort auf- ^alten. Sir ()aben bie DIadit bort 3ugebrad)t. S'd) ^^^^ ^^ il)m t)erfprodjen, nnb id) irerbe baran bettfen. !Die S^inte tvax tttoa^ in bi(f ; ic^ f)abe cin inenig Saffer bajn gegoffen. Qd) bin nidjt baran geipoljut. 533ol(cn (Bit fid) anf biefe ^an! 95 fclicu ? Sa, id) mil mid) baraitf fef^en. S]i ^l)V §err 25atet im 3n^wci'? 9ictn, cr ift uidjt baria. 2Ba§ Ijaben ©te ne^ ben Qfya ^(umen f}e|.')f(an3t? S^J I}abe ©emitj'e I)tngepf(an5t ^'art l)at 3el)n geljler gcmadit, uiib id] Ijabc beren ucun gemadjt* ©inb ©ie rait mcincm (goljiie ^ufriebcn? Qa^ id) bin fefjr ^iifrieben irtit ifjin. §aben 8ie mit bem gitrften iiber meiu llngtitd gefprodjeu? Qd) {)abe nod) nidjt mit iljm bariiber ge* fprod)en. ijaben (Sie ^riefe er^atten? 3^^ ^ ^^^^ it)elc^c erljalten. SoIIen (Bk ein ®la§ S5?ein? 3^) "^^^^^ 3t)nen, id) {)abe fd)on ipctd)en getrnnfcn. ^ahm (5ie ©etb ? 9lein, id) I)abe !ein^. ®a§ ift cine gnte ®e(e(3enl)eit, id) merbe fie benn^^en. 28. Have you some wine? I have some, I have none. Has your brother any ink? He has some, he has none. Hast thou any paper? I have some, I have not any. Have these gentlemen any horses? They have some, they have none. Has your aunt any sisters? She has two. Has thy cousin been to the ball? She has not been there. Is your uncle gone into the country? He is gone there this morning. "Will you think of my affair? I shall think of it. We shall gain much by it. The wine is too strong; pour a little water into it. How many faults have you made? I have made six. Have they spoken of the war? Yes, they have spoken of it, 29. ^cx ©tcnf}, the service ; bcr Hnbanf, ingratitude ; l?a§ S3ct[p{el, the example; ttie SSerlcumbung, calumny, slander; ba§ Slcnb, the misery ; irid)ttC5, important; lact^etlic^, ridiculous; ac^tung§ir»crt(), respectable; abgcfcljmadt, absurd ; fci}rcdlid), frightful ; bosljaft, malicious ; rec^tltrf), honest; ftd) befd)it>ercn,_to complain ; crWcifen, to do ; taftern, to back- bite, to slander; ycrgc1]cn, to forget; rei^cn, to pull, to snatch; ijers nuit^en, to suppose, to presume ; jtrf) iiberlafl'ert, to give one's self up to ; cinen Oefaltcn finben, to take pleasure in ; jiemltci), rather, pretty ; bi^ireilcn, sometimes. (2ie befd)n)eren fit^ iibcr ben Unban! ber 3}tcnfd)cn; [a, man bclo^nt bi^ireiten fe[)r idjkdjt bie lr)id)tii3ften Sjienfte, unb e§ gcfdjie^t jiemtii^ oft, ba^ biejenigen, benen man am mciften ®nte§ ermiefen I)at, bie Unbanfbarften finb. Ql)t Dtac^bar ^iKcbcrt jnm ^eifpiel ift ber unbanfbarfte Tln\]d) ton ber 33?c[t. Qx nnbet cinen (^^efaficn baran, fcine '^Boi)^ 96 tljcitcr 311 Idftcru. (Jr I)at nudj bicfcr ^Tagc tiou bcit lac^crttc^i ftcit !lDingcn unterljalten; cr I)at Don bcu acljtunfj^inert^cften ^]3crfoncii ^o[c5 G^fagt iinb fid) ben abgcfcfjmadtefteit ^eiv (cnmbungcn iibertaffen. Gr t)en3ij3t, baj3 nnr ilju an§ bem fcl)rcc!(icl][ten (Elcnbe geriffcn Ijaben. ^a3 betri'ibt niicl) inefjr, ak> ^k gdntbcn. ^err Robert fprtdjt anbcr^, al§ er benft, Gr tft uidjt fo bovljaft, ab3 ^ie tDermutljcn, !l:er rcdjtUdje ^^lann fpridjt nid}t aubcr^?, al§ er bcnft. 30. !rag 93crbvcd)cn, the crime; ba§ 33cri'prcd)cn, the promise; bcr 3Bcg, the road; bet Umjltanb, the circumstance; bte £age, the situation; hirj, short ; bcfttmmt, i-)Ositive ; mcifiDiirbtg, remarkable ; fingcn, to sing ; l?crbicncn, to deserve; entrci^cn, to snatch away; befd)ulbigen, to ac cuse ; fict) cvinncrn; to remember ; geiroljnlid), usually, generally. My sister sings better than she plays. You are hap- pier tharx jou. deserve. The ladies speak generally more than they write. You have come sooner than I thought. Mr. S. is the cleverest physician (that) I know. We speak of the cleverest physician of the town. They accuse him of the most frightfid crime. He has given me the most positive promise to write to me. We shall take the shortest road to go to S. I remember still the most important circumstances. I have been at JST. yesterday; it is one of the most remarkable towns of Europe. We have rescued our friends from the most unhappy situation. 81. ^k SBctntrauBe, the bunch of grapes ; retf, ripe ; cvbncn, to arrange ; l^crjci()cn, to pardon ; lau[cn, to run. (Bci^cn inifcrcn gcinbcn t)cr3ei[)cn. 2agt im§ m^ §aufe 9el)cn. SBir inoUcn nid)t Idngcr bleibeu. @cl)eu tnir (iebcr in bic Btaht ^nviicf. I^ommt .fiinber, c^ i[t fd)on fpdt. Vanf nidjt fo fe()r, §cinrid). ®u , 2c()ft nidjt nic()r mil, mcnn bn nidjt nrligcr bift. 97 f3)te ^I'ugeub, virtue ; haS £aftcr, viee ; acvcrf}t, just; vufen, to call ^viffcn, to hate ; !plaubcrn, to chatter ; i)cruntcrgcl)en, to go down, descend ; naljev tretcn, to approach ; i)orf)CV, before, beforehand. Let us give a piece of bread to this poor little boy. They call us, let us go down. Madam, take another (one more) cup of coffee. Let us read the newspaper before. Let us be just to every one. Let us love virtue and hate vice. Let us approach a little, come a little nearer. Look here, Sir. Let us hope always. Let us yet wait a moment. Do not go away yet. Wash yourselves before you go out. Go to bed. Do not get up. Let us work at present. We will not chatter any more. ©ie £u(|c, the lie; tcr Siigncr, the liar; ber Sltufftggang, idleness; fcer ©d}meid}lcr; the flatterer ; bcr 9ld(^ftc, the neighbor ; ber Xlmgang^ the intercourse ; ergcBcn, addicted ; aKgcmcin, Tiniversal ; ^id)m, to flee, to shun ; i)eraci;ten/ to despise ; ftcl; I}mgcbctt, to give one's self up to ... . Qd) [jaffc bte[cn ^cenfrf^eit ; er ift eitt SitGiter. SStr ^affcn ben 9}|iiffiggang. Sir inerben tmmer biciemgen Ijaffcn, bte bcm Safter crgckn finb. 3'^) ^j^ff^ 9ttemanben. ®ott \inii mdjtr bag iDir ^cw^^^^^t^ Ijaffen. §af[et bie Sitge, aber fjaffct euren Dtddjftcn nidjt. gttelje bie -^ofen unb fiirfje hen llmciang berjemgen, ineWjc tugenbljaft finb. :iDte[er 9}lenfcf) wivh alU gemein t)eracljtet; ^^ebermamt flieljt ifjtt. SStr flieljen alk btejentgen, ipeldje fid) bem SJIiiffiggange Ijingeben. Mcin On!eI Ijat nttr gcratf)en, bte ©efctifdjoft biefcr jitngen Seute ju piemen. 2a^t im§ bte (^djrnetdjter fiteljcn. '^k Qcit f(tei)t, utan mitj3 fie benuljeii. ,3i. Why do you hate me? I do not hate you. We must hate nobody. I have always hated (the) flatterers. Shun the evil and do (the) good. I shun (the) bad compa- ny. Shun the wicked. Let us all shun vice. Your sister must shun the intercourse with these ladies. Stay; do not flee. You have nothing to fear. Everybody shuns (the) liars. We must profit by our time. We despise those who do not fulfil their duty. He who is despised, vs unhappy. Virtuous people are loved and ^steemed. 98 oo. 2)[e hnfimft, the nrrival; bte ®cfaf)r, the danger; tcr UcBermut^, hauglitiness ; bcr SSinb, the ^vind ; unbcfannt, unknown ; ftc^ be' ijdfj tigen, to be busy ; ftd) l^orncfjmert, to determine upon, to intend ; fid| Fliitcn, to beware ; fid) be[)crn, to improve, to mend ; ftd) ccrirren, to lose one's way; fid) au^jc^en, to expose one's self ; ftd) jujict)en^ to incur. ^cl) I)aBe mi^ ben gan^crt ^Ibenb Befc^aftigt Qd) inerbc Kiic^ je^t anHeiben. SStrft bit f)eute fpajieren gel^en? 3d) freite mid) iiber bte 5In!nnft ntetne§ Waters. 'Ajk (^angetnetle \]t bemjemgett unbetont, ber fic^ jit befc^ctfttgen inet^. ^art Iiat \\d) t)orgenotttmen, btefen 9lad)mttta^ nad) 9L gu ge^en, ^tr irerbeit itn§ bort titet S3ergnitgen mac^en* Tlan tft glitcfltd), tpentt matt fid) tt)oI)( befittbet Sobe bid) nit^t felbft ; pte bid) t)or bem Uebermut^. S^er ^ittb legt fic^ ; voiv be- fommett guteS S^etter. 9^uf)ett (Sie eitt tnenig au§. ©iefer (gc^itler I)at fid) gebeffert, Sir ^ben itttS terirrt. 3^* W't eitc^ eiiter gro^en @efap auSgefe^t Sir toitrbett itnS ^or^ iDitrfe guge^ogen ^aben, ti^etttt mv ha§> getf)att f)attett. Wash, yourself. You are not yet washed. I have washed myself this morning. Will you not wash your- self? At what do you rejoice? I rejoice at seeing you. "We rejoice at your happiness. I cannot rejoice more. My sisters intend to go to the ball. This dog has lost his way. I shall not expose myself to this danger. At what are you busy? I am busy reading. You will incui' re- proaches if you do not go there. Beware of doing that. My cousin will never mend. We have been very much amused yesterday. Louisa is not yet dressed. You are mistaken, she is already gone to church. 87. S)er Dfen, the stove ; ha§ ^ett, the bed ; ta§ ®xa§, the grass ; ijcr* langeti, to desire ; fic^ |e|cn, to sit down ; ftet)cn, to stand ; liegea, to Te; jt^cn, to sit. (^elje bic^, meitt ^tnb. Qdj bttt itidit mitbe ; id) fe^e mic^ felten. ©e^en ®te fic^, id) merbe mid) aiic^ fe^en. (get-en @te \xd) nii^t auf jenen @ttil)t, er ift serbrod)en. Sir tooUen un§ auf biefe ^an! fe^en. Souife unb §enriette, !ommt nnb fe^t end) neben mi(^. Sarmn fi^^en (5te ntdjt? Qd) Ijabe jn laitge gcfeffen, id) iaim ntdjt meljr fi^cn. (55 tft mir ititmog- lidjf ben oau^cn S^ag 311 fil^en. So ift beiit ^riiber? (^i fi^t t)or ber Si^^ur* S)te ganje gamilie fag um ben Z\\d) I)ernm» 9}^etn ^ater berlangt, ha^ id) immcr fit^e. Sarnm fte^en (Sie, metne §errcn? ©et^cn @ie firf), 3^^) tan nldjt iange fte{)en, ic^ bin fogktc^ mitbe. -3^^) '^<^^^ i^^''cr etne ©tnnbe I)ter geftanben,unt auf btdj jn inarten. So ift betn §mtb, ^ar(? (gr Itegt ^tnter bent Dfen. ^Icin better lag geftern nm 3cf)n Uf)r noc^ int ^ttk, Sir l^aben bi^ je^t im ©rafe gelegen. 88. 2)er 6^or, the clioir, the quh-e ; j\tii]d)en, between ; bet ^laf^, tho room. Sit down, if you please. I beg you to sit down. I am sitting already. I sit down where I find room. Will you not sit down? I shall sit down by your side. Make room, that this gentleman may (can) sit down. You do not sit comfortably, (well,) Miss. I did not sit comforta- bly there; I have been sitting between your two sis- ters. Where were you sitting at church? We were sitting in the choir. These gentlemen are always standing; ask them to sit down. I have been stand- ing (for) a whole hour. 89. ©cBoren tucrben, to be born ; gefaHcn, to please ; ntl§faflett, to dis- please ; c§ gcfdllt mix I)ter, I like it here, I like this place ; gcfdlltgft, if you please ; fd}iceigen, to be silent. Stffen (Sie, itjann (Ste geboren ftnb ? Qd) bin im Womt 9}?at geboren. S^'^^^ ?3tenfcf) inirb geboren, nnt ^n fterben. liefer ^nabe iuurbe narfj bem S^obe fetneS Waters geboren. ®tefe§ ^nd) gefdllt ntir. Sjtefer ©arten n)nrbc nttr beffer gefaflen, luenn er grower n^cire. Tltin §nt iDtrb Qljucn ge* fallen. Sie gefiiflt e§ Qljnm ^ier? (?§ gefdllt ntir ^ler fe{)r gnt. S§ iDiirbe ntir aber nod) beffer gefa&en, luenn id) einige grcitnbe bei mtr Ij'dtk ; aHein ntetne grennbe gefaden fic^ anf bent Sanbe ntdjt. ^§ Ijat ntir tintner beffer anf bent Sanbe al§ in ber @tabt gefatlen. Sarum fc^nietgen (Bit? Qd) lann ixidjt f(^ir»etgen, toenn tc^ etn^a^ fe^e, n)a§ tntr ntigfdilt. ^tn funger 9}2enfii) ntng tntmer fdjtneigen, inenn ditcre Cente mit tinanber reben. ©djineigt, idj mil nidjt§ nteljr bauon (}bren 40. When were you born? I was born in the month of 100 September. Coriieille was born at Rouen. We are all born, in order to die. I am born to be unliappy I like this lady very much. I do not like it in the country. I liked it much better in the town. Do you like this place? We like it better here than at our house. Come here, if you please. That has not pleased me. Be silent. My aunt cannot be silent. We are silent when ladies speak. I shall not be silent. I have been silent too long. Why have you been silent? If I had been silent, I should have done better. 41. Slad), after. Jfiai^ unb nad), by degrees ; rtad) line t^or, always tlic same ; crjl, only, but; tie (Sette,. the side ; ba§ ^iib, the picture, the portrait; bie 2)ccmung, the opinion ; ber Xalt, the time, measure ; ber 5(nfcl)em, the appearances ; fpareri, to economize. !5)cine (gltern finb na(f) ®ott betne gro§teu SBoIjItljcitcr. 3(f) reife morgen nad) bonbon, imij ii^erbc erft xiad) brct SBorfjen itiieberlommen. ^ladj xodd)cv Seite mug man ge^en, urn nad)_ bem (Sdjloffe ju !ommen? Qd) mvhc nadj bem 3Ibenbe[fen ^u -3^nen fommen. !Dtefe§ -^ilb ift nad) ber 92atur gemalt. §err 9L tuar I)ter unb f)ai itac^ Qi-}nm gefragt. Wtm 5Infd)eine nad) \vxx\t bu bctnen ^^ro^eg terlieren. IDIetner 9}2einung nad) iDcrbe id) iljn geintnnen. ^icfe SBaare irirb nad) ber (Sile t)er!auft. 31)^* ^rubcr fleibet fief) tmmer nad) ber 9}2obe. (Sic tan^en nidjt nad) bem Zattc, Qd) Ijabt bir gcratljcn ^u jparen, bamtt bn nad) nub nad) retrf) inerbeft ; allein hn lebft nac^ tute t)or. 3ii) beit)oI)ne etne (Stube, bie nad) bem ©artcn ge^t. ^lad) bem, \va^ QfjV ^ruber mtr gefagt l^at, finb Bk mtt Q^xmx Scorer fel)r ^ufrieben. ^lad)^ bem \mv eine (Stnnbc gelnartet f)atten, gingen tDtr fort 42. ®ci, with, at. S;tc 2amxc, the humor ; btc 9(ngclcgen'^eit, the afiiiir ; bcr (Sticl, the handle ; bte Jllingc, the blade ; btc (5'f)rc, honor ; bie (2d;la(^t, tlie battle ; cin Sflomer, a Roman ; ha§ ©eBiirtgfcjl, the birthday ; »crficl)crn, to assure ; fid) crfunbtgen, to inquire; anucfjiitcn, to accept; Ibegcgiicit; to meet ; J)olcn, to fetch ; iimfommcu, to perish ; in S'^raueit anshxt- ^tn, to burst into tears ; lDid}tig, important. Qd) Wax biefen 3}torgcn bet -bem |)rcnfji[d'jen ©efanbten. Sr luar bet fel)r guter l^anne, naljm mid) bci ber ganb nub terficl)cvte mid), bag er fid) 1} cute nod) bet bem DJcintfter nad) 101 mtintt i'luQelecjcnljcit crfimb-ujcn incrbc, 3d) f^'^^^^ W^^ ^^^'^ Zi\d]t, mtb bacfjtc kt mix felbft, baj er inciueu Sc[ud) iud)t amieljmen lt)erbe. S^^ ^jfitte ehieu inidjtigen ^rtef bet mir, ben id) U}m iibergebeu Ijabe. ijaben (Sie @e(b bei fid)? ^ct mem iDofjucn @ic? S'a) iKoIjiie ualje bet ber ^irdje, nidji roeit t)on ber ^'oft Dteljuien ^k haQ> 9}^e[fer hd bent @ticl unb ntc^t bei ber ^linge, ^cr (Sine nal)in il)n bet bent ^opfe, ber SInbere bet hm -^einen. Q^dj Derfidjere (Sie bet nteiner (gf}re. ^cf) begegncte iljin beint ^erait^geljen an5 bent ^^ca^ tcr. ^ir inerben e§ il)nt bei ^elegenljeit fageit. SBaritm fi^^en ettcn, to bet; Ui\tm, to do; bctreten, to set foot upon ; freitaffcu, to set at liberty. !5)iefer ©enerat trcigt bie Saffen gegcn fein 33ater(anb, Ser gegcn fein Ocmiffcn Ijanbctt, ^anbelt gcgen ®ott unb i)a§ @efe^. Qd) bemunbere feine Siebe gegcn feiue gamilte unb feine Serene gegcn fcine greuube. lluferc gitrftin ift mol)(* 101 tl)dt'ig gcgcu bic 5(rmcn. doriolau Wax imbanfuar gcgcn fein ^aterlaub. (5r ift freiijelaffen luorben oegcit fein 33er|precl]en, bag 2anb md)t iDieber 311 bctreten. -3d) ijahz {()n gcgen Qitit^^ timg bc3al)tt. ^d) ^""^^^c jcljn gegcn ein^, ha^ er nidjt trie* berfommt. ©iefer ^icnft ift nidjtd gcgen benjenigen, ben (Sie mir gclciftct I)aben. ©iefeS ^orf liegt gegen 9corben. (Sr fc^Iief gcgen jn^ei lU)r ein, unb ftanb gegen ncun UI)r tnieber anf. dWin Snfet roirb gegen (Enbe be^ Sinter^ an= fommcn. 48. SBenn, if, Tvlien ; ob/ if, whctiier ; \x)ann; wlien. iSiciif because ; tt)dr)renb, wliile, during ; bcr diati}, the advice ; Hug, \vise ; untertjaltcub, amusing ; i)crbietcn; to forbid. ^d) inerbe tf)n gemig be(oI)nen, n^enn id) mtt t^m jiifrieben bin. Sd) itierbe e§ S^nen fagen, iDenn 3utraitltd)e Xljkxdjm freunb(td) in fcine S^oljnung. 9cun i3icite c0 bie ^rofamett itnb l!ornd}cn auf, bie l^on fcinem 3:i|'d]e fielen, xmb bie £inber bey SanbmannS Itebten bag 23ot3(ein felji\ $iber al§ nun ber grit!)Iin(] lutebcr in ba§ Sanb fant unb bie ®ebii[dje fidj betaubten, ba bffnete ber Sanbmann fein 75cnfter, unb ber !(etne ©aft entflol) in ba§ nalje SSalbdjen, uv^y bante fein DIeft imb fang ein fro^lidieS Steb(^en, Unb fielje, aU ber Sinter tnieberfefirte, ba !am ba§ D^otl}- feljidjcn aberma(§ in bie 2Bof)nnng be§ SanbntannS, unb Ijatte fein Seibdjcn tuitgebrac^t. !l:er Sanbmann aber unb feinc .^inber frcuten fid} feljr, aU fie hk beiben 3:f)ierc^en fa{)en, bie fo gutraulic^ um^ erf djauten. Unb bie llinber fagten : S^ie ^^ogeldjen fe^en un§ an, ai§ ob fie un'3 etli^aS fagen iDoL^ten. S)a antmortcte bcr S>ater : Senn fie reben fonnten, fo mitrben fie fagen : Qiitvaimi crlDecft R^^trauen, unb Siebe er^ ,^cugt ©cgeniiebe. 5. THE YOICE OE JUSTICE = Sin rcidjer d^lanxir Stamens (SI]rt)fe$, gebot feincn .^ned> ten, cine arme SBittme fammt iljren lEinbern au^3 ifjrer So!j^ nung ju tiertreiben, wdl fie ben geiDi^finlic^en 3'^u§ ntd^t ju ga^Ien t^ermodjte, SU§ bie Sjiener famen, fpraa^ ba§ SBeib : S(4 t)er3ief)et ein iDenig ; t^ielleidjt, bag euer §err fidj unfcr crbarme ; id) tdiit ju \i)m geljen unb i^n Utitn. ©arauf gtng hk Sittire ^n bem reidjen Mann mit i^rcn uier ^^inbern, einS lag !ran! barnieber, unb alle f(el}ten, fie nic^t in t3erftogen. (5ijri)fe§ aber fpra^ : Wtim iBefe^te !ann id] nidjt cinbent, e§ fci bcnn, bag SU^ Sucre ^djnlb fogleidj be3al)(et. 3I)a iDcinte bie 93tuttcr bittcrlic^ unb fagte : 2Idj, bie ^flcge eincS franfen IxinbeS I;at all nieinen S3erbicn[t i^crge^rt unb ntcine Hrbeit geljinbcrt. Unb bie ^inbcr ffcljtcn nut bcr IDtuttcr, fie nidjt gu t)erftogen. SCbcr dfjrljfc^ iranbtc fidj meg noii iljncu unb ging -in fcit? t 109 G3ar[cuf)au^ nub (cijte [icfj aiif ha^^ %>ot]kv, 311 ntljeu, line ci pffcgtc. (So mar aber ciit frfjiDiilcr S^ag, unb hidjt am ©ar- tcn[aa( ffog ctit (Strom, ber uerbrcitcte Fciiljding, unb co iDar cine (Stide, bag fein Sitftdjcu fid) regte. ©a fjorte (2f}rl)[e§ baS ©eUopel be^3 ©djiif^ am lifer, aber c§ tonte ilim gletd) bem@ciinnfetbcr ^inber bcr armenSBiltlne; imb cr tnarb imru{)tg auf feincm ^^olfter. ©arnadj Ijordjte er auf ba§ $}Laitfd)en be^3 ©trome^ unb c§ bitufte i^n, aU ruljt er an bcm ©eftabc cine» uncnblidjcn SJ^eere^, nnb er toa^U fid) auf feinem ^^fiiljle. 5ld3 cr nun tnicber (jordjte, crfdjoti an^ ber gerne ber Xion* ncr cine§ ©eroitterCv imb er glanbte bte Sttmme bc§ ®eridjt^3 ju t)ernel)men. 5)tnn ftanb er ploi^Iid) anf, eiite nad) §anfc nnb gebot fcU nen ^nedjten, ber armen SBtttoe ha^^ §an§ in offnen, 5lber fie mar fammt ifjren ^inbern in ben Salb ge3ogen unb nii'== genb^^ 3U finben. llnterbeffen mar ba§ ©emitter ^inanfge30' gen, unb e§ bonnerte imb fiel ein gemaltiger 9iegen. dtjrijfe^ aber mar doK Unmntt) nnb manbelte umfjcr. Im anbern Slage uernaljm (2l)ri}fe§, ba§ !ran!e ^Qinb fei im Satbe gcftorben unb bie 9}h:tter mit htn anberen I)inmeg= ge3ogen. fca marb tijm fein ©arten fam.mt bem ©aal unb •poffter 3umiber, unb er genoj] nidjt mcljr bie 0if)(nng be^3 ranfd)enben ©trome?. ^alb nadjl)er fiet (5f)rt)fe§ in eine ^Qranftjeit, unb immer in ber §i^^e be§ gieberS uernaljm er beo ®d)i(fe5 ©e(i5pet nnb ben fanfdjcnben @trom unb ba^3 bnmpfe S^ofen bc§ ©emitter^, ?(ifo t)erfdjicb er. 6. THE PEACHES. tgin Sanbmann hvadjk an^ ber ^taht fiinf ^firfidje mit, bie fdjdnftcn, bie man felien fonnte. (Seine llinber aber faljen bicfe grudjt 3um erften d)lak; beof)alb rimnberten unb frenten fie fid) fel)r iiber bie fc^onen Stepfei mit ben rotI)lid)en ^acfen nnb ben: 3arten glaum, ©aranf uertl)ei[te ber ^ater fie untcr feine Dier ^naben, unb eine erljictt bie 9}tntter. 5lm 5(benb, aU bie ^inber in ha^$ ^d)laffdmmerlein gingen, fragte ber 23atcr : 9cnn, mic I)abcn euc^ hk fc^onen 3(epfc( gefd)me(ft? §errlic^, (icber 33ater ! fagte ber ^leltefte. Go ift eine fdjonc grnd)t, fo fdnbertid) nnb fo fanft Don ©efd)mad\ -3d) fiabe 9* 110 inir hen ■^tclii [ortifaiU Dcrn;al}rt unh wnti mir baraii^3 eiiien ^aiim ci^ielicri. ^vav) ! fagtc bcr ^atei\ ^a§ ^ei{3t Ijau$>I)a[teri['ii filr bic 3utoft gcfovflt, line c§ bem ^'anbnmnn ge3iemt, Qd) l)abe bie meiuige fogletdj aufgegeffen, rkf ber Qitngfte, imb h^n (^tetit fortgemorfcn, unb bie DJcutter Ijat inir bie gdlfte mn bcr iljrigeit gegcben. D, ba§ fcljuiccft fo fii^ itr.b 5cr[cf)mil5t titt 2}2unbe! 3cun, fagte ber iBater, bit ^aft ^tuar md)t fc^r Kug, abcr boc^ natltrlicij unh ttacf) Snblidjer 2Sei[e ge^aubett. gilr bic tdtgljeit ift aitcf) noc^ Diaum gemtg tm i^eben. !l)a beganu ber ^iDcite a(t an§ Ufet 112 iinb (cgcn ifjit in elit kfoiibeit^ ba^ii p,c6aiitcv 3ci}if|, ba^ tfjn niif cine anbere Sn]d brtiigt. ^ie 3nfcl ift tuitft inib obe ; jcncr, ber nocfj uor inenigeu Xagen cm macl)tii3er ^ouig tear, fommt Ijicr imdt an imb finbct lucbcr lliitcrt(}aueit nocb grcunbc. 9ttcmanb rdmmt an fetncm llnglitcfe 3:i)ei(, itub er miij tit bte[cm iDitfteit Sanbe cm traurige^ unb fitmuicmolle^ ^'ebcn fiiljrcn, tpcmt cr feht ^afjv ntcf)t flitg angeiDcnbct fy\t l)iaclj bcr ^^crbamtimg bc§ atten .QouigS geljt ba5 ^oi! bem nciicn, belt tljm bte 33orfeI}img be§ 5tt(macf)ttgcn jebcS Sa^)V oljiie 5Iu§naI)me \cnhtt, auf bie gciDoIjitUdie SBeij'e eutgegcn imb nimmt i()n mtt gletcfjcr greubc, iDte ben i^origcn, anf. "^jk?^, gcrr ! tft ba§ eirtge ©efe^ btefe^ ^^eirf)e^3, ba§ fein Hoitig ipii^rcnb fetner ^cgternng anf()eben !amt." — „^inb bcnn ancf) ineine ^orgcinger," fragte ber ^ontg inciter, „t)on biefcr fnrjcn S^auer iljrcr §oI)eit unterriditct geinefcn V' — „.^:cinem Don xiyatn/' antinortcte bcr ^e^ter, „tnar biefeS @c[e^ bcr ^crganglic^feit imbc!annt: aber ^inige lichen fid) non bcm ©fan^c, ber tijren 2:^ron nmgab, blenben ; fie t)crgagcn bie tranrigc 3itinnft, unb Derlebten i[)r -9^^«^r oljne tncife jn fcin. Stnberc beraufdjtcn fid) in ber ©ilBig^'eit if)rc§ ©litcfcS ; fie gctranten fid) nid)t, an bie iniifte S^fcl jU benfen, ano gnrd)t, bie 9{nncl)m(id)!eit bcy gegenn^drtigcn ©ennffeS gir ncrbittern ; nnb fo tauincltcn fie, roie S^rnnfene, an§ eincr greube in bie anbere, bi§ i[)re Qcit nm wax imb fie in ba^ ©d)iff geinorfcn inurben. SBenn ber nnglltdUc^e STag !ain, fo fingcn 2(tle an, fid) gu bcf(agcn nnb t^re S3erblenbnng gn bcfenf^en ; aber nun inar e§ gn fpat, nnb fie innrbcn o[)ne ©d)onimg bctn (Elcnbe iibcrgebcn, ba§ fie cnnartete unb bem fie bnrd) SBei^oljcit utdit fjatten tiorbcugen inoKcn." 9. CONTINUATIO^T. •Dicfe (5r^aI)Iimg beS ®eifte$ crfiiKte ben llonig mit gnrc^t, r fd}auberte t)or bem 8cbjtdfal bcr Dorigen £onige ^uritd: unb It) itnf d)te, ti)rcm Ungliide ju entge^en. (5r fal) mit (Sd)rccfen, ba5 fd)on einige ^od)en i3on bicfem fnrgen S'a^^re uerffoffcH iDctrcn, unb \ia^^ cr cilen mli^te, bie iibrigen STage feiner ke- gicrnng befto beffer gu niiijcn. „3Beifer ^c.^^icr!" fprad).cr 311 bem ©ciftc, bn I)aft mir mein Htnftige^? ^djid'fat unb bie lur^e "Sjancr meincr !onigItd)en d)lad)t entbccft ; aber id) bittc bid), [age mir and), roa^3 id) tl)im iniif?, H'Cim id) baC> Qkwh nxv^ 113 iicr S^onjctitijer ucnuetbeii voiti." — ^Grinucrc hid), |)crr !' autlDortcte hex ©cift, „ba6 bit nad't aitf unfere -3^^[ct O'^^oiU' men Mft ; benn eben fo tinrft bit lincber (jtnaiivgeljen itnb nic^ mnl§ guritd'feljreu. S^3 ift alfo iiuv cm ctn3ic]cg Wittd moo* (id), bem SJtaiiGcI t)or3iibeugcn, bcr in jencm ^anbe ber SScr^ Iicmnimg broljt : menu hu c§ ndmttcfj frit(|tbar mad)]t imb mtf Gimnoljiiern befel^-eft. SDieS ift naci) miferen ©efe^en t)cr- (jOimt, imb bcinc llntert^ancn finb bir fo follfommcn gc()or* fam, bag fie Ijinget)cn, tpo bit fie Ijtnfenbeft. (Bd)\dt alfu eine DTccnge Slrbeit^Ieitte l^iniiber imb lag tie tnitften gelbcr in frndjtbare 5(ccfer uertranbcln ; banc (Stdbte imb S3oiTatIj^' {)iinfcr nnb t^erforge fie mit a((cn notljbitrftigen Sebenvmitteln. 33cit Ginem Sort : bercite bir cin nene^ 9ieidj, beffen Gin* moljncr bid) nad) bciner S3crbannung mit grenben anfneljmcn. 3iber cite, lag fcinen 2(ngcnbti(^ imgeniitjt i)oriibcr i3cl)cn ; benn bie 3cit ift fur^, nnb je mc^r bn jnm SInban bciner fiinf^ tigcn Sol)nimg tl)nfi, befto g(ndlid)er luirb bein 5InfentI)a{t bort fein. S^enfe, bein Qodyc ift morgen fd)on um, nnb ni'ii^e bcine grciljcit mie cin Hnger glitd)tting, bcr bem ^crbcrben ciitgetjcn mid. Senn bn meinen 9vatl) t)erad)teft ober ^au^ bcrft, fo bift bn t)erIorcn, nnb (angers Gtcnb ift bein Soo§.'^ 5^cr £i)nig mar ein Hnger iO^ann, nnb bie 9icbe bc§ (i)ci^ ftc^o gab feiner Gntfd)(iegnng nnb feiner 3^I)dtig!eit gtiiget. Gr fanbte fogteid) eine SJicnge Untcrt[}anen ah: fie gingcn mit grenben nnb griffen ha§> Serf mit (Sifer an. 2)ie S^fel fing an fid) gn oerfd)oncrn, nnb e^e fcd)§ 9}2onben Dergangcii maren , ftanben fd)on Stdbte auf i[)ren bln^cnbcn Slnen S^cffcn nngead)tet lieg bcr ^ijnig in fcinem (^nfer md)t nad)- er fanbte tmmer me()r Ginrooliner i)inUber; bie fotgcnbcn maren nod) frenbiger, aU bie erften, ha fie in ein fo mo()I angebantcS Sanb gtngen, ba§ i^re grennbe nnb SInoermanbten bcmof)nten.. 10. THE EIS^D. llntcrbeffcn fam ba^3 (Snbe be^ -3<^^i*cv iimner ndl)er. uTie oorigen ^onige fatten oor bicfem ^Ingenblid'e igegtttert, biefcr fal) tl)in mit ^el)nfnd)t entgegen; benn er gtng in ein ?anb, mo er fid) bnrd) fcinc ffnge 2:i)dtig!eit eine banernbe SBoI)- nnng gebant I)attc. — 'a^cv beftimmte S^ag erfd)icn cnblid), S^er ^onig mnrbe in fcinem ^^atafte ergriffen, fcincS 5^ia^ bem§ nnb fciua* foniglidicn .^.(cibnng beraubt nnb auf haenfdjen, bk fid) b(o§ mit irbifd)en grenben befd)aftigen, o^ne an i^r Sebcn nad) bem Xobe- jn benfen; fie merben mit einigem (Slenb befrraft, mci( fie mv bem Xtjrone be§ Sidmilc^ttgen mit gtinben erfdieincn, bie an gnten Scrfen (ecr finb. V C A B U L A r. Y . 1. (S^a^mctftcr, treasurer; ^irtenftaB, shepherd's-staff ; 5(int, office; fid^ cmvcricl)aHnc5cn, to rise ; l>crtlagcn, to accuse ; Berauben, to rob ; dse; itac^ finbltc^cr SBcifc, chiidlike ; ^anbeln, to act; il(ugf)cit, prudence, wisdom; 9laum, room; begins nen, to begin ; jammcln, to gather, to pick up ; aufflopfcn, to open ; Slcxn, kernel; jd}uttcln, to shake; bcwafjrcn, preserve; uiiBefaiigcn, unaffected; cffcu, frankh^; ©cBvaud), use ; Sljl'dnC; tear. ©uttpttg; Kmd, charitable; fd)enfeiT, to give, to present; <2d)tff, ship; fcftlid), precious; auSn'ifteu, to fit out, to equip; fcgclu, to sail; lt>ud)cr!t, to make profit; @ctX)inn, gain ; !aum, scarcely; (iec, sea; {)efttg, violent; (Sturm, storm; crf}cbcTt, to rise; illippe, clitf; fd}ettcm; to wreck; bcvftnfen, to sink; @cfaf)rte; companion; unu fcmmcn, to perish; crreid)ett, to reach; mit gcnauer Dtotf}, narrowly ; Ufcr, shore ; naitt, naked ; <^ulfc, help ; ticfcr {)inctngef}cn, to plunge into, to proceed farther; fern, far, distant; crbUcfen, to perceive; DJtcnge, crowd; entgegcn fcmmen, to come to meet; ^cil, prosperity; blessings ; SBvigcrt, carriage ; SJuintcl, cloak ; feeftetgen, to ascend ; tie 23ornef)men, the nobles; um if)n l)ertrcten, to surround him; (Sib, oath; anfangS, in the beginning; opcrrlid)fcit, splendor; 2;raum, dream; ^ortbauer, continuation ; tt)unbcrbar, wonderful ; ©egebcndcit, event, adventure* iinmberlid}, strange ; bejaiibem, to enchant; §umb. (ing, stranger; befonbere, singular; (£tttc, custom. 8. Duntgiertg, curious; Itrfad^c, cans-e, reason; (S'rIjcBung, elevation; ?luflbjung, solution; 9]atl)fe[, riddle; "ma^ wixh au5 mir wcrben, what will become of me; ©cift, spirit; bcwcf)nen, to inhabit; al(mdd;ttg, almighty; lanbert, to disembark; entgcgencilcit, to hasten towai-ds ; cvfcnncn, to recognize, to acknowledge ; Dbcrl)crr, sovereign- D^cgic; rung, government; bauern, to last; yerfiic^en, to pass; iincbcr cr; jd-Kincn, to reappear; SSiirbc, dignity ; cntl'c|cn, to depose ; beraubcn, lo deprive ; (Sd)mutJ, ornaments ; \mi\t imb obc, desert and desolate ; r.uad)ttg, powerful; Untcrt[)an, subject; 3:t}cil, part, interest; himmcr; l^cU, sorrowful; iBerbannung, banishment; 23orlcf)ung, providence; 5liK°nciI)mc, exception; aufncl)mcn, to receive; l^crig, preceding; 9\ctd}, kingdom ; auf(}cben, abolisli; ffiorgdngcr, predecessor; Saucr, dura- tion ; <§cf)cit, sovereignty; fficrgdnglid)fcit, transientness ; (5Han^^ B])lendor; fe(cnbcn, to ])lind; Snfunft, future; i^cvlcbcn, to pass, to 117 Bpeud ; beravifd)cn, to intoxicate ; (Siifi'gfeit, sweetness; fia) gctraucu, tc dare; 5(nncl)mlict}fcit, delight, sweetness; gc^cnwartig, present; @cnu6 enjoyment; ycr^tttcni, to embitter; taumcln, to stagger, to pass; truii fen, tipsy; um fcirt, to be passed; SScrblcnbung, blindness, fascination fcufjcn, to sigh ; (£d)cming, forbearance, mercy ; (Slcnb, miser}' ; uber f^cbcn, to deliver; iiorbcugcn, to prevent. C5rja()Iung, recital, story; eV|Vificn, to fill; juri'ufidjaubcrn, to tremble, €d)irtl\il, fate; entgclicn, to escape ; (£d)recfcn, fright; bte u&rt^cn, th< remaining ; bcfto bcffer, so much the better; nii^en, to turn to profit , Vcrmcibcn, to avoid ; ftd) crinncrn, to remember ; 2)iittet, mea?»s ; SJtartcjcl, want ; broI)cn, to threaten ; ndmlid}, namely ; that is to say ; frud)t&iH ;nad}cn, to fertilize ; befe|cn, to fill ; ycrgonnen, to permit ; tJoUfommcn, perfect ; gcf)orfam, obedient ; StrbcitSlcutc, workmen ; ^clb, field ; 5(cEcv) field; baucn, to build; S3orratf)§^au§, magazine; ycviorgcu, to provide; notf)burtttg, necessary; £cbcn§mtttcl, victuals; bcrcitcn, to prepare; yorubergcl)cn, to pass ; nugenii^t, without profit ; Slnbau, culture ; SScfjUUng, habitation, dwelhng; 5{ufcntf)alt, stay, residence; 33cr: berben, ruin, destruction ; t»crad)ten, to despise ; fRatf), advice ; jaubevn, to tarry; ^co§, fate; Olcbc, discourse, speech; (Sntfdjlte^ung, resolu- tion ; !?l)attgfcit, activity ; ?5tuge(, wing ; ha§ iBcvf angrcifcn, to set to work; (SifcV, zeal; ftcljen, to be ; btii^cnb, blooming; ?Iue, pasture; bcfl'cu ungcad)tct, notwithstanding; nari;ta[[cn, to relent; augebaut, cultivated ; 5lmKTU\inbtc, relations. 10. Uutcvbcftcn, meanwhile; nat}cr fommcn, to approach; j'ltcni, to tremble; ^^lugcublic!, moment; mit (£c()nfiid)t cntgegenfc()cn, to await with impatience; bcftimuit, fixed; erfd}Ctncn, to appear; eubltd), at last; crgrcifcn, to seize; beraubcn, to deprive; unyermcibf id), inevi- table; $5cvbanminglort, exile ; .^au^^t, head ; iDdljren, to last ; unycr^ IPclflid)/ never-fading ; S3(uincnfTam, wreath of flowers ; fd)mutfcn, to adorn; belcr)ncrt, to reward; Unftcrbltdjfcit, immortahty; eWtg, eternal, everlasting ; f crtfcnbcn, to send away ; ©eburt, birth ; 2Bclt, world ; ivcinen, to weep; bci^crftGi^cn, to await; untcrrtd)tcn_, to instruct; 2Borf, work; vervid)tcit, to do; luidjbcnfcn, to reflect; t(]5rid;t, foolisli; irbtfd}, worldly; bcjdidfttgen, to occujy; Ictt, cmj^ty 118 COLLECTION OF MUCH USED . PHRASES. L Thanks to God' I owe it to you, God forbid I would to God I very well, I agree to that, directly, presently, by and by, this minute, to-morrow, then I as quickly as possible, as soon as possible, at the latest, at the most, to have done, ' never mind, come for it, send for it, all in all, by the by, just in time, importunely, about nothing at all, not by far, have done with it I by degrees, by little and little, by ourselves, heedlessly, by turns, it is my turn, by snatches, to my taste, mothinks, in my way, ©Dtt fet S^an!! id) t^erbanfe e^ bir; bemal^re ©ctt! ' tocdte ©Dtt! gut, bag la^ i(^ gelten, jetjt gleicf) ; fcglei^ ; ben Slugenblic! ; auf mcrgen ! fo [(^nell ai§> mh^iii) ; aufio eljefte; fpdtefteng ; I}cd}ften0 ; fertig fein; ba§ t^ut md)t» ; ^okn Sieeg, lajjen Siee» I;clen ^Uey giifammen genomirten ; • t^a fdllt mir ein ; 3ur rec^ten S^it ; giir Un3eit; inn nicety nnb nnbev n{(^t^ ; bei meitem nid}t; {)5re auf bamit! nad} unb nac^; imter »ier Slugen; cl;ne Ueberlegung; tpedifel^meife, nad) ber Dici^e; bie ^ldh^ i[t an mir ; [ti'idineife ; nad} meinem ©efd^made; nad} nTeinem ^lebiinfen; nad) inciner 3(rt ; 119 well-grounded, among ourselves, unwillingly, till I see you again, by one's self, to the right, to the left, purposely, delightful, as usual, for my part, joke apart, Cheap, pitiful, against my inclination, unheard of, not to be believed, With a loud voice, with a low voice, what is the use of that ? straight along, partly — partly, that is to say, that is yet to be seen, to be, to do, at the end of a year, quite sure, in case of need, f the worst comes to the worst, repeatedly, at random, at break of day, at night-fall, in the heat of summer, in the cold of winter, sheltered from the rain, &c. a*- sunrise, 2. griinbli(^ ; unter unio ; ungern; au^ S>ieber[el;en; fiir [id; adein; red}tj§, VmU; mil g'lei^, ab[id}tn^; 3um ©nt^iiden; me geit)oI}nli(^ ; \va§> mid) betrifft; Sd}er5 bet 6eite. n)D[)Ifeil; gum (Srbavmen ; Iriber SSiden; itnerl;5rt ; urtglaubiid;; mit lauter (Stimme ; mit leifer Stimmc; lt)03u 'oa§'^. gerabe gu; t!)eil^— t^eiB; 'i)a^ ^eif5t, namli(^ ; ba§ fragt fid}, \\ii) befinben; 11 ad} 33erlauf eine» 2d\:)Xi^'; ganj gemif.; im 3totf;[alIe; loenn'g gum 2leuf3erften Icmuit; ju iDieberljolten Wlakn; aiif'y G)eratl)emol;[; beim Mn^xud) be^ Sage^ , bei einbred^eiiber Tiad)t; mitten im ©ommer; im f;drte[ten SCinter; gcfd}ul^t Iter bem S^xegen 2C. ; mit 'Soiiuenautgang. 120 To believe liim, to hear him, to speak candidl}^, to see him, you would take him for a common man, all but tvfo dollars, he is fond of flowers, as far as you can see, by dint of reading, without his parents' know- ledge, beginning from the first, from afar, by day, by night, even and odd, suppose, by force, thunderstruck, willingly, pi'ay, candidly, in good h.umor, in bad humor, as well as one can, more and more, worn raan iljvix v3iaiikn fell; Yocnn man iljn fo rcbcn l;cvt; Pllenljersig cjefagt; Winn Sie il;n jo feljen, [o fell: ten Sie il)n fiir einen gemei nen DJiann IjalUn ; hiS> auf gtoei 2:l;aler ; er {[t ein ^reunb »cn 33[umen , fo iDcit, alg ba^ ©e[id;t reid^t; biirc^ t)iele^ Se[en; cl;ne SBifjen feiner (lltern: ocm etftert an gered^net; i?on SBeitem ; am 2;age, be^ Tia(^tB ; gleid} luib imgleii^ ; SefelU; tiiit ©elnalt; roie i:cm tenner geriil^tt; gcrn ; id; bitte; aufri^tig ; guter Saime; iibler Saune; fo gut man fann , immer mel;r. In all my life, ever, never to be forgotten, all at once, indeed? so much the more, further, from the bottom, by v/ord of mouth, with nil my heai-t. in meinem 2ehcn, i^cn |e f)cr; xmi^ergellUd} ; auf einmal; iTjirfli^? im (s-rnfte? um fo mef)r; ferner ; fen Grnnb anx>\ miinblid}; i:rn gan^cni -pev^cn; 121 what are you about? what is the matter ? by name, by sight, for want of money, of time^ you have no reason, well, what are you talking about ? anew, every year, every day, by writ, by rote, (to be) on the point (to be) going, on the very spot, in the first place, in the se- cond, in the last place, in the mean time, in some way, on the way, on the road, in return, in the open air, in broad day-light, in the open street, )[va§ gibt'^? tva^ \\i Io>3? bem 9^amen nadj; toon 2lnfef)en; aii^ 2Ranget an ©elb, an 3eit, 6ic l;aben n{d)t llr[ad}e; nun, motoon ift bie 9iebe? oon 3ieuem ; jd{;rli(^, tdgltd}; fc^riftlii^, au5ir»enbi{j ; int ^egri[f [ein ; vitt Ort unb Stelle; gum Grften, jum Bi^eiten, gum £e|ten ; iinterbeffen; ein{gcrmaf3cn ; untern^eg^ ; bagegen, gum (Srfahe; in ber freien Su[t; am {;ellen S^age; an\ freier (£tra{3e. The other day, excessively, topsy-turvy, here enclosed, sooner or later, confusedly, whether you like or no. you have hurt me, far from the point, on purpose not by far, to be sure, what is still worse. neuHd} ; fiber alle 2)ua^en ; unterft ^u cberft, !D|3fiiber ; betfolgenb, inliegenb; liber !ur3 ober lang ; burdjeinanber; man mag lucllen cber m t^ut tiiir etwas mef;; ma^ beliebt? fein Sie fo gut; eg i[t nic^t con Sebeutung ; \Da§ ^ii)a\iet eg? tcpp! abgemad)t! it)cmit ©ertreiben 6ie fid} bie 3eit? id) iinterf)alte mid} init Sefen ; id) e[fe fef}r gern Obft; er trinft lieber 2Bein aU ^m; id) and] md)t, 5)em §immel fei ^ant ; iDorbei \ai)xen, reiten ; 6. bag gef)t gut; bag gef}t nii^t; er foU nai^ ^aufe tommen ; 6ie [inb iro!}! red^t gu beflagen; ba ift meiue Sd^eere; tuan flingett; er l^at ^fjnen uid)tg ^u Seibe getfjan; bag fagte er luir; ^olgeubeg antrocrtete id) i^m, fo finb 8{e; fo fcunen wiv eg uiad}en; mid} friert, mir ift voaxm, inul bungert, mid} burftet; ma? feblt ^hun'^. 123 I am sick, he has a competency, I am much concerned about it, to have something on one's mind, you have but to speak, he needs but follow me, you have but to come for me about six o'clock, I cannot but praise him, you may depend upon it, niir i[t iibel; ci- f)at [ein Sluefominen ; ey liegt mir am ^er^en ; et\vas> auf bem ^erjen \)dben , £ie biirfen nur reben ; er barf mir nut folgeii ; 8ie biirfen mi(^ nur gegen fcc^3 Ul)x abl)okn; id) !ann il;n nur (oben ; Sie fonnen fid} barauf i^erlaffen. 7. It is a pity, I know nothing about it, I never saw the like of it, there are eighteen of them, (there are three people, want- ing to speak to you, what is the matter there ? three months ago, six months ago, fifteen months ago, I have not seen you for such a long time, it will be crowded, there is nothing to say against it, it is impossible to bear it, to make him hear reason, ^ is there anything more beau- i tiful than this garden ? he is a man of his word. Qiy daughter got the fever yesterday, we shall certainl}^ have a thunderstorm ey i[t ^Bdjahc ; id} mei^ ntd}ty bat)Dn; be^gleii^en Ijabe ic^ nie ge^ fel}en ; ey finb il}rer ad)^t1)n ; ey t^erlangen brei 9}'tenfd}en, Sie gu fprec^en ; may gibt e^ ba? )ocx brei ^Ronaten, einem \)alhc\\ ^d)x, fiinf ^Sierteljabren ; ic^ l)abe Sie fd)Dn fo (ange nid}^ gefeben; cy U)irb ticU n?erben; bagegen ift nidjt^ gu fagen; ey ift nid}t mcglic^ au^3uf}alten, i^n 3ur 33ernunft §u bringen; gibt c^ etiDaic Sd}5nere^ aly biefen ©arten? er ift ein Wiann »cn SBort.; meine 3:od}ter befam geftern bay ^ieber; w'n befcmmen gemiJ3 ein d'e* Wlttex ; 124 he has had one, and you shall have one likewise, I have but o^lanced at it, er I;at mvS be!ommen unb 6ic follen and) eing l)aben; 16:) t:)ahe Tiur einen ^M barauf gemov[en. They are already gone for it, how far have you got ? I do not know what I am about, you have hit at the right point, that is too much, it is the same with all animals, it will be of no use, I have said so all along, what is to be done ? I do not know, which way to turn, come along? what do you want, what is the name of that ? what is the meaning of that ? to faint, it is not to me, you must say that, it is, because I have been ill, why, he did not know him, Titan beforgt ei3 fd^on; \vk weit [inb 8ie? id} lt)eif3 nid}t, tnoran id} bin ; Sie r;abene^ getrofi'en; ba» gel^t gu tt)eit; fo ift e^ mit alien %f)kxm', e§ mirb nic^t^ l^elfen ; id} l;aBe e^ immer gefagt; )ma§ fell gefd^eljen ? id} n)ei^ md)t, rool)tn id} mtc^ iDenben foil ; fommmit! \vaK> roolkn 6ie? me ^ei^t bay? it»a§ Ijei^t 'i^a^'^. cl)nmdd}tig merben mir ntrtfi'en Sie ba^ nid}t fagen; ba^ maii)t, ireil id) ixant ges mefen bin ; er fannte \^n ja nid}t. 9. I am very glad of it, I am sorry for it, I am very comfortable, I feel very well, r feel very ill, to be well oif, he has paid him a visit, e^ i[t niir [el)r lieb; e» t1:)ut mir leib ; eio {ft mir ted}t wol)! ; mir i\V§ fd}led}t ju ?i)hit[}e; l'Dol}U}abenb [ein ; er ^at il}m cincn S3e[ud) gc* madit; r 125 we have been tc see Mr. N. who is ill, he is coming directly, it is going to strike twelve o'clock, he has enlisted, what things are these, to was just going out, what shall become of you ? don't believe it, have you finished the book'! how do you do ? how are you getting on ? it gets on well, that is a matter of course, I am going to tell you, what are you about ? he does not succeed in it, my honor is at stake, I shall come to see you, does this suit you ? this conduct does not become you, go to meet somebody, leave me alone, to be circumstantial, 10 mv I;a&en 5erni Dl. befud^t, ber !ran! i[t; cr it)irb gleid} fommen ; cy iinrb gleic^ glDcIf [d;Iagen; er i[t ©olbat gemorben; iDay fixr Sac^en [inb bag ? er ipollte ebcn I}inaug ; toay foil auy Sb^en mevbcn ? glauben 6ie ey ja nid}t ; I)aben 6{e ha§> S3ud7 au§gele[en ; mie gel;t'g? luie Qel)V§ ^l)nm'^^ e§ gel;t gut; bay ux\U^t fic^ 'con folbft; id} trill (miif3) ^^mn fagen , voa§> fangen Sie an? eg gelingt ifjm nid)t? meine Gbre \kl)t babei nuj bcin Spiele ; id} iDerbe 6{e befud^en ; fte^t S^nen bag an ? biefeg S3etragen gesienit eiid^ nid^t; ^emanbem entgegen ge|)en; gef)' unb laf3 mid) gnfriebcn; etiuag ]^aar!(ein er3d(;ien. INSTRUCTION BOOKS roB STUDENTS OF MODEM LANGUAGES, PUBLISHED BY D. APPLETON <& COMPANY, 649 & 651 UROADWAY, KEW YORK. A H N ' S INTRODUCTORY PRACTICAL COURSE to acquire the French Language by a Short and Easy Method. Translated and ar- ranged, and supplied with a pro- nunciation of English Sounds. By J. C. (Ehlschljeger. 13mo. Price T5cte. ''The system of instruction of Alinis simple and natural, and many who have acquired the language testify to its advantages." ri. I Integral Metliod of Frencli In- struction. NEW AND COMPREHEN- SRT] FRENCH INSTRUCTOR, based upon an Original and Philo- sophical Method, Applicable to the Study of all Languages, with an Introduction explanatory of the Method, and a Treatise on French Pronunciation. By Stephen Peap.l A^'DRF,ws and George Batchelor. lvol.,12mo. 469 pages. Price, $1.50. PRACTICAL PRONOUIT- CER AND KEY to Andrews and Batchelor's New French Instructor. Containing the Lessons of the In- structor, with a phonetic rendering in parallel columns ; a French Translation of the Exercises, to- gether with an Appendix. 1 vol. 12mo. 347 pages. Price, $1.25. It is claimed that the labor of teaching and learning the French language is immensely reduced by this new method, and the success of the pupil placed upon a footing of certainty never heretofore attained. The general characteris-tics of the system for which this claim is made are as follows : 1. The judicious combination of Theory and Prac- tice, Rule and Exercise, in their just proportion to each other. 2. A new Analysis of the Elements of Language. '3. The presentation of a Panoramic Yievi' of the French Language as a whole. 4. Teaching one thing at a time, and proceedicg by Inductive Steps. 5. The thor- ough examination of Complex Sen- tences, and the peculiar force and relations of Connecting Words. G. The furnishing of so complete a Key to the Pronunciation that the American can teach it with the same accuracy and facility as the native Parisian. B A D 1 S ' S GR AMMAIRE ANGLAISE d'apres le Systerae d' Ollendorff, a TUsage dcs Fran- 9ais. Par Charles Badois. 12mo. 282 pages. Price, $1.50. The v,'ant of a condensed Gram- mar for teaching Frenchmen the English language, long experienced by residents as'well as travellers in this country, has been met by M. Badois with this clear and practical Treatise, on the Ollendorff plan. In the course of a few lessons, the learner is so familiarized with the most necessary English words and idioms that he can^ readily express himself, and can understand ordi- nary conversation. To the gram- matical course is appended a scries of Reading Lessons, accompanied with an Interlinear translation, which renders the volume complete, and makes it all that the French student can require for the acquisi- tion of our tongue. MODERN LANGUAGES. CABINET DES FEES ; or, Ee- creative Eeaclings, aiTanged for the express use of Students in French. By G. Gekaed, Professor of the French Language and Literature. 1 vol., 12iao. Price, $1.50. " This is just the hook for learn- ers of French who have just com- Uiauced to read in that tongue." CITOUQUET'S CONYERSA- TIOJTS AI^TD DIALOGUES. By GusTAVE Chouquet. 16mo. 204 pages. Price, Tocts. A phrase-book is essential to those who would acquire an easy style of conversation in French. Such an auxiliary they will find in this work of Chouquet's, which em- braces dialosues on daily occupa- tions and ordinary topics, involving those idiomatic expressions that most frequently occur. The author displays judgment in his choice of subjects, and tact in adapting him- self to the comprehension of the young. With a knowledge of the phrases and idioms presented in this volume, the student can take part in ordinary conversation with fluency and elegance. factory mannei*, a want that waa long felt. It teaches at once French and Rhetoric— and that by a pleas- ant and easy process. CHOUQUET'S GUIDE TO FEENCH COMPOSITION. By GusTAVE Chouquet. 12mo. SOT pages. Price, $1.85. This volume is intended to serve as a reading and translation book, a text-book on Rhetoric, and a manual of French composition and conversation. The First Part Com- prises a treatise on Rhetoric, writ- ten in French, but applicable to all languages, which will discipline the mind of the learner in the elabora- tion of thought, and train his judg- ment for sound literary criticism. The Second Part is devoted to Com- position proper; contains analyses and models of narrations, descrip- tions, dissertations, letters, etc., and a list of subjects on which, after these models, the pupU is re- quired to try his powers. It will be seen that this work is intended only for those who have already acquired some knowledge of the language ; for such, particu- larly in young ladies'" schools, it is admitted to liil, in the most-eatis- COLLOT'S DRAMATIC FRENCH READER ; being a Selec- tion of some of the best Dramatic Works in the French Language. By Professor A. G. Collot. 12mo. 521 pages. Price, $1.50. In the belief that dramatic litera- ture atfords peculiar facilities for familiarizing the student with French conversation in familiar, as well as more elevated, style. Prof. Collot has brought together in this volume fourteen of the chefs-d''ce:uvre of the French drama, comedy and tragedy, by such auttiors as Scribe, Piron, Moliere, Voltaire, Racine, and Comeille. They are arranged in progressive order, and furnished with notes on such jsassages as re- quire explanation. Affording enter- taining pictvires of French life, as well as specimens of the finest style, it is believed that this collec- tion is just what is needed for ad- vanced classes. COMME^^T OM PARLE A PARIS : French as Spoken in Paris. By Madame de Petrac, 12mo. 252 pages. Price, $1.50. " Comment on parle a Paris," or how they speak French in Paris, is certainly a very desirable thing to know ; with the aid of this new ■ and unique manual by Madame de Peyrac, the knowledge may be gain- ed without difficulty. Her volume is not intended for children, but for those who have partially acquired the language, and need only famil- iarity with an elegant style of con- versation. To invest the subject with greater interest, the form of a domestic romance is adopted. A variety of characters are intro- duced, and lively tableaux of French life and manners are presented. Teachers, who arc dissatisfied with the Readers they have heretofore employed, are recommended to pro^ cure and examine this admirable volume, which has been warmh^ commended by critics and edu cators. MODERN LANGUAGES. CORINNE, OR ITALY. By Baroness de Stael. New editioii, revised and corrected. 1 vol., 12mo. 432 pages. $1.50. In the whole circle of polite lit- craLiire we scarcely know of any produclion in modern limes, that lias been honored with such lavish encomiums as the celebrated work, by Mad. de Stael, entitled "Co- riune, or Italy." The multitude of eloquent passages and enchanting pictures which" adorn this extraor- dinary production, do not impair in the least the interest of the fic- tion, as the authoress has skilful- ly introduced the digression only where the progress of the action is suspended, when the reader is even afraid of its resuming its course, and when he enjovs a mo- ment of repose, so much "the more because he is sensible of an ap- proaching storm " Corinne " is a work adapted to all readers. From its brilliant pictures the artist may derive fresh enthusiasm, with new means of expressing it ; the learned may acquire ingenious comparisons and new imasrery ; the tourist to the cla:fsic land of the Old World, the most important and judicious hints. COUTAX'S CHOIX DE POESIES (Select Poetry for Young Persons). By Madame A. Coutan. 12mo. 329 pages. Price, $1.50. Madame Coutan's collection, made during many years devoted to the teaching of French, embraces some of the choicest and best poetry in the language. While it is peculiar- ly adapted to young ladies' schools, there is no class of students or general readers to whom it will not prove an acceptable and instructive companion. Be Fivas's Frencli Works. j ^^Ew elementary! FRENCH PtEADER : An Introduc- ' tion to the French Language. Con- taining Fables, select Tales, remark- able Facts, amusing Anecdotes. With a Dictionary. By Axain de F-TVAS. 16mo. 147 pages. Price, to cents. IL THE CLASSIC FRENCH READER ; or, Beauties of the French Writers, Ancient and Mod- em. With a Vocabulary of all the Words and Idioms contained in the Work. By J. L. Jewett. 12mo. 388 pages. Price, $1.5!). The Elementary Reader, as its name imports, is for beginners. It consists of short and easy pieces, written in familiar style, and of the most attractive character. The Classic Reader may, with ad- vantage, follow the Elementarj^ or may be used independently of it with somewhat older classes. For this work, the choicest productions of the extensive field of classic French Literature have been gath- ered. The great names of Fenelon, Bossuet, Montesquieu, Chateaubri- and, Thierry, Beranger, etc., afibrd sufficient guaranty of the purity, vivacity, and elegance of the con- tents. Each piece presents a sub- ject complete in itself. By selec- tions from the writings of difl'erent literary epochs, the reader is en- abled to form an enlightened judg- ment of each, and the work is thus rendered a faithful mirror of the best French literature, ancient as well as modem. The short bio- graphical sketches of the authors, preiixedto the several extracts, will be read with interest. HI. NEW GRAMMAR OF FRENCH GRAMMARS. Cora- prising the substance of all the most approved French Grammars extant, but more especially of the Standard Work, "Grammaire des Grammiaires," sanctioned by the French Academy and the Univer- sity of Paris. With numerous Exercises and Examples illustra- tive of every Rule. By Dr. Y. de FiTAS, M. A., F. E. L S. 1 vol., 12rao. $1.25. At once the simplest and m.ost complete grammar of the French language. To the pupil, the effect is almost as- if he looked into a I map. so well defined is tlic course I of study as explained by M. de j Fivas. - " Its precision and conciseness are admirable. We cordially rec- ommend it to teachers and stu- dents. Its excellence cannot fail to secure it an established rcputatiom" —Standard. 3I0DERN LANG UA GES. THE FRENCH MANUAL : A New, Siniple, Concise, and- Easy Method of Acquiring a Conversa- tional Knowledge of the French Language, including a Dictionary of over Ten Thousand Words. By M. Alfked Hatet. Entirely re- Tised and corrected from the last English edition, with a new eystein of Pronunciation. 1 vol., 12mo. 332 pages. Half bound, $1.25. " A great many learners," says Le Coiirrier de V Europe, ''mlglit, after having waded through the tedious courses of French hitherto followed, be able to express them- selves in a sort of half academic language, but it woidd be altogether impossible for them to converse on the ordinary topics of every-day life, or give an order to a servant. It is this familiar language that M. llavet's book is destined to put them in possession of, and we be- lieve nothing has been neglected to secure that happy result." It is, in the opinion of some of our fore- most teachers, emphatically the best system for learning French. Ollendorff's French Grammars. FIRST LESSONS IN THE FRENCH LANGUAGE ; being an Introduction to Ollendorff's Larger Grammar. By G. W. Greene. 16mo. 138 pages. Price, 75 cents, OLLENDORFF'S NEWMETH- OD of learning to EeacI, Write, and Speak the French Language. With full Paradigms of the Regular and Irregular, Auxiliary, Reflective, and Impersonal Verbs. By J. L. Jew- ETT. 12mo. 498 pages. Price, $1.25. KEY TO EXERCISES. Sepa- rate volume. Price, $1. OLLENDORFF'S NEW METH- OD of learning to Read, Write, and Speak the French Language. With numerous Corrections, Additions, and Improvements, suitable for this Country. To wdiich are added. Value's System of French Pronun- ciation, his Grammatical Synopsis, a New Index, and short Models of Commercial Correspon deuce. By V. Value. 12mo. 5S8 pages. Price, $1.25. KEY TO EXERCISES. Sepa- rate volume. Price, $1. Ollendorff's French Grammars have been before the public so Ioult, and have had their merits so gener- ally acknowledged, that it is unne- cessary to enter into any detailed description of their peculiarities or lengthy argument in their favor. Suffice it to say, that tbey are found- ed in nature, and follow the same course that a child pursues in first acquiring his native tongue. They teach inductively, understandingly, interestingly. They do not repel the student in the outset by oblig- ing him to memorize dry abstract language which conveys little or no idea to his mind, but impart their lessons agreeably as well as effi- ciently by exercises, which teach the principles successively involved more clearly than any abstract lan- guage can. They give a conversa- lional, and therefore a practically useful, knowledge of the language ; the student is made constantly to apply what he learns. To these peculiarities is due the wide-spread and lasting popularity of the Ollen- dorff' series. Prof. Greene's Introduction, the first of the works named above, will be found useful for young be- ginners. In it are presented the fundamental principles of the lan- guage, carefully culled out, and H- lustrated with easy exercises. It paves the way for the larger works, preparing the pupil's mind for their more comprehensive course, and awakening in it a desire for farther knowledge. Value's and Jewett's works are essentially the same, though differ- in? somewhat in tlieir arrangement and the additions that have been made to the original. Some insti- tutions prefer one, and others the other. Either, it is believed, will impart a thorough acquaintance with French, both grammatical and conversational, by an interesting process, and with but little outlay of time and labor. NOUVEAU (LE) TESTA- :MENT. Par J. T. Ostervald. l2mo. Limp cloth, 50 cents. MODERN LANGUAGES. THE ADYENTUKES OF TELEMACHUS. By Fenelon. New edition, with the Meaning in English, at the foot of each page, of the most difficult Words occurring in the Test. To which is added a Sj'noptical Dictionary of Mythologi- cal and Geographical Names. From the edition of Charles le Brun. The whole carefully revised and corrected from Didot's Paris edi- tion. 1vol., 13mo. 395 pages. $L^. THE ADYENTUEES OF TELEMACHUS. By Fenelon. Standard edition. Edited by Ga- briel Surenne. 18mo. 393 pages. Price, 75 cents. Fenelon's world-renowned " Tele- maque " will always retain its popu- larity as a Keader for French classes, on account of the purity of its style, the interest of its narrative, and the excellence of its moral. The pres- ent edition is convenient in form, faultless in external appearance^ and as coiTect as the editorial supervision of an accomplished scholar like Su- renne can make it. PICCIOLA. By X. B. Sain- TINE. Preceded by Kesearches on the Employment of Time in State Prisons, by Paul L. Jacobs. New edition, revised and corrected. 1 vol., 12mo. $1.^5. B O E M E E ' S ELEMENTAEY FEENCH EEADER. With an Analytical Study of the French Language, a Treatise on French Poetry, and a Dictionaiy of Idioms, Proverbs, Peculiar Expressions, etc. By J. EoESTER, LL. D., Professor of the French Language and Litera- ture in the N. Y. Free Academy, l&no. 297 pages. Price, $1.50. From the N. Y. Com. Advertiser. " We invite attention to this new French Eeader, which seems admi- rably adapted to the use of the stu- dent, and especially to the code of instruction and explanation with which it is introduced— the whole forming, as we conceive, a book of exceeding value to both learners and teachers, and capable of greatly facilitating the labors of both." PEENDEEGAST'S MASTEEY SEEIES for learning Languages on New Principles. By Thomas Pken- DERGAST. Author of "The Mastery of Languages ; or, the Art of Speak- ing Foreign Tongues Idiomatical- ly." This method offers a solution of the problem, How to obtain fa- cility in speaking foreign languages grammatically, without using the Grammar in the first stage. It adopts and systematizes that pro- cess by which many couriers and ex- plorers have become expert practi- cal linguists. The following Manuals may now he had : HANDBOOK TO THE MASTEEY SEEIES, being an Introductory Treatise. Price, 50 cents. THE MASTEEY SEEIES, GEEMAN. Price, 50 cents. THE MASTEEY SEEIES, FEENCH. Price, 50 cents. To hefolloived shortly by THE MASTEEY SEEIES, SPANISH. Price, 50 cents. THE MASTEEY SEEIES, HEBEEW. Price, 50 cents. "We know that there are some Avho have given Mr. Prendersast's plan a trial, and discovered that in a very few weeks its results had sui-passed all their anticipations."— The Record. "The Mastery System gives, in our opinion, all the advantages of OUendorff's. and is free from its de- fects. ... To gain a thorough com- mand of the common phrase's which the majority use exclusively and all men chiefly, is the goal at which the Mastery System aims, and we think that goal can be reached by its means more easily and in a shorter time than by any method yet made 'knovfa.'''—Norfol7c News. MODEBN LANGUAGES. PRONOUNCING FRENCH DICTIONARY. By Gabriel Su- EENNE, F. A. S. E. IGmo. 556 pages. Price, $1.25. Pocket edition. In the preparation of this new- work, due rei^ard has been paid to tlie introduction of such, new words and definitions as the progressive changes in the language have ren- dered necessary ; and for this pur- pose the best and most recent au- thorities have been carefully con- sulted. It is therefore confidently anticipated that the volume will prove not only a useful auxiliaiy to the student, but also a convenient Pocket Companion to the traveller, wherever the French language is spoken. A vocabulary of proper names accompanies the work. ROWAN \S MODERN FRENCH READER. With a Vocabulary of the Nev/ and Diflicult Words and Idiomatic Phrases adopted in Mod- ern French Literature. By F. EowA^^. Edited by J. L. Jewett, Editor of Ollendorff's French Meth- od. 12mo. C41 pages. Price, $1.50. One object of Ibis volume is to offer specimens of the French lan- g'unge as it is spoken at the present day, and presented in the works of the modem authors of France, Avith- out the risk of sullying themind of the young reader by indelicate ex- pressions or allusions. Another is to facilitate the task of the teacher by rendering the work attractive to the pupU. Such selections have therefore been made as will, it is hoped, be interesting and entei-tain- ing to the j^oung reader, while at the same time they will prove worthy specimens of the peculiar style of their respective authors;^ , The American edition is rendered still more valuable by the addition of extracts from the writings of Sisraondi and Mignet, modern his- torians of distinguished merit. The vocabulary of new and difficult words and idiomatic phrases is con- veniently arranged for reference, and consideral)ly enlarged ; while the whole has undergone thorough revision, with a view to accuracy in every particular. The orthography ha^ "l)een made to conform to that of the Dictionary of the Academy and the r.?ago cf modcni writers. ROEMER'S SECOND FRENCH READER. Illustrated with His- torical, Geographical, and Philolo- gical Notes. 12mo. 478 pages. Price, $1.50. This volume, like the preceding one, presents, a series of lively and entertaining extracts, calculated to stimulate the curiosity and enhst the feelings of the scholar in favor of the language. The selections are made from modem authors exclu- sively, and bear witness to the nice literary discrimination of the com- piler. A.S a collection of elegant extracts, this volume is second to none; it has become a general fa- vorite both with teachers and stu- dents. R O E M E R ^S POLYGLOTT READER. Forming one of a series of Five Volumes. Translated from English Text. By J. Roemer, LL. D. 1 vol., 12mo. Price, $1.50. The desiirn of the work is to en- able the learner to have the same v>ork in five tongues. The selec- tion are made from the best authors. SPIERS AXD SURENNE'S French and English and English and French Pronouncing Diction- ary. One vol., 12mo. 973 pages. Price, ^2.50. Standard abridged edition. From new and large tj'pe. The First Part of this well-known and universally popular work con- tains : Words in common use, Terms connected v,'ith science. Terms belonging to the fine arts. Four thousand historical names, Four thousand geogi-aphical names. Upwards of eleven thousand words of recent origin, The pronunciation of every word according to the French Academy and the most eminent lexicograph- ers and grammarians; also. Jtlorc than seven hundred critical remarks, in A\iiich the various mc- tlKids of pronoiuicing employed by diifi'rent authors arc investigated and compared. The Second Part contains : A copious vocabulary of English words, with their proper pronun- ciation. Tlie whole is preceded by a critical treatise on French pro- nunciation. MODERN LANGUAGES. ADLER'S HAND-BOOK OF GEEMAJM LITEEATUEE. Con- taiuing ScMUcr's Maid of Orleans, G o e t li e ' 3 Ipliigeuia in Tauris, Tieck's Puss in Boots, The Xenia, by Goethe and Schiller. With Critical Introductions and Esplana- tor}' Notes; to which is added an Appendix of Specimens of German Prose, from the middle of the Six- teenth to the middle of the Nine- teenth Centuiy. By G. J. Adlek. 12mo. 550 pages. Price, $1.50. For classes that have made some proficiency in the German language, and desire an acquaintance with specimens of its dramatic literature, Bo more charming selection than this can be found. Sufficient aid is given, in the form of introductions and notes, to enable the student to understand thoroughly what he reads. The proi^ress of the lan- guage is graphically illustrated by t^pecimens of the literature at differ- ent eras, coiiated in an Appendix. 4. It contains five sections. The first contains easy pieces, chiefly in prose, with aU the words necessary for translating them ; the second^ short pieces in prose and poetry alternately, with copious notes and renderings ; the Udrcl, short popular tales of Grimm and others; the fourth, select ballads and other poems from Biii-ger, Goethe, Schil- ler, Uhland. Schwab, Chamisso, etc. ; thti fifth, prose extracts from the first classics. 5. At the end is added a vocabu- lary of all the words occurring in the book. The pieces have been selected and the notes prepared with great taste and judgment, so much so as to render the book a general favorite with German teachers. A NEW, PE ACTIO AL, AND Easy Method of Learning the Ger- man Language. By F. Ahn, Doctor of Philosophy, and Professor of the College of Neuss. 12mo. Price, $1. A D L E R ' S PROGRESSIVE | GERMAN EEADER. By G. J. I Abler, Professor of the German ! Language and Literature in the Uni- ver!?ity of the City of New York. 12mo. 308 pages. Price, $1.{K). The plan of this German Eeader ; is as follows : 1. The pieces are both prose and poetry, selected from the best au- thors, and present sufficient variety to keep alive the interest of the scholar. 2. It is progressive in its nature, the pieces being at first very short and easy, and increasing in diffi- culty sind length as the learner ad- vances. 3. At the bottom of the page con- stant references to the Grammar are made, the difficult passages are ex- plained and rendered. To encour- age the first attempt of the learner as much as possible, the twenty-one pieces of the first section are ana- lyzed, and all the necessary words given at the bottom of ttie page. The notes, which at first are very abundant, diminish as the learner advances. I EICHHORN'S PRACTICAL GEEMAN GEAMMAE. By Charles EichhorjST. 12mo. 287 pages. Price, $1.S). Those who have used Eichhorn's Grammar commend it in the highest terms for the excellence of its ar- rangement, the simplicity of its rules, and the tact with which abstruse points of grammar are illustrated by means of written exercises. It is the work of a practical teacher, who has learned by experience what the difficulties of the pupil are and how to remove them. R E M E R ' S POLYGLOTT EEADEE IN GERMAN. Being a. Translation of the English Selec- tion. Translated by Dr. Solger. 12mo. $1.30. WORMAN'S GERMAN GEA3IMAR. 1 VOL, 12mo. 500 pages. Price, $2.00. The Elementary work by the same author has met with great success, liaving been introduced into a large Biimber of schools and colleges. to MODEBN LANGUAGES. OLLENDOEFF'S NEW METH- OD of Learning to Eead, Write, and Speak the German Language. By Geokgb J. Adler, a. M. ISmo. 510 pages. Price, $1.25. HEY TO EXEECISES. Sepa- -rate volume. Price, $1. Few books have maintained tlieir ■Dopularity in the schools lor so long a period as the Ollendorflf series. The verdict pronounced in ttieir favor, on their, first appearance in Europe, has been signally confirmed in America. The publishers have received the strongest testimonials in relation to their merits from the press, from State and county school officers, from principals of acade- mies, and teachers of public and pri- vate schools in all seclioas of the United States. Grammars for Teaching English to Germans. OLLENDORFF'S NEW METH- OD for Germans to Learn to Eead, Yv^rite, and Speak the English Lan- guage. Arranged and Adapted to Schools and Private Academies. By P. Gands. 12mo. 599 pages. Price, $1J50. KEY TO THE EXEBOLSES. Separate volume. Price, $1. BRYAN'S GRxiMMAR FOR Germans to learn English. Edited by Professor ScnuiEDEK. 12mo. 189 pages. Price, $1.26. The publishers have got out these A'olumes in view of th^ great num- ber of Germans residing in and con- stantly emigrating to the United States, withv/hom the speedy acqui- sition of English is a highly desir- able object. To aid them in this, the services of competent and ex- perienced teachers have been pro- cured, and the admirable Grammars named above are the results of their labors. The Ollendorff Grammar embraces a full and complete synopsis of Eng- lish Grammar, applied at every step to practical exercises. It is con- structed according to the "New Method " which has so generally approved itself to ptiblic favor. A moutii's study of this \olume will supply the learner v.ith such current idioms that he can comprehend ordinary conversation, and in turn make himself uuderstood. Bryan's Course is briefer, and better adapted for primary classes and those whose time of study is limited. It presents the cardinal principles of the language, well ar- ranged and clearly iHiistrated. The anomalies of English syntax are handled in a masterly manner, and the general treatment of the sub- ject such as to remove from it all difficulties by the way. ELEMENTARY G E R M A N READER. By Rev. L. W. Heyden- EEicH, Professor of Languages at Bethlehem, Pa. Price, $1.00. This is an excellent volume for beginners, combining the advan- tages of Grammar and Reader. It has received strong and cordial commendations from the best Ger- man scholars in the country : among whom are Prof. Schmidt, of Colum- bia College, N. Y. ; William M. Reynolds, late Pres. of Capitol Univ., Columbus, Ohio ; Edward H. Eeichel. Principal of Nazareth Hall ; W. D. Whitney, Prof, of Sanscrit and German in Yale College, etc., etc. Italian. MEADOWS'S ITALTAN-AND- ENGLISnDICTIONx\RY. In Two Parts. I. Italian-aud-English ; II. English-and-Ttalian. Comprehend- ing, in the First Part, all the Old Words, Contractions, and Licences used by the ancient Italian Poets and Prose Writers ; in the Second Part, all the various Meanings of English Verbs. With a new and concise Grammar, to render easy the acquirement of the Italian Lan- guage; exhibiting the Promincia- tion by Corresponding Sounds, tho Parts of Speech, Gender of Italian Nouns, New Conjugation of Regu- . lar and Irregular Verbs, Accent on Italian and English Words, List of usual Christian and Proper Names, Names of Countries and Nations. By F. C. Meadows, M. A. 1 vol., IGrao. $3. MODERN LANGUAGES. ELEMENTARY GRAMMx\R OF THE ITALIiVlT LAI^GUAGE. Progressively Arranged for the use of Schools and Colleges. By G. B. FONTANA. 12mo. 236 pp. $1.50. The object of this work is to pre- sent the language as spoken to-day, in its simplest garb, both theoreti- cally and practically. The Gram- mar is divided into two parts, em- bracing Sixty Lessons and Sixty Exercises. The first part is excki- t^ively given to rules indispensable to a general idea of the language ; the second is framed for those who are desirous of having an insight in- to its theory, and consists of syn- onyms, maxims, idioms, and figura- tive expressions. The Exercises of both parts are very regularly pro- gressive,— and those of the second part are of course the most difiicult. Some of them contain extracts from celebrated poems translated into plain prose, so that the pupil may compare his Itahan translation with the original, which has been in- serted for that purpose at the end of the book. Others are biographi- cal sketches of the most prominent among the Italian writers ; by which means the pupil, whilst ac- quiring the language, may become familiar with the life and works of some of the classic Italian authors, such as Manzoni, Alfieri, Tasso, Petrarch, and the father of Italian language and literature, Dante M\- ghicri. FORESTI'S ITALIAN EEADEE : A Collection of Pieces in Italian Prose, designed as a Eead- ing-Book for Students of the Italian Language. By E. Felix Fokesti, LL. D. 12mo. 298 pages. Price, $1.50. In making selections for this vol- ume, Prof. Foresti has had recourse to the modern writers of Italy rather than to the old school of novelists, historians, and poets ; his object being to present a picture of the Italian language as it is written and spoken at the present day. The literary taste of the compiler and his judgment as an instructor have been brought to bear with the happiest results in this valuable Header. From the SavannaJi EepiiUican. " The selections are from popular authors, such as Botta, Manzoni, Machiavelli, Yillani, and others. They are so made as not to consti- tute mere exercises, but contain distinct relations so complete as to gratify the reader and engage his attention while they instruct. This is a marked improvement on that old system which exacted much labor without enlisting the sym- pathies of the student. The idioms that occur in the selections are ex- plained by a glossary appended to each. The Italian Reader can with confidence be recommended to stu- dents in the language as a safe and sure guide. After mastering it, the Italian poets and other classicists may be approached with confi- dence.'" MILLHOUSE'S NEW ENG- lish- and -Italian and Italian-and- English Dictionary. With the Pro- nunciation of the Italian. With many additions, by FERcmAi^r) Bracctfoeti. 2 vols., 8vo. Half bound, $6.00. This Italian Dictionary is consid- ered the best which has yet been published. It was prepared by tha late John Millhouse, and is ac- knowledged, by those who have made themselves familiar with the Italian, to excel aU that have yet ap- peared. ROEMER'S POLYGLOTT Reader, in the Italian Language ; being a Translation of the English Book under that title. 1 vol., 12mo. $1.50. Ollendorff's Italian Grammars. PRIMARY LESSONS IN Learning to Read, Write, and Speak the Italian Language. Introductory to the Larger Grammar. By G. W, Greene. ISmo. 238 pages. Price, 75 cts. OLLENDORFF'S NEW METH- OD of Learning to Read, Write, and Speak the Italian Language. With Additions and Corrections. By E. Felix Foeesti, LL. D. ISmo. '533 pages. Price, $1.50, MODERN LANGUAGES. KEY. Separate volume. Price, $1. In Ollendorff's grammars is for the first time preeented a sj'stem by which the etudeut can acquire a conversational knowledi^e of Italian. This will recommend them to prac- tical students ; while, at the same time, there is no lack of rules and principles for those who would pur- sue a systematic grammatical course with the view of translating and writing the language. Prof. Greene's Introduction should be taken up by youthful classes, for whom it is specially designed, the more difficult parts of the course being left for the larger volume. Tlie advanced work has been care- fully re\ased by Prof. Foresti, who has made such emendations and ad- ditions as the wants of the country required. In many sections the services of an Italian teacher cannot be obtained ; the Ollendoi-ff Course and Key will there supply the want of a master in the most satisfactory manner. From the United States Gazette. "The system of learning and teaching the living languages by Ollendorff is so superior to all other modes, that in England and on the Continent of Europe, scarcely any other is in use, in well-directed academies and other institutions of learning. To those who feel dis- posed to cultivate an acquaintance with Italian literature, this work wiU prove invaluable, abridging, by an immense deal, the period com- monly employed iu studying the language." Spanisli. AHN'S SPANISH GPvxiMMAR ; being a New, Practical, and Easy Method of Learning the Spanish Language ; after the System of A. F. Ahn, Doctor of Philosophy, and Professor at the College of Neuss. First American edition, revised and enlarged. 12mo. 149 pages. |1. KEY. 25 cents. Prof. Ahn' 8 method is one of peculiar excellence, and has met with great success. It has been happily described in his own words : "Learn a foreign language as you learned your mother tongue" — in the same simple manner, and with the same natural gradations. This method of the distinguished Ger- man Doctor has been applied in the present instance to the Spanish Language, upon the basis of the ex- cellent Grammars of Lespada and Martinez, and it is hoped that its simjplicity and utility will procure for it the favor that its German, French, and Italian prototypes have already found iu the Schools and Colleges of Europe. (DE BELEM) THE SPANISH PHRASE-BOOK; or. Key to Spanish Conversation. Containing the chief Idioms of the Spanish Lan- guage, with the Conjugations of the Auxiliary and the Regular Verbs, on the plan of the late Abbe Bossut. Ey E. M. DE BELEii. 1 vol., 18mo. 87 cents. DE VERE'S GRAMMAR OF THE SPANISH LANGUAGE. "With a History of the Language and Practical Exercises. By M. Schele DE Veke. 12mo. 273 pages. Price, $1.50. In this volume are embodied the results of masy years' experience ou the part of the author, as Professor of Spanish in the University of Vir- ginia. It aims to impart a critical knowledge of the language by a systematic course of e^rammar,' il- lustrated with appropriate exer- cises. The author has availed him- self of the labors of recent gram- marians and critics: and by con- densing his rules and principles, and rejecting a burdensome superfluity of detail, he has brought the whole within a comparatively small com- pass. By pursuing this simple course, the language may be easily and quickly mastered, not only for conversational purposes, but for reading it fluently and writing it with elegance. From tJie PhUadelpJda Daily News. "No student of the Castilian dia^ lect should be without this Gram- mar. It is at once concise and comprehensive — m ultvm in parvo^ containing nothing that is redun- dant, yet omitting nothing that is essential to the learner. The con- jugations are so admirably arransred as no lomrer to present that stum- bling-block which has frightened so many from the study of one of the richest and most majestic of lan- guages." H151 74 . STANDARD ITALIAN W0BK6. Ollendorff's Spanish Grammar. A New Method of Learning to Eead. Write, and Speak the Spanish Language ; with Practical Rnles for Spanish Pronunciation, and Models of Social and Commercial Correspondence. By M. Velazquez and T. Simon- NE. 12mo. 560 pages. KEY TO THE EXERCISES. Separate voiame. Ssoane's Neuman and Saretti's Spanish-and-English and Eiiglish-and-Spanish Pronouncing Dictionary. By Mariano Velazquez de la Cadena, Professor of the Spanish Language and Literature in Columbia CoDege, N. Y., and Corresponding Member of the ISTatioual Institute. Washington. Large Svo. 1.390 pages. Neat type, fine paper, and strong binding. In the revision of the work by Velazquez, more than eight thou- sanil woi'ds. idioius, and familiar phrases have been added. It gives in both ianriia'jfes the exact equivalents of the words in general use, boih in ihelr literal and metaphorical acceptations. StandiiTd Pronouncing Spanisli Dictionary. An Abridgment of Yehizciuyz's Large Dictionary, intended for Schools. Colleges. and Truvvilers. Li two Parts. I. Spanish-English : 11. Eng- lish-Spi'.nisb.. By Maeiajso Velazquez de la Cadena. r^mo. ■ 833 pages, Yeiasqiisz'jj Easy Introduction to Spanish Conversation. By MAEiA>fo Velazquez de la Cadena. ISmo. 100 page.~. S'ew Spanish S,eader. Consistingof Extracts from tlio Works of rhe most approved Authors, in Prose and Verse, arranged in progressive oi'der ; with Notes Explanatory of the Idioms and most difficult Constructions, and a copious Vocabu- lary. 12mo. 351 pages. Toloii's Spanish Seader. 12mo. 156 pages. Mastery Series— Spanish. By Thomas Pkendsrgasx. liJmo. ITALIAN TEXT-BOOKS. rontana'3 Elementary Grammar of the Itali£:n Language. Progressively arranged for the use of Schuoii and Colleges. 12mo. 23o pages. Foresti's Italian Eeader. A Collection of Pieces in Italian Prose, designed a^ x Seading-book for Students of the Italian Language. l-Jmo. -^98 pages. ;#